Home

PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide

1. phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 6 19 Task 3 Configuring quality of service Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Table 6 5 Quality of service attributes Attribute L2CP Queue Mapping Priority Queue Mapping Meaning Specifies the layer 2 control protocol bridge and GARP frame queue mapping Bridge frames have destination addresses in the range 01 80 c2 00 00 00 to 01 80 c2 00 00 0F GARP MRP frames have destination addresses in the range 01 80 c2 00 00 20 to 01 80 c2 00 00 2f QO is the lowest priority queue Specifies the VLAN priority flag to packet queue Mapping QO is the lowest priority queue phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 4 Installing license keys Task 4 Installing license keys This task consists of the following procedures Checking licensed capabilities on page 6 21 Generating a new license key on page 6 23 Entering a new license key on page 6 23 Some PTP 800 products are supplied with two license keys one installed at the factory and one alternative key ANOTE A license key is not required in order to enable the 1 1 protection capability Each of the PTP 800s in the protection scheme is individually licensed and configured with its own license key for the capacity of the link Checking licensed capabilities To check that the capabilities of the installed license key meet the operator s requirements proceed as f
2. Managing alarms and Os cre cecncac i ecccanansoenieer eTEN iara EKORRE TE REKOA RAER 7 13 DE T A E AA T 7 13 Managing email OS ach seep crwerparvihan n r A EEEIEE EE EEr riii 7 18 Manag no o NEU TA ea ERE N EEI EE EEA ESS 7 19 Disabling and enabling the wireless interface cc cece ec eceeeecececececececececececececececeseeees 7 25 Disabling wireless TTaNSMISSION sscissesaccseascascaatesvadurasciactsbeeriaceasareumnvaseacsanatqiaceeneaseieans 7 25 Enabling wireless transmissi ameter te meer ttar eee nia eT reste nt ete AEEA EE 7 27 Managing wireless link ProteCtiON cccccececececececececececececeeececececececeeeesesesenesenenenenenenens 7 28 Viewing the status of a protected link 0 0 cece cece nec ececececececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 7 28 Using the Protected Link 81s 0 gt eeemnee ems annan reer tine ements se ween nen ane nner ey aera er 7 30 Forcing protechon swith Sah oc atpaatviondiebacineoean heie EE EEEE 7 31 ig ONG and disabling fault AV OUC CLIO niece scene ccaevsise aie nen errr Ar EEEE N E ECAR 7 33 Dm E EE S EE ES 7 35 Disabling AES encryption soriire aneres ir r indiar eie REA a E eei 7 35 Changing AES oneIypHON KEYS esrersi eirean 7 36 Changiy the log Out OMET ersinnen E E N 7 39 Monad Prior ONCE sirrin EEA AA ENEN E AEE 7 40 Checking system statistics and COUTTETS seissrerierririr tuneriai eenkant dadini d E NAN Nis 7 40 Resetting system statistics and counters cccccececece
3. cece ec eeeeeeeeeeeees 4 66 Table 4 80 11 GHz FCC and Canada with 30 MHz bandwidth ccc cceceeeeneeeeenees 4 67 Table 4 81 11 GHz FCC and Canada with 40 MHz bandwidth ccc cc ec eceeeenee enone 4 67 Table 4 82 11 GHz ETSI with 40 MHz channel separation cece ececeececeeeeeeseeeeeeees 4 68 Table 4 83 13 GHz ETSI with 7 MHz channel Separation cc ccc cccceceececeeeeeececceseseeeuees 4 69 Table 4 84 13 GHz ETSI with 14 MHz channel Separation cece ccc eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 69 Table 4 85 13 GHz ETSI with 28 MHz channel Separation ccc cece ec eceececeeeeeeseseeeeees 4 70 Table 4 86 15 GHz ETSI with 7 MHz channel Separation ccc ccceccecececeseececeeseseeeuees 4 70 Table 4 87 15 GHz ETSI with 14 MHz channel Separation cece cece ec eceeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 4 71 Table 4 88 15 GHz ETSI with 28 MHz channel Separation ccc cece ec eceececeeeeeeseeeeeuees 4 71 Table 4 89 15 GHz ETSI with 56 MHz channel Separation cece cece eee ceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeuees 4 72 Table 4 90 18 GHz FCC and Canada with 10 MHz bandwidth cc cec cece seeeceeeen ones 4 73 Table 4 91 18 GHz FCC and Canada with 20 MHz bandwidth ccc ec cece eeeeneeenees 4 73 Table 4 92 18 GHz FCC and Canada with 30 MHz bandwidth ccc cece eceeeeeeeeeeeees 4 74 Table 4 93 18 GHz FCC and Canada with 40 MHz bandwidth cecscscssvevsve
4. Tx Rx CMU 1 Tx port to Ethernet switch Rx port TX port CMU 1 Rx port to Ethernet switch 0 Tx Rx SFP module in CMU 2 Tx Rx CMU 2 Tx port to Ethernet switch Rx port bS CMU 2 Rx port to Ethernet switch Tx port d E SFP modules in Ethernet switch Tx Rx Refer to Connecting fiber cables to the CMU on page 5 83 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Preparing the network connections protected Chapter 5 Installation Installing a protection cable Ifa 1 1 protected configuration requires a protection cable connect the CMU Management ports together as shown in Figure 5 29 The cable pin outs are specified in Protection cable on page 4 54 Figure 5 29 Protection cable connections Management port in CMU 1 Management port in CMU 2 Cat5e cable phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Chapter 6 Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment This chapter describes all configuration and alignment tasks that are performed when a PTP 800 link is deployed The following tasks are usually performed during staging before site installation Task 1 Connecting to the unit on page 6 2 Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces on page 6 7 Task 3 Configuring quality of service on page 6 19 Task 4 Installing license keys on page 6 21 Task 5 Upgrading software version on page 6 24 Task 6
5. Static bend radius When installing a flexible waveguide pay attention to the static bend radius quoted in the waveguide manufacturer s data sheet Static bend radius is the minimum bend that an assembly may be subject to without repeat movement except as a consequence of small vibrations or axial expansions ANOTE Before installation check that the ODU remote mount kit waveguide and antenna have compatible interfaces phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 5 13 Installing antenna with a single ODU Chapter 5 Installation Mounting ODU on pole using remote mount kit RMK To mount the ODU on the pole using a remote mount kit RMK proceed as follows 1 Follow the manufacturer s instructions to attach the RMK to the mast or pole 2 Apply silicone grease to the O ring of the RMK transition x SON Yj XX i 5 14 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing antenna with a single ODU 4 Fit the ODU to the RMK transition ensuring that the locating pegs on the RMK transition fit into the peg holes in the ODU waveguide interface 5 Secure the ODU to the RMK with the four latches taking care to ensure they are correctly engaged phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 15 Installing antenna with a single ODU Chapter 5 Installation 6 Check that the RMK and ODU are correctly mounted on the mast or pole Assembling the flexible waveguide hangers T
6. j g CNT 400 coaxial cable 50 Ohm IF cable Hoisting Grip for CNT 400 cable Se Oe a phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Installation inventories Motorola description part number and notes Two CMUs are required per link PTP800 Modem 1000 100BaseT with Capacity CAP 10 Mbps Motorola part number WB3480 Kit contents one CMU Motorola model number WB3517 CMU bracket power connector and ground lug Two kits are required per link total four LPUs LPU END KIT PTP800 Motorola part number WB3657 CNT 400 cable is supplied by Motorola with the following lengths and part numbers 50 Ohm Braided Coaxial Cable 75 meter Motorola part number 30010194001 50 Ohm Braided Coaxial Cable 500 meter Motorola part number 30010195001 For hoisting the IF cable up to the ODU without damaging the connector At least two grips are required per link Hoisting Grip for CNT 400 cable Motorola part number 07009304001 4 3 Installation inventories item Coaxial cable installation assembly kit for CNT 400 cable Cable grounding kits for 1 4 and 3 8 cable Crimp tool for N type connector Screened Cat5e cable 4 4 Chapter 4 Reference information Motorola description part number and notes Two kits are required per link Coaxial Cable Installation Assembly Kit Motorola part number WB3616 For kit contents see Table 4 2 The
7. phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 ix Contents eck ne DE Sih tothe VEL scccapansonnnoncdrstaraviedsanchabscacernesonserecscupppercanareetansaanisoass 8 2 GOCE tE CMU Slats MAICA een Erte tT rte rr eet ni ren rnc err rrr et srt nmr err Serer 8 3 En UES Ae E E A T E EEEE E ein ein IETA E E EE A TIA T A A ETA 8 3 Check the Management port Ethernet connection sssseesesseesesseesesseseesseseeseeseeseesee 8 4 Check the copper Data port Ethernet connection ssesssessessseesseesseeeseeeseceseeeseeesseesee 8 5 Check the fiber Data port Ethernet connection esssssesssessesreessseessecsreeeseceseeeseeesreesee 8 6 Gheock Dy ik sae cs wore eared na E Ana Era T AEE 8 7 Check Drowser srin in E a aT 8 8 installing the UNE eresrrsrseniniir i estorrar OEE ER EE EEE SEE 8 9 Connect to the web management interface ssesesseesesseesessessrssesecsseseeseeseesesseeseeseesee 8 9 CICR ODLU E E esr r T E E EE 8 9 E E A a E ms A 8 10 AEO a O e EE E 8 10 Check transmit and receive frequencies esssescseesreessessreessecssecesseeeeeeeseeeseeesseesseess 8 11 Check waveguide and antenna S ssssssssrissisrisrititsissittisdristtrr tekisin rar EEEE EE n ENa 8 11 B A E r EE E E EE AE E EEN EAE EAN EE EEO NAAA TEE ETE AE 8 11 TSUN protection SW COV CI ei cceruhestectnasuisriecrsvareriawieidetasiertinsnrianieb erienir ates 8 12 Check 0 ae 1 oc ei Bla Sane e MES kel ogre Es p 0 cane meen re aes ete enn are ete Pee et nt eta
8. cccececececececeeeeeeecececeeeceseaeeeeeaes 6 64 Step 6 Antenna Alignment page link established cece cecec ec ec senescence 6 66 Alignment Abandoned esssseesessessessessessesseseesersersesseesesseesessesoesseseeseeseesoeserseese 6 66 Step 7 Installation Complete PAGE soesssseessessesessessessessessessesseseesoeseeseeseeseesee 6 66 Clock section of Remote Management page SNTP disabled eee 6 71 Clock section of Remote Management page SNTP enabled cece eee 6 72 System Administration Login DAG yareecccsdcaseionessbosivesidusdieeeeeuserienyecienweiictansnes 7 2 oD N e E E 7 2 System Administration menu with all submenus Opened sosssssoesesssesseseessesees 7 4 Vo a O ES E 7 6 System Status page unprotected link sssssesesseesessessesseseessesseseesoeserseeseeseeseesess 7 8 System Status page protected link ssesessessessesseesesseesessessessesoesoesecseeseeseeseeses 7 9 Alor warning ToN e a ce apace cesar eoncaecence tester emcee nes 7 13 el AE PAQE orig rrricoevecrnisierpanenssonvenereer vise tenn ETEA IA EEEE ERN 7 26 System Configuration page partial view when transmitter is muted 7 27 dao Re Gir c10 LINE Or c coun eemer eT eee e err A EE 7 28 Encryption eo ceca tencceenarsadeheumcdecacaeeeedncaqaavaueaneiiaseondomenceraseesteseserenai 7 38 Web Page Properties Wy Cs criccncpepsoynnivaviead Ge onid Enni E AE AN EN Aa Arn ECE EET 7 39
9. Air terminals are typically installed along the length of the main roof perimeter lightning protection ring typically every 6 1m 20ft The main roof perimeter lightning protection ring must contain at least two down conductors connected to the grounding electrode system The down conductors should be physically separated from one another as far as practical 2 12 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Grounding and lightning protection Figure 2 7 Grounding and lightning protection on building IF cable Air Terminal Finial Grounding cable ODU and antenna Lightning Protection Unit LPU Tower grounding D conductor AC service Building ground ring phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 2 13 Grounding and lightning protection Chapter 2 Planning considerations Protection inside the building The following protection requirements must be observed inside multi story or high rise buildings Figure 2 8 The IF cable shield must be bonded to the building grounding system at the entry point to the building The IF cable shield must be bonded to the building grounding system at the entry point to the equipment area An LPU must be installed within 600 mm 24 in of the entry point to the equipment area Figure 2 8 Grounding and lightning prot
10. All bends curves and connections must be routed towards the grounding electrode system ground rod or ground bar Grounding conductors must be securely fastened Braided grounding conductors must not be used Approved bonding techniques must be used for the connection of dissimilar metals phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 2 9 Grounding and lightning protection Chapter 2 Planning considerations Specific requirements for the ODU The following ODU protection requirements must be implemented The distance between the ODU and LPU should be kept to a minimum it is recommended that the cable supplied in the accessory kit be used The IF cable length between the ODU and LPU must be less than 800mm The top LPU should be mounted lower than the ODU The ODU and top LPU should be bonded together with the 800 mm long 16mm 6AWG cable supplied in the accessory kit The LPU should be bonded to the tower or main grounding system using the 600mm long 16mm 6AWG cable supplied in the accessory kit Protection requirements for a mast or tower installation If the equipment ODU or antenna is to be mounted on a metal tower or mast then in addition to the general protection requirements above the following requirements must be observed The equipment must be lower than the top of the tower or its lightning terminal and finial The metal tower or mast must be correctly grounded A grounding kit must be installed at the first
11. Automatic Tranemiter Power Control Enabled Submit Updated System Configuration 7 26 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Disabling and enabling the wireless interface Enabling wireless transmission Perform this procedure to permit the antenna to radiate This is necessary to restart the link when maintenance work is complete To enable wireless transmission select menu option Configuration The System Configuration page is displayed Figure 7 9 Select Enable Transmitter The Transmitter attribute value changes to Enabled A NOTE Wireless transmission can also be enabled from the Protection Configuration page Figure 6 22 for both protected and unprotected links Figure 7 9 System Configuration page partial view when transmitter is muted system Configuration This page control the day to day configuration of the PTF wireless unit Do not enable the transmitter unless itis safe for the ODU to radiate Transmitter luted Enable Transmitter phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 7 27 Managing wireless link protection Chapter 7 Operation Managing wireless link protection This section describes the features of the Protected Link page These are A graphical view of the current protection state of a wireless link and the individual PTP 800 units An indication of any alarm conditions detected by the PTP 800s Access to the management GUI of the PTP 800
12. esseseresresrererssecsreerersseesersrerserssreseerereseeseeeseeseeseeee 2 8 Specific requirements for the ODU ccc cccccecencecenceceecenseceneeseecesseceesestesenseesn 2 10 Protection requirements for a mast or tower inStallation cccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 10 Protection requirements for the ODU on a high rise building ccc cece ee eeee 2 12 e ec 8 Ogata a ciel ey gisele 1h ck ereeen ee teee ere een ee Mee nt kee eee nee tanh eee er eer eet oe re 2 16 P S a 0 es PALA 8 Pe re er en en eee Teme e Omer ener EE ent nee rey err mer tenner tt 2 17 iJ Es niche sia loys R04 1912 gt he eee ance Merete meer RAET 2 17 Protect d Link Manage MEDI sersrraiisriasiiri rae aren re tie nnn een EAEE 2 18 VLAN memDers hD esiet iasa RE E A 2 19 Paornly or ii ener TiC accorncwondacacebenonbavuemskoacadus A EEA REN 2 19 U E E ENE EAEN E EAE E E E E A A E T A T AE E E E 2 19 Quality of service for bridged Ethernet traffic esseseesessessessessesseseessessessesseseeseese 2 19 Fasl Ethernet port SOW ses wctrecaccoxdcabosieracewcessncsasnarensetaneenbadlowiiocsteantocsaveereseneentens 2 20 Chapter 3 Legal informatio cisicisiiicasinincaseiscctsnciuincanevevarsiacasandiadetetinneasaninudasandcassndens 3 1 Motorola Solutions Inc end user license agreement sssesessessessessessesresseseesoesseseeseesees 3 2 EAE NS PE P O E E E E T P E A E N E A A 3 2 ee DEE E E S 3 2 COn ONS O U E E EE E Ctr rr enters t
13. 32 QAM 0 84 No 202 7 70 2 68 9 22 16 QAM 0 79 Yes 152 4 77 2 74 2 8 PSK 0 80 56 8 79 77 8 22 8PSK 0 80 115 8 75 9 74 7 22 QPSK 0 80 Yes 37 8 86 1 29 QPSK 0 80 Yes 77 1 83 20 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Wireless operation Capacity transmit power and sensitivity 38 GHz Table 4 118 38 GHz FCC and Canada with 10 MHz bandwidth Modulation 128QAM 64QAM 32QAM 16QAM 8PSK QPSK 0 83 0 83 0 84 0 91 0 85 0 86 Fixed ref Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Capacity Mbit s 50 8 42 8 33 6 29 1 20 4 13 8 Sensitivity dBm 71 8 74 8 77 4 79 9 82 5 87 4 ACM thresh out dBm 67 3 70 5 73 4 76 1 78 2 ACM thresh in dBm 65 9 69 3 72 1 74 9 77 Max tx power dBm 16 16 20 20 20 21 Min tx power dBm 1 1 1 1 1 1 Table 4 119 38 GHz FCC and Canada with 50 MHz bandwidth Modulation 206QAM 128QAM 64QAM 32QAM 16QAM 8PSK QPSK 0 83 0 82 0 82 0 87 0 91 0 84 0 80 Fixed ref Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Capacity Mbit s 301 7 258 6 217 4 178 6 150 5 103 7 65 7 Sensitivity dBm 62 3 65 5 68 5 70 8 72 8 76 1 80 7 ACM thresh out dBm 55 62 1 65 67 5 69 8 72 6 ACM thresh in dBm 52 8 60 8 63 7 66 3 68 5 71 3 Max tx power dBm 14 16 16 20 20 20 21 Min tx power dBm 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 4 87 Wireless operation Chapter 4 Reference in
14. 6 52 Figure 6 29 Step 2 Radio License Configuration page ETSI adaptive modulation 6 52 Figure 6 30 Step 3 Wireless Configuration page ccccceccccececececececececececececececececececeeeeeeees 6 54 Figure 6 31 Step 3 Wireless Configuration page ETSI adaptive modulation 6 54 Figure 6 32 Step 4 Confirm Installation Configuration PagGe cccccececececececececeeeeeeeeeeees 6 56 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 xiii List of Figures Figure 6 33 Figure 6 34 Figure 6 35 Figure 6 36 Figure 6 37 Figure 6 38 Figure 6 39 Figure 6 40 Figure 6 41 Figure 6 42 Figure 6 43 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 Figure 7 6 Figure 7 7 Figure 7 8 Figure 7 9 Figure 7 10 Figure 7 11 Figure 7 12 Figure 7 13 Figure 7 14 Figure 7 15 Figure 7 16 Figure 7 17 Figure 7 18 Figure 7 19 Figure 7 20 Figure 7 21 Figure 7 22 Figure 7 23 Step 5 Start Antenna Alignment page sss viniviederesrshiearersadeapacess upareewaneleaterenteses 6 57 Step 6 Configuration Complete page step 5 cancelled cece ceceee cence 6 58 Step 6 Antenna Alignment page searching for link cece cece cee eeeeeee es 6 62 Testmg JDU voltade I anenctcrs cet sncoeacemananoedscntncnwnaavannenslavcecncissastberastecsaracsnsees 6 63 Symmetrical relationship between voltage and alignment ccececee eee 6 64 Typical RSSI voltage peaks and troughs
15. 66 6 17 OZ QAM 0 84 No 200 7 70 7 69 5 22 16 QAM 0 79 Yes 150 9 77 1 74 8 73 5 22 8 PSK 0 80 99 7 79 6 78 4 22 8PSK 0 80 114 6 76 5 75 2 22 QPSK 0 80 Yes 37 86 6 29 9 QPSK 0 80 76 3 29 9 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Capacity transmit power and sensitivity 23 GHz Table 4 102 23 GHz FCC and Canada with 10 MHz bandwidth Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm Table 4 103 23 GHz FCC and Canada with 20 MHz bandwidth Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 128QAM 0 83 Yes 50 7 74 1 69 67 5 17 2 256QAM 0 76 Yes 113 7 69 9 61 3 08 4 15 2 64QAM 0 82 Yes 42 2 77 3 72 7 71 4 17 128QAM 0 83 Yes 102 2 72 68 2 66 9 17 32QAM 0 87 Yes 34 7 79 3 74 9 73 6 22 64QAM 0 81 Yes 84 9 75 4 71 6 70 4 17 16QAM 0 88 Yes 28 2 82 2 78 1 76 8 22 32QAM 0 84 Yes 67 8 77 8 74 3 73 22 SPSK 0 86 Yes 20 8 84 5 79 9 78 6 22 16QAM 0 91 Yes 58 5
16. 700 MHz 39195 39405 MHz phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 B4 Lo 4 29 ODU specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Motorola Standard Sub Sub band Transmit Part band frequency and Number receive Spacing 01010433009 B4 Hi 39895 40105 MHz 01010433010 ETSI B1 Lo 37044 37632 MHz 1260 01010433011 B1 Hi 38304 38892 MHz MHz 01010433012 B2 Lo 37604 38192 MHz 01010433001 B2 Hi 38864 39452 MHz ODU remote mount kit specifications Table 4 25 contains specifications for optional ODU remote mount kits that can be ordered from Motorola Table 4 25 ODU remote mount kit specifications Band Output Motorola part number 6 GHZ UDR70 07010109008 7 GHz UBR84 07010109001 8 GHz UBR84 07010109002 11 13 GHZ UBR120 07010109003 15 GHz UBR140 07010109004 18 26 GHz UBR220 07010109005 38 GHz UBR320 07010109007 4 30 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Antenna specifications Antenna specifications This section contains specifications of the antennas that are available from Motorola for PTP 800 installations Each available antenna is listed with the following parameters Frequency Motorola number Diameter Polarization Interface Mid band gain Vertical beamwidth Weight Antenna wind velocity limits For all the antennas listed in this section the maximum permitted wind velocities are Operational wind velocity 113 km h 70 mph
17. Feature Licensed bands Channel separation ETSI Channel bandwidth FCC IC Modulation Duplex scheme Capacity options Latency Encryption ATPC phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Specification Lower 6 GHz FCC IC ETSI Upper 6 GHz ETSI 7 GHz ETSI 8 GHz ETSI 11 GHz FCC IC ETSI 13 GHz ETSI 15 GHz ETSI Mexico ANZ 18 GHz FCC IC ETSI Brazil 23 GHz FCC IC ETSI 26 GHz FCC ETSI 38 GHz FCC IC ETSI 7 13 75 14 27 5 28 30 40 55 56 or 60 MHz 10 20 30 40 or 50 MHz QPSK 8PSK 16QAM 320AM 64QAM 128QAM and 256QAM Fixed or adaptive modulation Frequency division duplex Basic capacity is 10 Mbit s in each link direction May be upgraded via software license key to one of the following capacity levels 20 30 40 50 100 150 200 300 Mbit s Unlimited Ultra low latency lt 115 us 368 Mbit s with 64 bytes frame FIPS 197 128 256 bit AES encryption Supported in all configurations 4 55 Wireless operation Chapter 4 Reference information Frequency bands and channel separation EN 302 217 refers to the relevant ITU R and CEPT recommendations which are appropriate for operation in ETSI regions This is summarized in Table 4 61 Table 4 61 ETSI band plan Frequency ERC CEPT ITU R T R Channel GHz MHz separation MHz 5 9 6 4 14 01 Annex 1 F 383 8 252 04 29 65 6 4 7 1 14 02E F 384 10 340 30 40 60 340 7 14 7 1 7 9 02 06 Annex 1 F 385 9 154 7 14 28 an
18. Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 256QAM 0 80 Yes 236 6 66 7 59 8 57 8 15 128QAM 0 82 Yes 206 8 69 4 66 1 64 9 17 64QAM 0 88 Yes 181 9 71 8 68 4 67 1 17 32QAM 0 92 Yes 150 7 73 9 70 7 69 5 Ze Chapter 4 Reference information 16QAM 0 91 Yes 98 5 80 1 76 8 75 6 22 16QAM 0 79 Yes 103 8 78 8 75 9 74 7 22 BPSK 0 83 Yes 40 3 83 1 79 3 78 1 22 8PSK 0 80 Yes 78 9 81 77 6 76 3 22 QPSK 0 88 Yes 28 5 87 1 23 QPSK 0 80 Yes 92 5 84 6 23 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Table 4 114 26 GHz ETSI with 7 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 128QAM 0 76 Yes 34 4 76 4 71 7 70 3 17 7 64QAM 0 82 Yes 30 78 8 74 2 72 9 17 32QAM 0 87 No 24 6 76 4 75 2 22 16QAM 0 88 Yes 20 83 7 79 6 78 3 22 SPSK 0 86 No 14 7 81 4 80 1 22 Table 4 115 26 GHz ETSI with 14 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm ph
19. Select Reboot Wireless Unit The Reboot Confirmation dialog is displayed Select OK The reboot progress message is displayed On completion the unit restarts phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 6 39 Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Table 6 9 Remote Management page SMTP attributes Attribute SMTP Email Alert SMTP Enabled Messages SMTP Server IP Address SMTP Server Port Number SMTP Source Email Address SMTP Destination Email Address Send SMTP Test Email Meaning Disabled means that SMTP emails are not generated Enabled means that SMTP emails can be generated in response to selected events Select the events that will generate SMTP emails Enter the IP address of the server that is to generate emails Enter the port number used by the networked SMTP Server By convention the default value for the port number is 295 Enter the from email address used when constructing the automatically generated email message Enter the to email address for the system administrator to receive messages Select Yes to generate and send an email in order to test the SMTP settings The tick box will self clear after the submit button is pressed Configuring generation of diagnostics alarms 6 40 Perform this task to select which diagnostic alarms will be notified to the system administrator via the network SNMP management agent or SMTP email s
20. 22 16QAM 0 88 Yes 40 6 81 2 77 1 75 8 22 Chapter 4 Reference information 8PSK 0 86 No 29 9 78 9 77 6 22 97 18 GHz ETSI with 27 5 MHz channel separation 256QAM 0 80 Yes 167 68 7 61 8 59 8 15 7 128QAM 0 84 Yes 148 71 4 68 1 66 9 17 64QAM 0 82 Yes 122 7 74 4 71 69 8 17 32QAM 0 85 Yes 99 1 76 9 73 8 72 5 22 16QAM 0 79 Yes 73 3 80 8 77 9 76 7 22 QPSK 0 86 Yes 19 9 87 9 29 5 8 PSK QPSK 0 80 0 80 No Yes 55 7 37 86 6 79 6 78 4 22 25 5 7 7 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Table 4 98 18 GHz ETSI with 55 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 296 QAM 0 91 Yes 364 9 63 7 58 6 56 7 15 256 QAM 0 80 Yes 343 6 65 6 58 6 56 7 15 128 QAM 0 82 Yes 300 4 68 3 65 63 8 17 64 QAM 0 82 Yes 252 6 71 3 67 9 66 6 17 32 QAM 0 84 No 200 7 70 7 69 5 22 16 QAM 0 79 Yes 150 9 77 7 74 8 73 5 22 Table 4 99 18 GHz Brazil with 13 75 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM
21. 400MHz Calibrate the instrument for the selected frequencies using the correct calibration kit Before connecting the ODU obtain a plot of cable loss and check that it is within the expected limits for the given cable length Table 5 2 Compare it to examples of good installations Figure 5 9 and Figure 5 11 Connect the ODU Observe the effect of the ODU connection on the plot of cable loss Compare it to examples of good installations Figure 5 10 and Figure 5 12 If there is little or no change to the plot when the ODU is connected it indicates a short or open circuit on the cable Keep a copy of the cable loss plots so that they can be compared with subsequent plots to determine if there is any degradation with time phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 65 Testing the installation Chapter 5 Installation Cable loss example using a 17 meter cable This example is for a cable run consisting of the following 0 7m cable from the test equipment to the first LPU The first LPU 17m of cable between the two LPUs length y in Figure 5 8 The second mast mounted LPU 0 7m of cable from the LPU to ODU When performing steps 4 to 6 above compare the before and after plots of cable loss Figure 5 9 is a plot of cable loss taken before the ODU was connected The plot shows an average cable loss of 1 96 dB This can be compared with the expected result in Table 5 2 For a cable length of approximately
22. 6 ft 6 GHz N A N A N A 2 7m 4 2m 8 8 ft 13 6 ft 11 GHz N A 1 7m 24m 3 3m 5 0m 5 6 ft 7 9 ft 10 8 ft 16 3 ft 18 GHz 2 6m 4 3m 5 6 m 8 6 m 12 5 m 8 6 ft 14 2 ft 18 4 ft 28 3 ft 41 1 ft 23 GHz 3 0m 5 4 m 7 1m 10 7 m 14 9 m 9 9 ft 17 8 ft 23 3 ft 35 2 ft 48 9 ft 26 GHz 3 4m 5 9m 8 0 m 11 7m N A 11 2 ft 19 4 ft 26 3 ft 38 4 ft 38 GHz 3 6m 6 6m N A N A N A 11 9 ft 21 7 ft 4 99 Radiation hazard assessment Chapter 4 Reference information 4 100 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 Chapter 5 Chapter 5 Installation This chapter describes how to install and test the hardware for a PTP 800 link This chapter is arranged as follows Installation process summary on page 5 2 This section summarizes the installation processes for unprotected and protected links Preparing for installation on page 5 6 This section describes the checks to be performed before proceeding with the installation Installing antenna with a single ODU on page 5 9 This section describes how to connect one antenna to one ODU either in a direct mount or remote mount configuration Installing antenna with two ODUs and a coupler on page 5 24 This section describes how to connect one antenna to two ODUs via a coupler either in a direct mount or remote mount configuration Installing the IF and ground cables on page 5 37 This section describes how to install the IF cables and how to install grounding and lightning protection
23. 71 7 70 3 24 14 64QAM 0 82 Yes 30 78 8 74 2 72 9 24 14 32QAM 0 87 No 24 6 76 4 75 2 28 14 16QAM 0 88 Yes 20 83 7 79 6 78 3 28 14 8 PSK 0 86 No 14 7 81 4 80 1 28 14 Table 4 73 7 GHz ETSI with 14 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 128QAM 0 76 Yes 71 73 4 68 6 67 2 24 14 64QAM 0 82 Yes 61 8 75 7 71 1 69 8 24 14 32QAM 0 87 Yes 50 7 77 1 73 4 72 1 28 14 16QAM 0 88 Yes 41 3 80 6 76 5 75 3 28 14 8 PSK 0 86 No 30 4 78 3 77 28 14 Wireless operation QPSK 0 88 Yes 10 90 4 30 14 QPSK 0 86 Yes 20 3 87 3 30 14 4 63 Wireless operation Chapter 4 Reference information Table 4 74 7 GHz ETSI with 28 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm Capacity transmit power and sensitivity 8 GHz 296QAM 0 80 Yes 170 5 68 1 61 2 59 2 22 14 128QAM 0 84 Yes 151 1 70 9 67 5 66 3 24 14 64QAM 0 82 Yes 125 3 73 9 70 4 69 2 24
24. 85010092003 0 8 m 2 6 ft PDR100 37 2 dBi 2 1 30 kg 66 lb 85010092042 1 0 m 3 ft PDR100 38 4 dBi 2 0 24 kg 53 1b 85010092004 1 2 m 4 ft PDR100 40 4 dBi 1 5 46 kg 101 1b 85010092005 1 8 m 6 ft PDR100 43 8 dBi 1 1 84 kg 185 1b 4 34 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Antenna specifications 13 GHz Antenna specifications Motorola can supply the antennas listed in Table 4 32 and Table 4 33 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the 13 GHz band frequency range 12 75 13 25 GHz Table 4 32 Antenna specifications for 13 GHz single polarization Motorola number 85010089026 85010089046 85009298004 85010089029 85010089030 85010091012 85010091021 85010091018 85010091015 85010091016 Diameter 0 3 m 1 ft 0 6 m 2 ft 1 0 m 3 ft 1 2 m 4 ft 1 8 m 6 ft 0 3 m 1 ft 0 6 m 2 ft 1 0 m 3 ft 1 2 m 4 ft 1 8 m 6 ft Interface MDM MDM MDM MDM MDM PBR120 PBR120 PBR120 PBR120 PBR120 MDM Motorola direct mount Table 4 33 Antenna specifications for 13 GHz dual polarization Motorola number 85010092026 85010092056 85010092043 85010092029 85010092030 Diameter 0 3 m 1 ft 0 6 m 2 ft 1 0 m 3 ft 1 2 m 4 ft 1 8 m 6 ft phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Interface PBR120 PBR120 PBR120 PBR120 PBR120 Mid band gain 30 9 dBi 36 0 dBi 40 0 dBi 42 0 dBi 45 2 dBi 30 9 dBi 36 0 dBi 40 0 dBi 42 0 dBi 45 2 dBi
25. At the edge of the network the last hop if no management network equipment is available the two LAN ports can be connected using a protection cable The cable pin outs are specified in Protection cable on page 4 54 Figure 5 26 Out of band protection splitter connections Management port in CMU 1 Management port in CMU 2 T RJ45 plugs T Cat5e cables to P CMUs must be straight through CMU1 CMU2 Out of band splitter Cat5e cables to o Ethernet switch may be straight through Or crossover A io Ed ea lt Ethernet switch ports phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 85 Preparing the network connections protected Chapter 5 Installation Installing a redundant copper interface Ifa 1 1 protected configuration requires a redundant copper interface connect the CMU Data ports copper to the network as shown in Figure 5 27 Figure 5 27 Redundant copper interface connections CMU 1 Data port copper CMU 2 Data port copper RJ45 plugs Cat5e cables lt Ethernet switch ports 5 86 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Preparing the network connections protected Installing a redundant fiber interface Ifa 1 1 protected configuration requires a redundant fiber interface connect the CMU Fiber SFP GigE ports to the network as shown in Figure 5 28 Figure 5 28 Redundant fiber interface connections SFP module in CMU 1
26. Data Port Copper Auto Select the data rate that the auto negotiation mechanism Neg Advertisement will advertise as available Use the same setting for both ends of the link Only select a data rate that is within the capability of connected network equipment otherwise loss of service may occur 6 16 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces Table 6 4 Bridged Ethernet traffic attributes Attribute Local Packet Filtering Management Committed Information Rate Data Port Pause Frames phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Meaning If Local Packet Filtering is enabled the management agent learns the location of end stations from the source addresses in received management frames The agent filters transmitted management frames to ensure that the frame is transmitted at the Ethernet data or management port or over the wireless link as appropriate If the end station address is unknown then management traffic is transmitted at the Ethernet port and over the wireless link In out of band local management mode management frames are not transmitted over the wireless link and so address learning is not active Only displayed when Management Mode is set to Out of Band Select the minimum data rate range 200 to 2000 Kbit s that the network will guarantee to be available for management traffic Tunnel means that the bridge tunnels Layer
27. Enabled Data Port Ethernet Media Type To Use Auto with Fiber Preference Data Port Copper Auto Negotiation Disabled Enabled 1000 Mbps Full Duplex Data Port Copper Auto Meg Advertisment 100 Mbps Full Duplex Bridging Local Packet Filtering 0 Disabled Enabled Data Port Pause Frames C Tunnel Discard Submit Updated System Configuration 6 12 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces Table 6 1 IP interface attributes Attribute IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Use VLAN For Management Interface VLAN Management VID VLAN Management Priority phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Meaning Internet protocol IP address This address is used by the family of internet protocols to uniquely identify the unit on a network The default IP address of the management agent is 169 254 1 1 Defines the address range of the connected IP network The IP address of a computer on the current network that acts as a gateway A gateway acts as an entrance and exit to packets from and to other networks This controls whether or not the management interfaces WWW SNMP SMTP SNTP use VLAN tags Ensure that the configured VLAN is accessible otherwise it will not be possible to access the unit following the next reboot Only displayed when Use VLAN for Management Interfaces is enabled Figure 6 7 Enter the VLAN VID
28. Management Port Auto Negotiation O Disabled Enabled 100 Mbps Full Duplex Management Port Auto Meg Advertisment 10 Mbps Full Duplex Data Port Data Port Wireless Down Alert Disabled Enabled Data Port Ethernet Media Type To Use Auto vith Fiber Preference Data Port Copper Auto Negotiation Disabled Enabled 1000 Mbps Full Duplex Data Port Copper Auto Weg Advertisment 100 Mbps Full Duplex Bridging Local Packet Filtering C Disabled G Enabled Data Port Pause Frames O Tunnel Discard Submit Updated System Canfiguration phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces 6 11 Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Figure 6 7 LAN Configuration page with VLAN enabled LAN Configuration This page controls the LAN configuration of the PTP wireless unit attributes Mae fois IP Interface IP Address heas 254 h Subnet Mask 255 255 Gateway IP Address Mea 254 llo Use VLAN For Management Interfaces EEE 802 1ad Tagged S Tag or B Tag Type Sap WLAN Management VID f1 VLAN Management Priority lo Management Mace Out of Band Local 2 Gut of Band In Band Management Port Management Port Auto Negotiation O Disabled Enabled 100 Mbps Full Duplex Management Port Auto Meg Advertisment 10 Mbps Full Duplex Data Port Data Port Wireless Down Alert Disabled
29. QPSK 0 80 Yes 52 5 84 6 23 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Wireless operation Table 4 106 23 GHz FCC and Canada with 50 MHz bandwidth Modulation 256QAM 128QAM 64QAM 32QAM 16QAM 8PSK QPSK 0 83 0 82 0 82 0 87 0 91 0 84 0 80 Fixed ref Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Capacity 301 7 258 6 217 4 178 6 150 5 103 7 65 7 Mbit s Sensitivity 65 3 68 5 71 5 73 8 75 8 79 1 83 7 dBm ACM thresh 58 65 1 68 70 5 72 8 75 6 out dBm ACM thresh 55 8 63 8 66 7 69 3 71 5 74 3 in dBm Max tx 15 17 17 22 22 22 23 power dBm Min tx power 2 2 2 2 Z 2 2 dBm Table 4 107 23 GHz ETSI with 7 MHz channel separation Modulation 128Q0AM 64QAM 32QAM 16QAM 8PSK QPSK 0 76 0 82 0 87 0 88 0 86 0 88 Fixed ref Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Capacity 34 4 30 24 6 20 14 7 10 Mbit s Sensitivity 76 4 78 8 83 7 90 4 dBm ACM thresh 71 7 74 2 76 4 79 6 81 4 out dBm ACM thresh 70 3 72 9 75 2 78 3 80 1 in dBm Max tx 17 17 22 22 22 25 power dBm Min tx power 7 7 7 7 7 7 dBm phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 4 81 Wireless operation Chapter 4 Reference information Table 4 108 23 GHz ETSI with 14 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 128QAM 0 76 Yes 71 73 4 68 6 67 2
30. SNMP version 2c SNMP Trap IP Address fo fo fo fo SMMF Trap Port Number jez SNMP Community String public SAMP Port Number 161 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP SMTP Email Alert Disabled Enabled Iw Wireless Link Up Down Iw Data Port Up Down SMTP Enabled Messages Iw Management Port Up Down Enabled Diagnostic Alarms SMTP Server IP Address lo WW SO fon p SMTP Server Port Number a SMTP Source Email Address SMTP Destination Email Address 0000 Send SMTP Test Email Yes Clock SNTP State ie Digabled t Enabled set Time zo foo 13 Time Zone cur 00 00 Daylight Saving fe Disabled oe Enabled Submit Updated Configuration Reset Form phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 6 37 Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Table 6 8 Remote Management page SNMP attributes Attribute SNMP State SNMP Enabled Traps SNMP Trap Version SNMP Trap IP Address SNMP Trap Port Number SNMP Community string SNMP Port Number Meaning Disabled means that SNMP traps are not generated Enabled means that SNMP traps will be generated in response to selected events and sent to the network management system Select the events that will generate SNMP traps Select the SNMP protocol version to be used for SNMP traps Enter the IP address that will receive all SNMP traps This will normally be the network management system but it may be a separate trap receiv
31. User Guide System Release 800 03 10 phn 1478_012v000 2009 2011 Motorola Solutions Inc All Rights Reserved Accuracy While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document Motorola Solutions Inc assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document or from use of the information obtained herein Motorola Solutions Inc reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein to improve reliability function or design and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes Motorola Solutions Inc does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product software or circuit described herein neither does it convey license under its patent rights or the rights of others It is possible that this publication may contain references to or information about Motorola products machines and programs programming or services that are not announced in your country Such references or information must not be construed to mean that Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products programming or services in your country Copyrights This document Motorola products and 3 Party Software products described in this document may include or describe copyrighted Motorola and other 3 Party supplied computer programs stored in semico
32. Yes 151 1 68 9 65 5 64 3 16 64QAM 0 82 Yes 125 3 71 9 68 4 67 2 16 32QAM 0 85 Yes 101 2 74 4 71 2 69 9 20 16QAM 0 79 Yes 74 8 78 3 75 3 74 1 20 Table 4 123 38 GHz ETSI with 56 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 256 256 128 QAM QAM QAM 0 91 0 80 0 82 Yes Yes Yes 368 6 347 1 303 5 61 2 63 1 65 8 56 1 56 1 62 5 54 1 54 1 61 2 14 14 16 6 6 64 QAM 0 82 Yes 299 2 68 8 65 3 64 1 16 32 QAM 0 84 No 202 7 68 2 66 9 20 16 QAM 0 79 Yes 152 4 75 2 72 2 71 20 Wireless operation 8 PSK 0 80 56 8 77 75 8 20 BPSK 0 80 115 8 73 9 72 7 20 QPSK 0 80 Yes 37 8 84 1 23 QPSK 0 80 Yes 77 1 81 ZS 4 89 Data network Chapter 4 Reference information Data network Ethernet interfaces The PTP 800 Ethernet ports conform to the specifications listed in Table 4 124 Table 4 125 and Table 4 126 Table 4 124 Copper data port specifications Feature Specification Ethernet Speed 1000 Base T Auto negotiation advertisement options 1000 Mbit s Full Duplex 100 Mbit s Full Duplex Forced configuration options 100 Mbit s Full Duplex Auto MDI MDIX Enabled w
33. from Task 11 Aligning antennas on page 6 59 to Task 13 Connecting link to the network on page 6 70 Re enable Fault Protection Switching as described in Configuring protected links on page 6 43 Check that there are no alarms on any unit as described in Managing alarms on page 7 13 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 3 Installation process summary Chapter 5 Installation Upgrading an unprotected link to protected 5 4 This section describes how to upgrade an existing unprotected link to use the 1 1 Hot Standby link protection feature Although the disruption to an existing link can be minimized this process cannot be carried out without interrupting the operation of the link The following actions will interrupt link operation Upgrading the software This can be carried out in advance of hardware installation Alternatively during the installation after the inactive units have been installed and when the inactive units are providing an operational link the existing units may be upgraded and configured Installing a second ODU on the coupler if a single antenna is used at each end Aligning antennas when antenna protection is implemented As the new antennas operate on the same frequencies as the existing ones alignment cannot be performed while the existing antennas run an operational link Other operations if working close to an antenna Testing that the protection is working correctly by forcing prot
34. 128QAM 0 83 Yes 50 7 74 6 19 6 8 PSK 0 80 56 8 79 77 8 28 14 QPSK 0 80 Yes 37 8 86 1 30 14 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Table 4 80 11 GHz FCC and Canada with 30 MHz bandwidth Modulation 256QAM 128QAM 64QAM 0 80 0 82 0 82 Fixed ref Yes Yes Yes Capacity Mbit s 177 4 155 1 130 4 Sensitivity dBm 68 5 71 2 74 2 ACM threshold out dBm 61 5 67 9 70 8 ACM threshold in dBm 59 6 66 6 69 5 Max tx power dBm 19 19 19 Min tx power dBm 6 6 6 Table 4 81 11 GHz FCC and Canada with 40 MHz bandwidth Modulation 256QAM 128QAM 64QAM 0 80 0 82 0 88 Fixed ref Yes Yes Yes Capacity Mbit s 236 6 206 8 181 9 Sensitivity dBm 67 2 69 9 72 3 ACM threshold out dBm 60 3 66 6 68 9 ACM threshold in dBm 08 3 65 4 67 6 Max tx power dBm 19 19 19 Min tx power dBm 6 6 6 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Wireless operation 32QAM 0 84 Yes 103 6 76 8 73 6 72 4 19 32QAM 0 92 Yes 150 7 74 4 71 2 70 19 4 67 Wireless operation Chapter 4 Reference information Table 4 82 11 GHz ETSI with 40 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 296QAM 0 80 No 236 6 60 3 58 3 19 128QAM 0 82 Yes 206 8 69 9 66 6 65 4 21 11 64QAM 0 8
35. 14 32QAM 0 85 Yes 101 2 76 4 73 2 71 9 28 14 16QAM 0 79 Yes 74 8 80 3 77 3 76 1 28 14 Table 4 75 8 GHz ETSI with 7 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 128QAM 0 76 Yes 34 4 76 4 71 7 70 3 24 64QAM 0 82 Yes 30 78 8 74 2 72 9 24 14 32QAM 0 87 No 24 6 76 4 75 2 28 14 16QAM 0 88 Yes 20 83 7 79 6 78 3 28 14 8 PSK 0 86 No 14 7 81 4 80 1 28 14 8 PSK QPSK 0 80 0 80 No Yes 56 8 37 8 86 1 79 7 77 8 28 30 14 14 QPSK 0 88 Yes 10 90 4 30 14 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Table 4 76 8 GHz ETSI with 14 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm Table 4 Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 128QAM 0 76 Yes 71 73 4 68 6 67 2 24 14 64QAM 0 82 Yes 61 8 75 7 71 1 69 8 24 14 32QAM 0 87 Yes 50 7 77 1 73 4 72 1 28 14 16QAM 0 88 Yes 41 3
36. 6 kg 13 lb 11 kg 25 1b 24 kg 53 1b 46 kg 101 1b 84 kg 185 lb Weight 6 kg 13 lb 11 kg 25 lb 24 kg 53 Ib 46 kg 101 1b 84 kg 185 1b 4 37 Antenna specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Antenna specifications 23 GHz Motorola can supply the antennas listed in Table 4 38 and Table 4 39 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the 23 GHz band frequency range 21 20 23 60 GHz Table 4 38 Antenna specifications for 23 GHz single polarization Motorola Diameter Interface Mid Vertical Weight number band beam gain width 85010089011 0 3 m 1 ft MDM 35 3 dBi 3 0 6 kg 13 1b 85010089043 0 6 m 2 ft MDM 40 5 dBi 1 7 11 kg 25 lb 85009298007 1 0 m 3 ft MDM 44 8 dBi 1 0 24 kg 53 1b 85010089014 1 2 m 4 ft MDM 46 7 dBi 0 8 46 kg 101 1b 85010089015 1 8 m 6 ft MDM 49 7 dBi 0 5 84 kg 185 1b MDM Motorola direct mount Table 4 39 Antenna specifications for 23 GHz dual polarization Motorola Diameter I nterface Mid band Vertical Weight number gain beam width 85010092011 0 3 m 1 ft PBR220 35 3 dBi 3 0 6 kg 13 1b 85010092054 0 6 m 2 ft PBR220 40 5 dBi 1 7 11 kg 25 1b 85010092046 1 0 m 3 ft PBR220 44 8 dBi 1 0 24 kg 53 1b 85010092014 1 2 m 4 ft PBR220 46 7 dBi 0 8 46 kg 101 1b 85010092015 1 8 m 6 ft PBR220 49 4 dBi 0 5 84 kg 185 1b 4 38 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Antenna specifications 26 GHz A
37. 80 6 76 5 75 3 28 14 8 PSK 0 86 No 30 4 28 14 77 8 GHz ETSI with 28 MHz channel separation 256QAM 0 80 Yes 170 5 68 1 61 2 59 2 22 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 128QAM 0 84 Yes 151 1 70 9 67 5 66 3 24 14 64QAM 0 82 Yes 125 3 73 9 70 4 69 2 24 14 32QAM 0 85 Yes 101 2 76 4 73 2 71 9 28 14 16QAM 0 79 Yes 74 8 80 3 77 3 76 1 28 14 Wireless operation QPSK 0 86 Yes 20 3 87 3 30 14 8 PSK QPSK 0 80 0 80 No Yes 56 8 37 8 86 1 79 77 8 28 30 14 14 4 65 Wireless operation Chapter 4 Reference information Table 4 78 8 GHz ETSI with 29 65 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 296QAM 0 80 Yes 170 5 68 1 61 2 59 2 22 14 128QAM 0 84 Yes 151 1 70 9 67 5 66 3 24 14 64QAM 0 82 Yes 125 3 73 9 70 4 69 2 24 14 32QAM 0 85 Yes 101 2 76 4 73 2 71 9 28 14 16QAM 0 79 Yes 74 8 80 3 77 3 76 1 28 14 Capacity transmit power and sensitivity 11 GHz Table 4 79 11 GHz FCC and Canada with 10 MHz bandwidth Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm
38. A NOTE At the edge of a network it is possible that no management network equipment is reachable In this case the CMU management port may be left disconnected Figure 5 25 Management interface connections CMU Management port _ _ RJ45 plug A Cat5e cable Ethernet switch port 5 82 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Preparing the network connections unprotected Connecting fiber cables to the CMU To connect fiber cables to the CMU proceed as follows 1 Insert an SFP module into the GigE port of the CMU with the PCB connector down and label up 3 Plug the LC connectors into the SFP module ensuring they snap home phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 83 Preparing the network connections protected Chapter 5 Installation Preparing the network connections protected For 1 1 protected ends perform this task to prepare the cables to connect the CMU to the Ethernet switch in the customer and optionally management networks The CMU is not normally connected to the network equipment until antenna alignment is complete See Task 13 Connecting link to the network on page 6 70 Select and install the required interfaces depending on the choice of management mode and network connection Table 5 3 Table 5 3 Selecting network interfaces for protected links Management Network Procedures mode connection Out of band Customer Fither Installing
39. Are You Sure The tables below compare the image stored in the primary software bank with the image that has just been downloaded Press the Program Software Image into Non Wolatile Memory button to accept the software upgrade Current software image description Software Version 2800 01 00 Uploaded software image description Software Version 800 01 00 Figure 6 15 Software Upgrade Complete page software Upgrade Complete The software upgrade was completed Successfully To complete the upgrade a system reboot is required Pleaze use the Reboot Wireless Unit button below to reboot the unit Current software image description Software Version 200 01 00 A Back 6 30 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 6 Configuring security Task 6 Configuring security This task is only performed when the PTP 800 link requires AES encryption This task consists of the following procedures Configuring encryption in an operational protected link on page 6 31 Configuring AES encryption on page 6 32 Configuring encryption in an operational protected link If pre configuring CMUs during staging follow the procedure Configuring AES encryption on page 6 32 taking care to use the same key for each unit configured If configuring the units after installation of the CMUs Configure licence keys on all CMUs if required to permit use of encryption See Task 4 Installing li
40. Figure 6 6 or Figure 6 7 2 Review and update the IP interface attributes Table 6 1 3 If Management Mode has been set to Out of Band Local or Out of Band review and update the management port attributes Table 6 2 4 Review and update the data port attributes Table 6 3 Review and update the bridging attributes Table 6 4 6 Select Submit Updated System Configuration The Confirm LAN configuration page is displayed Figure 6 8 7 Select Confirm Changes A NOTE If the IP address is updated then selecting Submit Updated System Configuration will change the IP address and communication between the management PC and the CMU will be terminated To continue configuration re connect to the new IP address as described in Reconnecting to the management PC on page 6 18 In case of error see Resetting IP and Ethernet configuration to factory defaults on page 7 54 A NOTE The SFP Configuration page is only displayed when an SFP module is installed 6 10 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Figure 6 6 LAN Configuration page with VLAN disabled LAN Configuration This page controls the LAN configuration of the PTP wireless unit Attributes A IF Interface IP Address aea sat Subnet Mask 255 0255 o Gateway IP Address hea 25a Use VLAN For Management Interfaces Mo WLAN Tagging Management Mode Out of Band Local Out of Band In Band Management Port
41. PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Managing security Managing security Disabling AES encryption Perform this task to disable the encryption of data transmitted over the PTP 800 bridge For more information on AES encryption see Security on page 1 49 This procedure must be repeated at both ends of the link ANOTE If AES encryption is disabled at one end of the link it must also be disabled at the other end of the link otherwise the link will not work Unprotected link To disable AES encryption for an unprotected link proceed as follows 1 Select menu option Configuration The System Configuration page is displayed Figure 7 8 2 Set the Encryption Algorithm attribute to None 3 Select Submit Updated System Configuration The Configuration Change Reboot dialog is displayed 4 Select Reboot Wireless Unit The Reboot Confirmation dialog is displayed Select OK The reboot progress message is displayed On completion the unit restarts with AES encryption disabled Protected link To disable AES encryption for a 1 1 protected link proceed as follows 1 If link planning indicates that the inactive units are not able to operate a link of satisfactory quality force a protection switch at one end of the wireless link 2 Disable fault protection switching for all PTP 800 units as described in Enabling and disabling fault protection on page 7 33 3 Disable AES Encryption for both inactive PTP 80
42. Secondary At each end only one neighbor is active at any one time The other neighbor is inactive The inactive neighbor monitors traffic from the other end of the radio link A fault on the active neighbor will cause a protection switch if the inactive neighbor is fault free A protection switch may occur on one end independently of the other end On boot up assuming no fault occurs the Primary becomes active If the Primary develops a fault the Secondary becomes active If the Secondary boots up first it waits an extra two minutes in the inactive state to confirm that the Primary boots up If the Primary is not detected in this period the Secondary becomes Active Protected link antenna interfaces Links without antenna protection Links without antenna protection Figure 1 15 require antenna couplers that may be either symmetric or asymmetric The asymmetric coupler provides the highest link margin lower path loss for the primary path as this is usually the active path except in a fault condition or during certain maintenance operations For more information see ODU coupler mounting specifications on page 4 50 If the coupler is asymmetric the Primary ODU must be mounted on the coupler arm labeled Main and the Secondary ODU must be mounted on the coupler arm labeled Standby This provides a better quality wireless signal when operating Primary to Primary If the coupler is symmetric the same convention can be
43. System Statistics and Counters page esseesesseesessesresseseeseeseeseeseesesseeseseeseeseeo 7 41 Diagnostics Plotter page e sessesseessesseeseesseessessesssceseesecsseessessessocsseeseessesseessee 7 46 Generate Downloadable Diagnostics page ccccececececececececececnenenenenenenenens 7 47 Reboot Wireless Unit page cccccecececececececececececseecsenesesesesesesesesesesesenesenenens 7 49 Recovery Mode Warning page essssseseesreseesesseesessessesseseeesesseseesoeseesseseeseeseese 7 51 Pecore OPLOS DADE sorarsa aenar SAN E EREE 7 92 Recovery Software Upgrade confirmation page ssssessessesresseseeseeseesesseeseese 7 93 Recovery Software Upgrade Complete page ccccceccecececececececececececececeeees 7 53 Pesel Coniguraton Malog ojos ccssutanctiendneduedsmis bodes be r 7 54 Erase C oniguration dialo ener tee ee ot cee erri nErinn AIE OANE EET N 7 55 Zer ize security Parameters dialog adecieste ce eeetlexcecctiovicanceeaisedeeseeaebencetseen ean 7 56 XIV phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 Contents Figures and Tables List of Tables Tabie IT 1 aS a orrera NERE 1 5 Table dl CMU ndicator LED eesin ser ran RE 1 9 Table 1 3 Single step capacity upgrades s ssessesseseesseseesesseesesserseesesseesesseesessessesoeseesseseeo 1 50 Table 1 4 Step by step capacity upgradesS sesssereseseresersessrescrseesessorsersersesseseersereesserreseseres
44. The user interface provides a convenient shortcut to select the assignment recommended in IEEE 802 1Q 2005 ANOTE Ethernet priority information is coded in the Ethernet VLAN tag and differentiated quality of service is therefore not available in a network based on untagged Ethernet frames When the wireless link is configured for out of band management select an appropriate setting for the Management CIR attribute A high CIR will provide greater capacity for management traffic at the cost of allowing bursty management traffic to have a greater impact on capacity remaining for customer traffic A low CIR may result in extended response times for network management traffic Fast Ethernet port shutdown If the PTP 800 link is part of a redundant network where STP or EAPS is used in external Ethernet bridges in order to resolve loops enable the Data Port Wireless Down Alert and Management Data Port Wireless Down Alert to ensure that protection protocols are invoked promptly following loss of the wireless link phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Chapter 3 Chapter 3 Legal information This chapter provides legal notices including software license agreements Changes or modifications must not be made to the equipment without the express consent of the party responsible for compliance Any such modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment and will void the manufacturer s warranty The following topics are descri
45. configured by the user User ACM Lowest The transmit modulation is the lowest configured by the user Limited by wireless channel conditions The transmit modulation is limited by the wireless conditions Table 7 9 Protection State attribute values Value Meaning Active This unit is active that is it is providing the wireless transmission path on a protected link Inactive This unit is inactive that is it is not providing the wireless transmission path on a protected link 7 12 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Managing alarms and events Managing alarms and events This section describes how to manage PTP 800 system alarms and events This section contains the following procedures e Managing alarms on page 7 13 Managing email alerts on page 7 18 e Managing SNMP traps on page 7 19 Managing alarms Home Status Whenever system alarms are outstanding a yellow warning triangle is displayed on the navigation bar The warning triangle is visible from all web pages Click the warning triangle or menu option Home to return to the System Summary page and view the alarms If the warning triangle disappears when it is clicked it indicates that the outstanding alarms have been cleared The alarm configuration procedure is described in Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages on page 6 36 The example in Figure 7 7 shows the warning triangle in the navigation bar and the
46. on page 5 84 3 Check that each ofthe CMUs is reachable from the network management system by opening the web interface to the management agents or by requesting ICMP echo response packets using the Ping application The network management system will normally be geographically remote from the site so it may be necessary to request that this action is completed by co workers at the management centre Alternatively it may be possible to use remote login to the management system A NOTE For testing the remote end of a link with in band management the wireless link may need to be operational first 4 Check that the data network operates correctly across the wireless link This may be by requesting ICMP echo response packets between hosts in the connected network segments or by some more structured use of network testing tools 5 For a protected link initiate a protection switch at one end of the link as described in Forcing protection switches on page 7 31 and check that the data network operates correctly across the wireless link as described in the previous step Initiate a switch back to the primary unit Repeat for the other end of the link 6 70 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 13 Connecting link to the network Setting the real time clock The clock supplies accurate date and time information to the CMU It can be set to run with or without a connection to a network t
47. workstation PC router switch etc is powered up and operating correctly The Ethernet port in the associated equipment is enabled The Ethernet cable between the CMU and the network equipment is connected and is not damaged If possible substitute a known good Ethernet cable The Ethernet ports have compatible auto negotiation and duplex settings as described in Configuring the IP interface and management mode on page 6 9 If the CMU Data port is connected directly to a PC check the following The Ethernet port in the PC is enabled The Ethernet cable between the CMU and the PC is connected and is not damaged If possible substitute a known good Ethernet cable e The Ethernet ports have compatible auto negotiation and duplex settings as described in Configuring the IP interface and management mode on page 6 9 If these steps fail to resolve the problem continue at Using recovery mode on page 7 50 selecting the option to reset IP and Ethernet configuration phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 8 5 Connecting to the web management interface Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Check the fiber Data port Ethernet connection Check the state of the fiber Data port indicator and take action as described in Table 8 6 Table 8 6 Fiber Data port indicator checks Fiber Data port Likely cause and action indicator state Green steady The Ethernet link is up but is not carrying traffic Continue at Check IP network connection on p
48. 0 42 0 35 0 29 0 23 0 16 0 10 ODU specifications Bandwidth Bandwidth Bandwidth 10 20 or 40 MHz 1 21 1 14 1 08 1 02 0 95 0 89 0 83 0 76 0 70 0 64 0 57 0 51 0 45 0 38 0 32 0 26 0 19 30 MHz 1 29 1 22 1 16 1 10 1 03 0 97 0 91 0 84 0 78 0 72 0 65 0 59 0 53 0 46 0 40 0 34 0 27 50 MHz 1 15 1 08 1 02 0 96 0 89 0 83 0 77 0 70 0 64 0 58 0 51 0 45 0 39 0 32 0 26 0 19 0 13 ODU specifications Chapter 4 Reference information ODU specifications Lower 6 GHz Motorola can supply the ODUs listed in Table 4 14 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the Lower 6 GHz band frequency range 5 925 6 425 GHz Table 4 14 ODU specifications main frequency Lower 6 GHz Motorola Standard Sub Sub band Transmit Part band frequency and Number receive Spacing 01010411007 FCC B1 Lo 5925 6025 MHz 252 MHz 01010411008 oe B1 Hi 6175 6275 MHz 01010411009 B2 Lo 6000 6100 MHz 01010411010 B2 Hi 6250 6350 MHz 01010411011 B3 Lo 6075 6175 MHz 01010411012 B3 Hi 6325 6425 MHz ODU specifications Upper 6 GHz Motorola can supply the ODUs listed in Table 4 15 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the Upper 6 GHz band frequency range 6 425 7 125 GHz Table 4 15 ODU specifications main frequency Upper 6 GHz Motorola Standard Sub Sub band Transmit Part band frequency and Number receive Spacing 01010411013 ETSI B1 Lo 6430 6540 MHz 340 MHz 01010411014 B1 Hi 6770 6880
49. 169 254 1 1 A good example is 169 254 1 3 as shown in Figure 6 2 Enter a subnet mask of 255 255 0 0 Leave the default gateway blank Click on OK If the network adaptor supports advanced properties then ensure that Ethernet Speed and Duplex are both configured for automatic negotiation One example based on a Broadcom adaptor is shown in Figure 6 3 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 1 Connecting to the unit Figure 6 1 Local Area Connection Properties dialog l Local Area Connection 2 Properties 7 x General Authentication Advanced Connect using BY Broadcom Netstrame 578s Gigabit C This connection uses the following tems File and Printer Sharing tor Microsoft Hetwork s Network Monitor Driver i nternet Protacal TCF F 4 n 4 n r 7 TEPER EP OR CORO RRO ERR ERROR ERROR Tiree F H Inatall UU rirretall Properties Description Transmssion Control Protocol nternet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication actos diverse interconnected networks Show icon in notification area when connected IM Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 6 3 Task 1 Connecting to the unit Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Figure 6 2 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties i oa
50. 17 7 64QAM 0 82 Yes 61 8 75 7 71 1 69 8 17 32QAM 0 87 No 50 7 73 4 72 1 22 16QAM 0 88 Yes 41 3 80 6 76 5 75 3 22 8PSK 0 86 No 30 4 78 3 77 22 Table 4 109 23 GHz ETSI with 28 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 256QAM 0 80 Yes 170 5 68 1 61 2 59 2 15 7 128QAM 0 84 Yes 151 1 70 9 67 5 66 3 17 64QAM 0 82 Yes 125 3 73 9 70 4 69 2 17 32QAM 0 85 Yes 101 2 76 4 73 2 71 9 22 16QAM 0 79 Yes 74 8 80 3 77 3 76 1 22 QPSK 0 86 Yes 20 3 87 3 25 7 SPSK QPSK 0 80 0 80 No Yes 56 8 37 8 86 1 79 77 8 22 25 7 7 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Table 4 110 23 GHz ETSI with 56 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 296 QAM 0 91 Yes 368 6 63 2 58 1 56 1 15 256 QAM 0 80 347 1 65 1 58 1 56 1 128 QAM 0 82 Yes 303 5 67 8 64 5 63 2 17 64 QAM 0 82 Yes 299 2 70 8 67 3 66 1 17 32 QAM 0 84 No 202 7
51. 254 1 1 Entering recovery mode When the CMU status indicator Table 1 2 blinks red the CMU has entered recovery mode automatically The CMU may enter recovery mode automatically in the following circumstances When a checksum error occurs for the main application software image When the Short Power Cycle for Recovery attribute is enabled Table 6 11 the CMU is power cycled and the off period is between one and five seconds To enter recovery mode manually proceed as follows 1 2 3 Power off the CMU Press the CMU front panel Recovery button Figure 1 2 Keep the Recovery button pressed while powering on the CMU Keep the Recovery button pressed for at least 20 seconds after powering on When the CMU status indicator Table 1 2 blinks red the CMU is in recovery mode phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Using recovery mode Selecting recovery option Perform this task to select the option for recovering the CMU when it is in recovery mode Before starting this task check that the CMU is in recovery mode When the CMU status indicator Table 1 2 blinks red the CMU is in recovery mode To select the CMU recovery option proceed as follows 1 Start the web browser 2 Type IP address 169 254 1 1 into the address bar and press ENTER The Recovery Mode Warning page is displayed Figure 7 17 3 Click anywhere on the Recovery Mode Warning page The Recovery Options p
52. 3 46 3 90 3 63 3 49 38 3 40 3 49 3 57 3 43 39 3 33 3 43 391 3 37 40 3 27 3 36 3 44 3 30 41 3 21 3 30 3 38 3 24 42 3 14 3 24 3 32 3 18 43 3 08 3 17 3 20 3 11 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 4 17 ODU specifications Chapter 4 Reference information RSL Channel separation Bandwidth Bandwidth Bandwidth dBm 7 13 75 14 27 5 28 10 20 or 30 MHz 50 MHz 29 65 55 or 56 MHz 40 MHz 44 3 02 3 11 3 19 3 05 45 2 95 3 05 3 13 2 98 46 2 89 2 98 3 06 2 92 47 2 83 2 92 3 00 2 86 48 2 76 2 86 2 94 2 79 49 2 70 2 79 2 87 2 73 50 2 64 2 73 2 81 2 67 51 2 57 2 67 2 79 2 60 52 251 2 60 2 68 2 04 53 2 45 2 54 2 62 2 48 54 2 38 2 48 2500 2 41 59 2 32 2 41 2 49 2 395 56 2 26 2 35 2 43 2 29 57 2 19 Zuo 2 36 222 58 2 13 2 22 2 30 2 16 59 2 07 2 16 2 24 2 10 60 2 00 2 10 2 17 2 03 61 1 94 2 03 2 11 1 97 62 1 88 1 97 2 05 1 91 63 1 81 1 90 1 98 1 84 64 1 75 1 84 1 92 1 78 65 1 69 1 78 1 86 1 72 66 1 62 1 71 1 79 1 65 67 1 56 1 65 1 73 1 59 68 1 50 1 59 1 67 1 53 69 1 43 1 52 1 60 1 46 70 1 37 1 46 1 54 1 40 71 1 31 1 40 1 48 1 34 72 1 24 1 33 1 41 1 27 73 1 18 1 27 1 35 1 21 4 18 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide RSL Channel separation dBm 7 13 75 14 27 5 28 29 65 55 or 56 MHz 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 1 11 1 05 0 99 0 92 0 86 0 80 0 73 0 67 0 61 0 54 0 48
53. 32 0 dBi 36 8 dBi 41 1 dBi 42 9 dBi 46 2 dBi Vertical beamwidth 4 3 2 Lo 1 2 0 8 Weight 7 kg 15 1b 11 kg 25 1b 24 kg 53 1b 55 kg 121 1b 62 kg 137 1b Weight 7 kg 15 lb 11 kg 25 lb 24 kg 53 Ib 55 kg 121 Ib 62 kg 137 1b phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Antenna specifications 18 GHz Antenna specifications Motorola can supply the antennas listed in Table 4 36 and Table 4 37 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the 18 GHz band frequency range 17 70 19 70 GHz Table 4 36 Antenna specifications for 18 GHz single polarization Motorola number 85010089006 85010089042 85009298006 85010089009 85010089010 Diameter 0 3 m 1 ft 0 6 m 2 ft 1 0 m 3 ft 1 2 m 4 ft 1 8 m 6 ft Interface MDM MDM MDM MDM MDM MDM Motorola direct mount Table 4 37 Antenna specifications for 18 GHz dual polarization Motorola number 85010092006 85010092053 85010092045 85010092009 85010092010 Diameter 0 3 m 1 ft 0 6 m 2 ft 1 0 m 3 ft 1 2 m 4 ft 1 8 m 6 ft phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Interface Mid band Mid band gain 34 2 dBi 38 9 dBi 43 5 dBi 44 7 dBi 47 8 dBi Vertical beamwid th oo he ve 1 1 0 9 0 7 Vertical beamwidth PBR220 PBR220 PBR220 PBR220 PBR220 gain 34 2 dBi 38 9 dBi 43 5 dBi 44 7 dBi 47 6 dBi o Zi 1 1 0 9 0 7 Weight
54. 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 Figure 5 16 Figure 5 17 Figure 5 18 Figure 5 19 Figure 5 20 Figure 5 21 Figure 5 22 Figure 5 23 LINKPlanner configuration and performance details ccccececececeeseseeeeeeenees 2 4 LIN Plonner Bill of Materials aa eaten ett epeepenwratceacga vimcheancueunaesemesieenadiacieoreees 2 5 Rolling sphere method to determine the lightning protection Zones 45 2 8 Grounding and lightning protection on mast OF tOWerT sssssesssseesessessesseseeseese 2 11 Grounding and lightning protection on mast or tower protected end 2 12 Grounding and lightning protection on building cece ccc eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenens 2 13 Grounding and lightning protection inside high building cece ee cece eee 2 14 Grounding and lightning protection inside high building protected end 2 15 Alternative Supply arrangements cccececeececececececececececececececececececececececeeees 2 16 Locations ol waveguide Mange S eee ere te ee ee nae nee er Oana ana eer ae 4 41 Waveguide flanges 6 GHZ cccccccccececececececececececececececececececesecececececececeeeeeeeeees 4 43 Waveguide Hames 7 to 15 Casa ener sa se cig es rieennceduciuerescdeutensrsinerie ewan 4 44 Waveguide flanges 18 to 39 GHZ eiriiineirineror arrain i Nir eases 4 45 Waveguide flanges 11 GHz tapered transition sssesss
55. 53 1b 55 kg 121 1b 62 kg 137 lb 78 kg 172 1b 114 kg 251 1b 144 kg 317 1b 245 kg 540 1b Weight 24 kg 53 1b 55 kg 121 1b 62 kg 137 1b phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Antenna specifications Antenna specifications 7 GHz and 8 GHz Motorola can supply the antennas listed in Table 4 28 and Table 4 29 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the 7 GHz band frequency range 7 125 7 900 GHz or the 8 GHz band frequency range 7 725 8 5 GHz Table 4 28 Antenna specifications for 7 GHz and 8 GHz single polarization Motorola number 85010089045 85009298002 85010089024 85010089025 85010091020 85010091023 85010091010 85010091011 Diameter 0 6 m 2 ft 1 0 m 3 ft 1 2 m 4 ft 1 8 m 6 ft 0 6 m 2 ft 1 0 m 3 ft 1 2 m 4 ft 1 8 m 6 ft Interface MDM MDM MDM MDM PDR84 PDR84 PDR84 PDR84 MDM Motorola direct mount Mid band gain 31 1 dBi 35 5 dBi 37 3 dBi 40 8 dBi 31 1 dBi 35 5 dBi 37 3 dBi 40 8 dBi Vertical Weight beamwidth 4 7 11 kg 25 lb 2 6 24 kg 53 ib 2 9 55 kg 121 1b 1 5 62 kg 137 1b 4 7 11 kg 25 1b 2 6 24 kg 53 1b 2 9 55 kg 121 1b 1 5 62 kg 137 1b Table 4 29 Antenna specifications for 7 GHz and 8 GHz dual polarization Motorola number Diameter 85010092051 85010092059 85010092024 85010092025 0 6 m 2 ft 1 0 m 3 ft 1 2 m 4 ft 1 8 m 6 ft phn 1478_012v000
56. 5mm and 3mm Allen keys supplied Lubricant supplied 17mm spanner 7 mm spanner for tapered transition Voltmeter and BNC lead Compass and GPS meter 5 7 Preparing for installation Chapter 5 Installation Equipment to be Installed Tools Required Cable Cable cutters Cable hoist Flat file to dress the cable inner core Wire brush to comb the braid Crimp tool Motorola part 66010063001 Torque wrench 5 8 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing antenna with a single ODU Installing antenna with a single ODU Perform this task when one antenna is to be connected to one ODU either ina direct mount or remote mount configuration If a direct mount configuration is required perform Direct mounting of antenna with a single ODU on page 5 10 If a remote mount configuration is required perform Remote mounting of antenna with a single ODU on page 5 12 A WARNING Follow applicable health and safety rules for use of silicone grease If necessary use the latex gloves supplied with the products Protected link considerations Perform this task when a protected link requires ODU and antenna redundancy At each end connect each of the two antennas to a separate ODU either in a direct mount or remote mount configuration The ODUs are labeled Hi or Lo depending on the frequency sub band When installing a protected link ensure that the two Hi ODUs are installed
57. 70 3 72 9 75 2 78 3 80 1 Max tx power dBm 24 24 26 28 28 30 Min tx power dBm 14 14 14 14 14 14 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Wireless operation Table 4 68 Upper 6 GHz ETSI with 14 MHz channel separation Modulation 128Q0AM 64QAM 32QAM 16QAM 8PSK QPSK 0 76 0 82 0 87 0 88 0 86 0 86 Fixed ref Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Capacity Mbit s 71 61 8 50 7 41 3 30 4 20 3 Sensitivity dBm 73 4 75 7 77 7 80 6 87 3 ACM thresh out dBm 68 6 71 1 73 4 76 5 78 3 ACM thresh in dBm 67 2 69 8 72 1 75 3 77 Max tx power dBm 24 24 26 28 28 30 Min tx power dBm 14 14 14 14 14 14 Table 4 69 Upper 6 GHz ETSI with 30 MHz channel separation Modulation 256QAM 128QAM 64QAM 32QAM 16QAM 8PSK QPSK 0 80 0 84 0 82 0 85 0 79 0 80 0 80 Fixed ref Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Capacity Mbit s 170 5 151 1 125 3 101 2 74 8 56 8 37 8 Sensitivity dBm 68 1 70 9 73 9 76 4 80 3 86 1 ACM thresh out dBm 61 2 67 5 70 4 73 2 77 3 79 ACM thresh in dBm 59 2 66 3 69 2 71 9 76 1 77 8 Max tx power dBm 22 24 24 26 28 28 30 Min tx power dBm 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 4 61 Wireless operation Table 4 70 Upper 6 GHz ETSI with 40 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm Modulation Fixed re
58. 8 Crimp the connector body in the area shown Crimp area 3 Use the larger of the openings in the crimp tool 4 Check the finished part phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 43 Installing the IF and ground cables Chapter 5 Installation Connecting the ODU to the top LPU Perform this procedure to connect the ODU to the top lightning protection unit LPU via ground and IF cables and to ground the LPU to the supporting structure Figure 5 3 Figure 5 3 ODU and top LPU grounding ODU and antenna O oN Lightning Protection Unit LPU e cable Ground cable To connect and ground the ODU and top LPU proceed as follows 1 Attach one end of the ODU ground cable to the ODU 5 44 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing the IF and ground cables 2 Attach the other end of the ODU ground cable to the top LPU under the LPU mounting nut Attach one end of the LPU ground cable to the LPU under the LPU mounting nut ODU ground cable 3 Attach one end of the ODU LPU IF cable to the ODU phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 45 Installing the IF and ground cables Chapter 5 Installation 4 Attach the other end of the ODU LPU IF cable to the EQUIPMENT port of the top LPU Mount the top LPU on the supporting structure 6 Route the ODU LPU IF cable along the ground cable 5 46 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Lic
59. 80 1 76 8 75 6 22 Wireless operation QPSK 0 86 Yes 13 8 88 9 23 8PSK 0 83 Yes 40 3 83 1 79 3 78 1 2a QPSK 0 88 Yes 28 5 87 1 23 4 79 Wireless operation Chapter 4 Reference information Table 4 104 23 GHz FCC and Canada with 30 MHz bandwidth Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm Table 4 105 23 GHz FCC and Canada with Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 296QAM 0 80 Yes 177 4 68 61 59 1 15 2 296QAM 0 80 Yes 236 6 66 7 59 8 97 8 15 2 128QAM 0 82 Yes 155 1 70 7 67 4 66 1 17 128QAM 0 82 Yes 206 8 69 4 66 1 64 9 17 64QAM 0 82 Yes 130 4 73 7 70 3 69 17 64QAM 0 88 Yes 181 9 71 8 68 4 67 1 17 32QAM 0 84 Yes 103 6 76 3 73 1 71 9 22 16QAM 0 79 Yes 77 9 80 1 77 1 75 9 22 40 MHz bandwidth 32QAM 0 92 Yes 150 7 73 9 70 7 69 5 22 16QAM 0 79 Yes 103 8 78 8 75 9 74 7 22 8 PSK 0 80 Yes 59 1 82 3 78 9 77 6 22 BPSK 0 80 Yes 78 9 81 77 6 76 3 22 QPSK 0 80 Yes 39 4 85 9 23
60. 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing the IF and ground cables Making an IF cable ground point Perform this task to connect the screen of the IF cable to the metal of the Supporting structure using a cable grounding kit The cable grounding kit for 1 4 and 3 8 cable Figure 1 13 contains the following components 1 x grounding cable with grounding 2 hole lug fitted M10 1 x self Amalgamating tape 1 x PVC tape 3 x tie wraps 2 x bolt washer and nut Ground cables must be installed without drip loops and pointing down towards the ground otherwise they may not be effective To ground the IF cable to a metal structure using the Motorola grounding kit part number 01010419001 proceed as follows Remove 60 mm 2 5 inches of the IF cable outer jacket phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 57 Installing the IF and ground cables Chapter 5 Installation 2 Cut 38 mm 1 5 inches of rubber tape self amalgamating and fit to the ground cable lug Wrap the tape completely around the lug and cable 3 Fold the ground wire strap around the drop cable screen and fit cable ties 4 Cut the surplus from the cable ties 5 58 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing the IF and ground cables 5 Cut a 38 mm 1 5 inches section of self amalgamating tape and fit to the ground cable lug Wrap the self amalgamating tape completely around the lug and cable 6 U
61. B7 Hi 15236 15348 MHz 01010584009 ETSI B4 Lo 14403 14522 MHz 490 MHz 01010584010 B4 Hi 14893 15012 MHz 01010584011 B5 Lo 14515 14634 MHz 01010584012 B5 Hi 15005 15124 MHz 01010584013 B6 Lo 14627 14746 MHz 01010584014 B6 Hi 15117 15236 MHz 01010584015 B7 Lo 14739 14858 MHz 01010584016 B7 Hi 15229 15384 MHz 01010584020 ETSI B2 Lo 14500 14625 MHz 728 MHz 01010584021 B2 Hi 15228 15353 MHz 01010584022 Mexico B1 Lo 14627 14746 MHz 315 MHz 01010584023 B1 Hi 14942 15061 MHz 01010584024 B2 Lo 14725 14844 MHz 01010584025 B2 Hi 15040 15159 MHz 01010584026 B3 Lo 14823 14942 MHz Motorola Part Number 01010584027 01010584028 01010584029 01010584030 01010584031 01010584032 01010584033 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Standard ANZ Sub band B3 Hi B1 Lo B1 Hi B2 Lo B2 Hi B3 Lo B3 Hi ODU specifications 18 GHz Sub band frequency 15138 15257 MHz 14400 14512 MHz 15044 15156 MHz 14498 14610 MHz 15142 15254 MHz 14596 14708 MHz 15240 15352 MHz ODU specifications Transmit and receive Spacing 644 MHz Motorola can supply the ODUs listed in Table 4 21 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the 18 GHz band frequency range 17 70 19 70 GHz Table 4 21 ODU specifications main frequency 18 GHz Motorola Part Number 01010209001 01010209002 01010209003 01010209004 01010209005 01010209006 01010209007 01010209008 01010
62. Bank 1 Modem MAC Address software Version Hardware Version Elapsed Time Indicator Ethernet Data Port Link Status Data Port Speed And Duplex Management Port Link Status Management Port Speed And Duplex Bolina Ridge to Mount Tamalpais Bolina Ridge 00 04 556 30 00 cF 10 10 10 51 2aGHz TR1008 Hi 23002 23338MHz R35094182 105200509 00 0 4 56 30 00 bf PTP600 6266 widog 05 00 00 31 03 1000 Mbps Full Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex Automatic page refresh period in seconds leq A NOTE Wireless Wireless Link Status Maximum Transmit Power Remote Maximum Tran mit Power Channel Band width Transmit Power Receive Power Vector Error Link Loss Tranamit Link Capacity Receive Link Capacity Transmit Capacity Limit Transmit Capacity Limit Detail Transmit Modulation Mode Receive Modulation Mode dBm dBm MHz 150 150 15 0 15 0 dBm 49 0 49 0 49 0 49 0 dBm 35 9 36 3 36 5 36 3 dB 124 4 134 4 134 4 134 4 dB 236 Mbps 206 Mbps Unlimited Running At Unlimited Capacity 25504M 0 30 2090 4 0 80 Transmit Modulation Selection Det Acquiring Link Update Page Refresh Period Reset form Transmit power receive power vector error and link loss are presented as an array of four elements These elements represent the maximum mean minimum and latest values respectively The maximum mean and minimum are calculated over a running one hour period phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 80
63. CMU after resetting configuration or parameters as described in the above recovery tasks phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Using recovery mode Upgrading software image Perform this task when the CMU is in recovery mode The purpose of this task is to replace a corrupt or unwanted software image Before starting this task check that the Recovery Options page is displayed Figure 7 18 To upgrade the software image in recovery mode proceed as follows 1 Select Browse Navigate to the folder containing the required software image PTP 800 nn mm dld2 and select Open 2 If software corruption is suspected select the software image that was installed when the CMU went into recovery mode If an incorrect image has been loaded select the correct software image 3 Select Upgrade Software I mage The Software Upgrade Confirmation page is displayed Figure 7 19 4 Select Program Software I mage into Non Volatile Memory The Progress Tracker page is displayed On completion the Software Upgrade Complete page is displayed Figure 7 20 Select Reboot Wireless Unit The Reboot Confirmation dialog is displayed 6 Select OK The reboot progress message is displayed On completion the CMU restarts with the new software installed Figure 7 19 Recovery Software Upgrade confirmation page Software Upgrade Are You Sure The tables below compare the image stored in the primary software bank wi
64. Channel A alarm displayed in the System Summary page The alarms are defined in Table 7 10 A change of state in most alarms generates an SNMP trap or an SMTP email alert Figure 7 7 Alarm warning triangle uF RR AA MOTOROLA POINT TO POINT WIRELESS SOLUTIONS to system Summary Link Name Elapsed Time Indicator 00 00 17 hh mm 22 System Clock 22 Oct 2009 19 27 24 System Administration Transmitter Status Muted By User Radio License Incompatible Alarm irie eA eo peto eee oe ee phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 7 13 Managing alarms and events Table 7 10 System alarms Alarm Alignment mode Unit Out Of Calibration Encryption Enabled Mismatch Data port disabled warning Definition The CMU is in alignment mode The unit is out of calibration and must be returned to the factory using the RMA process for re calibration Encryption has been enabled on one end of the wireless link but not the other The fiber and copper data port has been disabled by means of the SNMP MIB Chapter 7 Operation Likely cause This should only occur during installation or maintenance when the wireless link is being aligned Check the calibration status and arrange for recalibration of the unit This is probably due toa configuration error in defining use of encryption over the wireless link See Configuring encryption in an operational protected link on page 6 31 The Ethernet data port has been di
65. Configuring security on page 6 31 Task 7 Setting passwords on page 6 34 Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages on page 6 36 Task 9 Configuring protection interface on page 6 42 Task 10 Configuring wireless interface on page 6 47 The following tasks are always performed after installation is complete at both sites Task 11 Aligning antennas on page 6 59 Task 12 Reviewing configuration and performance on page 6 67 Task 13 Connecting link to the network on page 6 70 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 6 1 Task 1 Connecting to the unit Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Task 1 Connecting to the unit This task consists of the following procedures Configuring the management PC on page 6 2 Updating the ARP table on page 6 5 Connecting to the PC and powering up on page 6 5 Logging into the web interface on page 6 6 Configuring the management PC 6 2 To configure the local management PC to communicate with the PTP 800 proceed as follows Display the Local Area Connection Properties dialog Figure 6 1 The path to this dialog depends on Windows version and PC configuration for example select Control Panel Network Connections Local Area Connection Properties Select Internet Protocol TCP IP and click on Properties The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog is displayed Figure 6 2 Enter an IP address that is valid for the 169 254 X X network avoiding 169 254 0 0 and
66. Configuring wireless interface Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Step 6 Completing configuration without alignment The Step 6 Configuration Complete page is displayed Figure 6 34 If the pre configuration of the PTP 800 system is complete then close the web interface Figure 6 34 Step 6 Configuration Complete page step 5 cancelled step 6 Configuration Complete You have successfully entered all of the configuration information necessary to install a wireless link Re start the Installation Wizard to make further changes or to perform antenna alignment 6 58 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 11 Aligning antennas Task 11 Aligning antennas Use the Installation Wizard to set the system into alignment mode to achieve the lowest possible link loss through correct antenna alignment and to report on the performance of the configured link A WARNING Do not start antenna alignment until it is safe for the antennas to radiate RF that is until the antennas and ODUs have been installed on the masts or poles and no personnel are in front of the antennas For background on the alignment process refer to Introduction to antenna alignment on page 6 59 Check that the requirements in Prerequisites for alignment on page 6 60 have been met For a protected link with two antennas at each end of the link perform Aligning protected antennas on page 6 60 For an unprot
67. Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power EMC Flectromagnetic compatibility EMD Flectromagnetic discharge ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute FCC Federal Communications Commission FEC Forward Error Correction GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GUI Graphical User Interface HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol IC Industry Canada ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol ID Identity IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IF Intermediate Frequency IP Internet Protocol ITU International Telecommunications Union LAN Local Area Network phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Term LDPC LOS LPU LTE MAC MIB MRP ODU PC PING PTP QAM QoS QPSK RMK RF RSL RSSI SELV SFP SMTP SNMP SNTP SIP TCP URL USA UV VLAN Glossary Definition Low Density Parity Check Line of Sight clear line of sight and Fresnel zone is clear Lightning Protection Unit 3GPP Long Term Evolution Medium Access Control Layer Management Information Base Multiple Registration Protocol Outdoor Unit IBM Compatible Personal Computer ICMP Echo Request Point to Point Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Quality of Service Quadrature Phase Shift Keying Random Access Memory Remote Mount Kit Radio Frequency Receive Signal Level Received Signal Strength Indication Safety Extra Low Voltage Small Form factor Pluggable Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol Simple Network Time Protocol S
68. Ethernet Microwave User Guide Motorola Solutions Inc end user license agreement 2y IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALE THE OpensoL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LbIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBST LTUTE GOODS OR SERVICES OSs OF USE DATA OR PROF TIS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPT LON HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ej jneerypCSsore com Original SSLeay License Copyright Cy 1995 1999 Erie Young eaydcrypesore com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA lhash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covere
69. MHz 01010411015 B2 Lo 6520 6630 MHz 01010411016 B2 Hi 6860 6970 MHz 01010411017 B3 Lo 6600 6710 MHz 01010411018 B3 Hi 6940 7050 MHz 01010411019 B4 Lo 6670 6780 MHz 01010411020 B4 Hi 7010 7120 MHz phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide ODU specifications ODU specifications 7 GHz Motorola can supply the ODUs listed in Table 4 16 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the 7 GHz band frequency range 7 125 7 900 GHz Table 4 16 ODU specifications main frequency 7 GHz phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Motorola Standard Sub Sub band Transmit Part band frequency and Number receive Spacing 01010610001 ETSI B1 Lo 7428 7484 MHz 154 MHz 01010610002 B1 Hi 7582 7638 MHz 01010610003 B2 Lo 7470 7526 MHz 01010610004 B2 Hi 7624 7680 MHz 01010610005 B3 Lo 7512 7568 MHz 01010610006 B3 Hi 7666 7722 MHz 01010610013 ETSI B1 Lo 7114 7177 MHz 161 MHz 01010610014 B1 Hi 7275 7338 MHz 01010610015 B2 Lo 7149 7212 MHz 01010610016 B2 Hi 7310 7373 MHz 01010610017 B3 Lo 7184 7247 MHz 01010610018 B3 Hi 7345 7408 MHz 01010610019 B4 Lo 7219 7282 MHz 01010610020 B4 Hi 7380 7443 MHz 01010610021 B5 Lo 7239 7302 MHz 01010610022 B5 Hi 7400 7463 MHz 01010610023 B6 Lo 7274 7337 MHz 01010610024 B6 Hi 7435 7498 MHz 01010610025 B7 Lo 7309 7372 MHz 01010610026 B7 Hi 7470 7533 MHz 01010610027 B8 Lo 7344 7407 MHz 01010610028 B8 Hi 7505 7568 MHz 010
70. Maximum Transmit Power User ACM Highest Mod Mode User ACM Lowest Mod Mode Meaning Enter the maximum transmit power the wireless unit is permitted to use when establishing and maintaining the wireless link This defaults to the lowest of the maximum allowed by the equipment the maximum allowed by the license or the user maximum set in a previous installation This is the maximum modulation mode the radio can use when ACM is enabled The valid range depends on the region license and Tx Max Power This attribute is only visible for certain regions when Radio License Modulation Selection is set to Adaptive This is the minimum modulation mode the radio can use when ACM is enabled The valid range depends on the region license and Tx Max Power This attribute is only visible for certain regions when Radio License Modulation Selection is set to Adaptive Step 4 Confirming installation configuration When the Step 4 Confirm Installation Configuration page is displayed Figure 6 32 review the attributes If any are incorrect select Back and return to the appropriate step to correct them If all attributes are correct select Submit Updated Installation Configuration or Next A NOTE If the ODU is not connected to the CMU the ODU Type attribute is set to Not Present Changed parameters are shown in bold phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 6 55 Task 10 Configuring wireless interface 6 56 Chapt
71. May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing antenna with two ODUs and a coupler Figure 5 1 Words embossed on coupler asymmetric shown i Si e AAMAS GS STANDBY or MAIN Direct mounting of antenna with two ODUs and coupler In the direct mount configuration the coupler with ODUs is attached directly to the antenna with Motorola ODU interface via four latches Attaching coupler to antenna To attach the coupler to the antenna proceed as follows 1 Follow the antenna manufacturer s instructions to attach the antenna to its bracket 2 Check that the supplied coupler is the correct type for this installation Check the contents of the coupler mounting kit phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 25 Installing antenna with two ODUs and a coupler Chapter 5 Installation 3 Ensure the correct spacers are fitted to each of the four legs 11GHz spacer length 27mm 18 GHz 23 GHz and 26 GHz spacer length 7 75mm 4 Fora protected link check that the circular transitions on the coupler have the same alignment vertical or horizontal depending on the antenna polarity If necessary rotate the circular transitions according to the manufacturer s instructions 5 Take note of the word TOP embossed in the casting ensure this edge is upper most when attached to the antenna 5 26 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing antenna wi
72. May 2011 5 69 Testing the installation Chapter 5 Installation Measuring distance to fault The distance to fault DTF test is used as a means of characterizing the cable installation but can also be used to determine the location of a fault in an installation Before performing this test ensure that the test equipment is set up as described in Test preparation on page 5 64 To measure distance to fault proceed as follows 1 Select the DTF return loss mode of the cable analyzer Figure 5 7 2 Select DTF Aid 3 Use the up down key to select and set the following Cable type select LMR400 similar to CNT 400 F2 select the highest frequency possible for the greatest resolution 1600 MHz D1 and D2 set as appropriate for the specific installation 4 Recalibrate the instrument 5 Before connecting the ODU obtain a plot of DTF loss Compare it to an example of a good installation Figure 5 13 6 Connect the ODU Observe the effect of the ODU connection on the DTF plot Compare it to an example of a good installation Figure 5 14 8 Keep a copy of the DIF plots so that they can be compared with subsequent plots to determine if there is any degradation with time A NOTE The absolute readings of DTF should be read with care as many different variables affect both distance and amplitude accuracy 5 70 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide DTF return loss
73. Mid band gain 30 9 dBi 36 0 dBi 40 0 dBi 42 0 dBi 45 2 dBi Vertical beamwidth 4 7 27 1 6 137 0 9 4 7 2 79 1 6 PS 0 9 Vertical beamwidth 4 7 A ha 1 6 1 3 0 9 Weight 7 kg 15 1b 11 kg 25 1b 24 kg 53 1b 55 kg 121 1b 62 kg 137 lb 7 kg 15 1b 11 kg 25 1b 24 kg 53 1b 55 kg 121 1b 62 kg 137 lb Weight 7 kg 15 1b 11 kg 25 1b 24 kg 53 1b 55 kg 121 1b 62 kg 137 1b 4 35 Antenna specifications Antenna specifications 15 GHz Chapter 4 Reference information Motorola can supply the antennas listed in Table 4 34 and Table 4 35 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the 15 GHz band frequency range 14 25 15 35 GHz Table 4 34 Antenna specifications for 15 GHz single polarization Motorola number 85010089031 85010089047 85009298005 85010089034 85010089035 Diameter 0 3 m 1 ft 0 6 m 2 ft 1 0 m 3 ft 1 2 m 4 ft 1 8 m 6 ft Interfa ce MDM MDM MDM MDM MDM MDM Motorola direct mount Mid band gain 32 1 dBi 36 8 dBi 41 1 dBi 42 9 dBi 46 2 dBi Vertical beamwidth 4 3 Za 1 57 1 27 0 8 Table 4 35 Antenna specifications for 15 GHz dual polarization Motorola number 85010092031 85010092057 85010092044 85010092034 85010092035 Diameter 0 3 m 1 ft 0 6 m 2 ft 1 0 m 3 ft 1 2 m 4 ft 1 8 m 6 ft Interface PBR140 PBR140 PBR140 PBR140 PBR140 Mid band gain
74. Netherlands Poland Portugal Romania Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden United Kingdom This equipment may also be used in the following non EU states that belong to CEPT Belarus Iceland Norway Switzerland and Turkey phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 4 95 Radiation hazard assessment Chapter 4 Reference information Radiation hazard assessment ETSI method This section evaluates the radiation levels produced by the PTP 800 products against the following standards 1999 519 EC of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields 0 Hz to 300 GHz EN 50385 2002 Product standard to demonstrate the compliances of radio base stations and fixed terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems with the basic restrictions or the reference levels related to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields 110 MHz to 40 GHz general public EN 50383 2002 Basic standard for the calculation and measurement of electromagnetic field strength and SAR related to human exposure from radio base stations and fixed terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems 110 MHz to 40 GHz Exposure categories EN 50385 2002 Clause 3 1 defines the restrictions on exposure to time varying electric magnetic and electromagnetic fields that are based directly on established health effects Between 10 GHz and 40 GHz the physical quantity is the power density 1999 519 EC define
75. Oren rene 8 12 Check that Protection Switching is enabled ccccecececscseeesececececececececececececeeeees 8 12 Check the status of the wireless interface ccccecsceceeecececececeeeesecececeseecesecseueess 8 13 Check the physical Link Protection CADIGC vicisacscaveciveictosioviesccnszcacenepasdavererietrsaavans 8 13 Force a Protection SWILCIOY CF vai csvsctecccnusearenbsecansduacnasenndoeastersenassareeiubenendeanselaenennureeein 8 13 Check the configuration of the active and inactive UMNItS cccececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 13 MS ANY press vip wri A oe payin eo os acne en seep oe nese enbenesind beep eeubeecaseeresaseabien seca phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Contents Figures and Tables List of Figures Pee PTP OT T Beererererreneretie sr tr trier rere er rrr sr ent quent trurer tT artnr rer Tet ette rar tren nner rnTr rT etree ttt 1 6 Figure d CMU TOn PANG Reerment rere rees een anien net er tmr Serer ere TT Te Terre rete tert rer ett renner Tres Ten Taree rtrtr arte 1 6 ee O er A RRE E E anotiasoenuhiaheduansasinntaese ENEE 1 10 Figure 1 4 ODU front rear and side VIEW ssasisrissrirsriyonsdiaKane ridindi kandod irok IKEa AiE ENEAS 1 11 Figure 1 5 Typical PTP 800 antenna Motorola direct mount interface ccececeeeeeeees 1 13 Figure 1 6 Direct mount mechanical interface cece ce cececececnceeneneneneececeececececeseaeaeaes 1 14 Figure 1 7 ODU clippe
76. Peak survival wind velocity 249 km h 155 mph phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 4 31 Antenna specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Antenna specifications Lower 6 GHz and Upper 6 GHz Motorola can supply the antennas listed in Table 4 26 and Table 4 27 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the Lower 6 GHz band frequency range 5 925 6 425 GHz and the Upper 6 GHz band frequency range 6 425 7 125 GHz Table 4 26 Antenna specifications for 6 GHz single polarization Motorola number 85009298001 85010089020 85010089021 85010091022 85010091006 85010091007 85009294001 85009294002 85009294003 85009294004 Diameter 1 0 m 3 ft 1 2 m 4 ft 1 8 m 6 ft 1 0 m 3 ft 1 2 m 4 ft 1 8 m 6 ft 1 8 m 6 ft 2 4 m 8 ft 3 m 10 ft 3 7 m 12 ft Interface MDM MDM MDM PDR70 PDR70 PDR70 CPR137G CPR137G CPR137G CPR137G MDM Motorola direct mount Mid band gain 33 dBi 35 dBi 39 dBi 33 dBi 35 dBi 39 dBi 38 2 dBi 40 8 dBi 43 4 dBi 44 9 dBi Vertical beamwidth Jad PAP 1 8 30 TA ia 1 8 1 9 1 4 LL 0 9 Table 4 27 Antenna specifications for 6 GHz dual polarization Motorola number Diameter Interface Mid band gain 85010092048 85010092020 85010092021 1 0 m 3 ft 1 2 m 4 ft 1 8 m 6 ft PDR70 PDR70 PDR70 33 dBi 35 dBi 39 dBi Vertical beamwidth 33 2 29 1 8 Weight 24 kg 53 1b 55 kg 121 1b 62 kg 137 1b 24 kg
77. Table 9 9 Iransmitter Status 0 aa hiact asain seodanaselnseadereaautea acu magneaasedaanaelasasdebenarseascusetaneeets 8 10 Toe LDE hc Bic ola ts E watery tmnt tne anne nC nr mre nine hee hnn rT tm er nner rrr rr A 8 11 Table 8 11 Protected Interface Status values and actions ssssesessesesseseesessesesresessesessese 8 12 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 xix List of Tables XX phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 About This User Guide About This User Guide This guide describes the planning installation and operation of the Motorola PTP 800 It is intended for use by the system designer system installer and the system administrator Users of this guide should have knowledge of the following areas Radio network design Outdoor radio equipment installation System installation configuration monitoring and fault finding System designers should refer to the following chapters Chapter 1 Product description Chapter 2 Planning considerations Chapter 3 Legal information Chapter 4 Reference information Installers should refer to the following chapters Chapter 5 Installation Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Operators should refer to the following chapters Chapter 1 Product description Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Chapter 7 Operation Chapter 8 Troubleshooting phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 1 Revision History Revision H
78. Waveguide flanges 7 to 15 GHz RMK Side Antenna Side Flange Flange ek a 8 GHz 5 PBR84 E 11 13 GHz i 15 GHz PBR140 UBR140 4 44 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Flexible waveguide specifications Figure 4 4 Waveguide flanges 18 to 38 GHz RMK Side Antenna Side Flange Flange aan 18 26 GHz UBR220 38 GHz pe PBR320 a Figure 4 5 Waveguide flanges 11 GHz tapered transition Waveguide Antenna Side Flange Side Flange a B 38mm i Ao Ao E 5 E S a Yo PBR120 UDR100 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Flexible waveguide specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Torque values for waveguide flanges To obtain the correct torque values for fastening waveguides refer to Table 4 45 Table 4 45 Torque value in Nm lb ft for each fastener size Material M3 M4 M5 M6 Ms Stainless 0 9 2 2 4 5 7 7 18 7 steel 0 6 1 6 3 3 9 7 13 8 Flexible waveguide specifications 6 GHz 4 46 Motorola can supply the flexible waveguides listed in Table 4 46 for 6 GHz links Lower and Upper Table 4 46 Flexible waveguide specifications 6 GHz Motorola part number 98010076016 98010076017 Operating frequency range 5 9 GHz to 8 2 GHz 9 9 GHz to 8 2 GHz Length 900 mm 35 in 900 mm 35 in Attenuation 0 3 dB m 0 3 dB m VSWR 1 10 1 10 Waveguide size WR137 WG14 R70 WR137 WG14 R70 R
79. Where necessary the end user is responsible for obtaining any national licenses required to operate this product and these must be obtained before using the product in any particular country Contact the appropriate national administrations for details on the conditions of use for the bands in question and any exceptions that might apply In order to reduce potential radio interference to other users the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the Effective Isotropic Radiated Power EIRP is not more than that permitted for successful communication United States and Canada notification This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS GEN of Industry Canada These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense A NOTE A Class A Digital Device is a device that is marketed for use ina commercial industrial or business environment exclusive of a device which is marketed fo
80. at one end of the link and the two Lo ODUs are installed at the other end phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 9 Installing antenna with a single ODU Chapter 5 Installation Direct mounting of antenna with a single ODU In the direct mount configuration the ODU is attached directly to the antenna with Motorola ODU interface via four latches To install a direct mount antenna with a single ODU proceed as follows 1 Follow the antenna manufacturer s instructions to attach the antenna to its bracket 2 Polarization depends upon the antenna waveguide interface position To change polarization rotate the antenna transition following the antenna manufacturer s instructions Vertical polarization Horizontal polarization 3 Apply silicone grease to the O Ring of the antenna transition 5 10 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing antenna with a single ODU 4 6 Remove the ODU waveguide interface dust cover Fit the ODU to the antenna transition ensuring that the antenna and ODU waveguide interfaces align correctly Observe the polarization of the antenna waveguide interface Vertical polarization Horizontal polarization Secure the ODU to the antenna with the four latches taking care to ensure they are correctly engaged phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 11 Installing antenna with a single ODU Chapter 5 Installation 7 Check that the ant
81. check the following The Ethernet port in the PC is enabled The Ethernet cable between the CMU and the PC is connected and is not damaged If possible substitute a known good Ethernet cable e The Ethernet ports have compatible auto negotiation and duplex settings as described in Configuring the IP interface and management mode on page 6 9 If these steps fail to resolve the problem continue at Using recovery mode on page 7 50 selecting the option to reset IP and Ethernet configuration phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Connecting to the web management interface Check the copper Data port Ethernet connection Check the state of the copper Data port indicators and take action as described in Table 8 5 Table 8 5 Copper Data port indicator checks Copper Data Likely cause and action port indicator state Yellow steady The Ethernet link is up but is not carrying traffic Continue green steady at Check IP network connection on page 8 7 Yellow flash The Ethernet link is up and is carrying traffic Continue at green flash Check IP network connection on page 8 7 Off The Ethernet link is down Continue at Copper Data port indicator is off on page 8 5 Copper Data port indicator is off If the Copper Data port indicator is off it means that the Ethernet link is down If the CMU copper data port is connected to a network check the following The associated network equipment
82. coaxial cable installation assembly kit includes two cable grounding kits but additional grounding kits may be required to cover all IF cable grounding points Cable Grounding Kits For 1 4 And 3 8 Cable Motorola part number 01010419001 Kit contents grounding cable self amalgamating tape PVC tape tie wraps bolts washers and nuts Required for crimping N type connectors to IF cables Crimp tool for N type connector Motorola part number 66010063001 To minimise radiated emissions use screened Catde cable for all copper connections from the CMU Ethernet ports Data or Management to any network switch phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installation inventories Table 4 2 Inventory of the coaxial cable installation assembly kit WB3616 item Braided cable assembly Cable grounding kits for 1 4 and 3 8 cable Ground lead Ground lead phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Notes Quantity per kit 1 0 7meter long cable to go between the ODU and the LPU mounted close to the antenna Quantity per kit 2 Each kit contains earth wire PVC tape self amalgamating tape and fixings Quantity per kit 1 Green 0 8 meter long with M5 lugs fitted each end Quantity per kit 2 Green 0 8 meter long with M5 lugs fitted one end and M10 the other 4 5 Installation inventories Chapter 4 Reference information Item Notes Weather proo
83. configuration is required perform Remote mounting of antenna with two ODUs and coupler on page 5 30 A WARNING Follow applicable health and safety rules for use of silicone grease If necessary use the latex gloves supplied with the products Protected link considerations Perform this task when a protected link requires ODU redundancy but not antenna redundancy At each end connect one antenna to two ODUSs via a coupler either in a direct mount or remote mount configuration A WARNING If upgrading an unprotected link to protected mute the active unit before installing the coupler For safety reasons this is required when working with the ODUs or when working close to the antenna See Disabling and enabling the wireless interface on page 7 25 The ODUs are labeled Hi or Lo depending on the frequency sub band When installing a protected link ensure that the two Hi ODUs are installed at one end of the link and the two Lo ODUs are installed at the other end If the coupler is asymmetric one side is embossed with the word MAIN and the other side with STANDBY Figure 5 1 The MAIN side has lower loss For a protected link ensure that the MAIN and STANDBY sides can still be identified after the ODUs are fitted as the MAIN side ODU must be connected to the Primary CMU and the STANDBY side ODU must be connected to the Secondary CMU 5 24 phn 1478 012v000
84. conforms to the physical specifications listed in Table 4 11 Table 4 11 ODU physical specifications Category Specification Dimensions Diameter 26 7 cm 10 5 in Depth 8 9 cm 3 5 in Weight 4 6 kg 10 1 lbs ODU environmental The PTP 800 ODU conforms to the environmental specifications listed in Table 4 12 and Table 4 7 Table 4 12 ODU environmental specifications Category Specification Temperature 33 C 27 F to 55 C 131 F Humidity 100 condensing Waterproof IP56 UV Exposure 10 year operational life UL746C test evidence 4 16 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide ODU specifications RSSI output Table 4 13 specifies the voltage measured at the RSSI connector of the ODU for each combination of received signal level dBm and channel separation or bandwidth MHz Table 4 13 RSSI voltage received signal level and bandwidth RSL Channel separation Bandwidth Bandwidth Bandwidth dBm 7 13 75 14 27 5 28 10 20 or 30 MHz 50 MHz 29 65 55 or 56 MHz 40 MHz 20 4 54 4 63 4 71 4 57 21 4 48 4 57 4 65 4 51 22 4 41 4 50 4 58 4 44 23 4 35 4 44 4 52 4 38 24 4 29 4 38 4 46 4 32 29 4 22 4 31 4 39 4 25 26 4 16 4 25 4 33 4 19 27 4 10 4 19 4 27 4 13 28 4 03 4 12 4 20 4 06 29 3 97 4 06 4 14 4 00 30 3 90 4 00 4 08 3 94 31 3 84 3 93 4 01 3 87 32 3 78 3 87 3 95 3 81 33 3 71 3 81 3 89 3 75 34 3 65 3 74 3 82 3 68 35 3 59 3 68 3 76 3 62 36 3 92 3 62 3 70 3 56 37
85. directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tyjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS 1S AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROP ITS OR BUSINESS NTERRUP TION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THs SOFTWARE EVEN IE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence 3 10 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Motorola Solutions Inc end user license agreement UCD SNMP Copyright 1989 1991 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University Derivative Work 1996 1998 2000 Copyright 1996 1998 2000 The Regents of the University of California All Rights Reserved Permissio
86. file Before starting this task ensure that The configuration file of the old faulty unit has been saved The new replacement unit has been installed The license key of the old unit has been entered in the new unit To restore the configuration file proceed as follows 1 Select menu option Configuration Save And Restore The Save amp Restore Configuration page is displayed Figure 6 12 2 Select Browse and navigate to the PC folder containing the saved configuration file cfg Select Restore Configuration File and Reboot 4 Select OK to confirm the restore The configuration file is uploaded and used to reconfigure the new unit to the same state as the old unit On completion the unit reboots phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 7 57 Restoring the operational configuration Chapter 7 Operation 7 58 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 Chapter 8 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting This chapter provides instructions for identifying and correcting faults in a PTP 800 link The following topics are described in this chapter Connecting to the web management interface on page 8 2 Installing the link on page 8 9 Testing protection switchover on page 8 12 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 8 1 Connecting to the web management interface Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Connecting to the web management interface Perform this task if any problems are encountered when connecting to the PTP 800 web interface Check the CMU pow
87. followed for convenience Primary to Main and Secondary to Standby but this makes no difference to wireless signal quality Links with antenna protection Links with antenna protection Figure 1 16 require two antennas at each end These may be of the same type or of different types If the antennas are of different types the antenna that is predicted to provide the better quality link should be designated the Primary neighbor at that end of the link phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide 1 1 Hot Standby link protection Protected link network interfaces The two neighbors at an end must normally connect to the network via the same Ethernet switch The Ethernet switch routes traffic to the active neighbor Figure 1 17 Both the active and inactive neighbors at the other end of the link receive the wireless signal but only the active neighbor forwards this data to the Ethernet switch Figure 1 17 Active and inactive customer data paths in a protected link Wireless link PTP 800 PTP 800 active active Ethernet Ethernet switch switch PTP 800 Radio links PTP 800 inactive inactive Customer data over the active path lt gt Customer data over the inactive path gt A NOTE The Ethernet switch must be able to do address learning and to flush its filter database promptly on a link down alert Many inexpensive unmanaged switches will fail to
88. hottest parts on the top of the unit adjacent to the rear face and to the front panel mounted N type connector Operation of CMU in a Restricted Access Location The CMU may be operated in ambient temperatures up to 55 C when it is housed in a Restricted Access Location Under these conditions the temperature of the external metal case parts of the CMU may exceed a touch temperature of 70 C but will be less than 90 C A Restricted Access Location is defined in EN 90650 1 as one where access may only be gained by use of a tool or lock and key or other means of security and access is controlled by the authority responsible for the location Examples of permissible Restricted Access Locations are A lockable equipment room A lockable cabinet phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 5 73 Installing the CMU Chapter 5 Installation Access must only be gained by persons who have been instructed about the reasons for the restrictions applied to the location and about any precautions that must be taken Mounting the CMU The CMU can be mounted in three ways On a shelf or bench top On a wall In a cabinet rack The CMU kit contains the CMU CMU bracket power connector and ground lug Figure 5 15 Figure 5 15 CMU kit contents To prevent the CMU from overheating ensure that the ventilation holes on the side of the CMU are not obstructed and that there is room for air flow across the back of the CMU the end op
89. image has been compromised The most likely cause of an integrity problem with the installed main application software is where the power supply has been interrupted during an earlier software upgrade The CMU operates in recovery mode in the following circumstances When a checksum error occurs for the main application software image When the CMU front panel recovery button is pressed at the same time as the CMU is rebooted or power cycled When the Short Power Cycle for Recovery is enabled and CMU is power cycled and the off period is between one and five seconds Options in recovery mode are as follows Load new main application software Reset all configuration data to factory default This option resets IP and Ethernet configuration and erases zeroizes critical security parameters Reset IP and Ethernet configuration to factory default Erase zeroize critical security parameters Reboot with existing software and configuration AA NOTE If recovery mode has been entered either because of a checksum error or Short Power Cycle by default the CMU will reboot with existing software and configuration following a 30 second wait The recovery software image is installed during manufacture of the CMU and cannot be upgraded by operators For detailed instructions on using the recovery mode see Using recovery mode on page 7 50 1 48 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microw
90. link end should have one primary normally active and one secondary normally inactive CMU For background information see 1 1 Hot Standby link protection on page 1 25 Before configuring link protection for new links complete the following prerequisites Decide which CMUs are to be primary and which are secondary and attach Primary or Secondary labels to the CMUs Decide whether or not antenna protection is to be used Decide whether the primary unit if the secondary takes over should switch back to active operation automatically and if so after what period of stable operation Before upgrading existing links from unprotected to protected complete the following prerequisites Configure the new CMUSs as primary or secondary units by setting the Primary Secondary Mode attribute For a new primary CMU ensure that wireless transmission is disabled by selecting Mute Transmitter This prevents possible interference with the existing operational unit Attach Primary or Secondary labels as appropriate to the new CMUs Set Fault Protection Switching to Disabled This prevents fault protection switches occurring during installation To configure protection proceed as follows 1 Select menu option Configuration Protection The Protection Configuration page is displayed Figure 6 22 If the Transmitter attribute is set to Enabled there may be a safety requirement to disable wirel
91. maximum mean minimum and latest measurements of Receive Power The maximum mean minimum and latest measurements of Vector Error Normalized Mean Square Vector Error is a measure of quality for the received signal after all corrections made by the demodulator The value is generally in the range from 3 dB to 35 dB A more negative number indicates a higher quality signal The maximum mean minimum and latest measurements of Link Loss Link Loss is a measurement of the loss in signal level as the radio wave propagates between the antennas installed at each end of the link It is determined by measurement of the receive level the transmit power of the remote end and the antenna gains and feeder losses at each end of the link The Link Loss is therefore only accurate if the correct antenna gains and feeder losses have been configured at both ends of the link Link Loss dB Remote Transmit Power dBm Remote Feeder Loss dB Remote Antenna Gain dBi Local Antenna Gain dBi Local Feeder Loss dB Local Receive Power dBm The data rate in the transmit direction expressed in Mbps and presented as max mean min and latest in an histogram format The max min and latest are true instantaneous measurements the mean is the mean of a set of one second means The data rate in the receive direction expressed in Mbps and presented as max mean min and latest in an histogram format The max min and latest are t
92. meet these requirements For more information see Planning link protection on page 2 5 Protected links may be configured for either out of band or in band management For definitions of these management modes see Management network on page 1 37 For details of the Ethernet switch connections in protected ends see Protected link with out of band management on page 1 30 and Protected link with in band management on page 1 33 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 1 29 1 1 Hot Standby link protection Chapter 1 Product description Protected link with out of band management The Data port and Management ports of both CMUs connect to the Ethernet switch Figure 1 18 The customer data connections may be both copper both fiber or one copper and one fiber Only the active CMU forwards traffic between the customer network and the wireless interface Figure 1 18 Out of band management connections for a protected end IF cable to Primary ODU IF cable to Secondary ODU Primary CMU secondary CMU 3o02 aO e eee e e gt n amp 0 G 0 0 G CHEE F cable l Cat5e cable for management network f g Gp Catde cable for customer network 0 G Alternative fiber cable for customer o 0 olen Out of band 9 B protection 0 splitter 6 Q 0 O 0 0 0 6 0 G S A a 0 HALL O OOOO CICICOLICI CoC COCO ali Ethernet switch 1 30 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide 1
93. of Motorola Solutions Inc and its licensors It is furnished by express license agreement only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement High Risk Materials Components units or 3 Party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault tolerant and are NOT designed manufactured or intended for use as on line control equipment in the following hazardous environments requiring fail safe controls the operation of Nuclear Facilities Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems Air Traffic Control Life Support or Weapons Systems High Risk Activities Motorola and its supplier s specifically disclaim any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities Trademarks Q MOTOROLA MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the US Patent amp Trademark Office All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Safety Important safety information This section describes important safety guidelines that must be observed by personnel installing or operating PTP 800 equipment A WARNING To prevent loss of life or physical injury observe the safety guidelines in this section Power lines Exercise extreme care when installing antennas near power lines Working at heights Exercise extreme care when working at heights Grounding and protective earth The outdoor unit ODU and compact mode
94. of cable y from the first LPU to the second LPU at the top of the tower and a short length of cable from the second LPU to the ODU 0 7m long supplied in the accessory kit Figure 5 8 Example of the cable test IF Cable LPU ODU Cable Supplied in the accessory kit A NOTE These tests should be performed in conjunction with the test equipment manufacturer s instructions To prepare for pre power testing proceed as follows 1 Connect the analyzer to the first LPU Figure 5 8 2 Connect the first LPU to the second Figure 5 8 3 Check that the second LPU is disconnected from the cable that leads to the ODU Figure 5 8 The second LPU and ODU are reconnected during testing 4 Power on the analyzer When these preparations are complete perform the following tests Testing cable loss on page 5 65 Measuring distance to fault on page 5 70 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Testing the installation Testing cable loss The purpose of this test is to ensure that the total cable loss is within acceptable limits Before performing this test ensure that the test equipment is set up as described in Test preparation on page 5 64 To measure cable loss proceed as follows 1 2 Select the cable loss one port mode of the cable analyzer Figure 5 7 Set the frequency of measurement to F1 350MHz F2
95. of equipment a protected link can be automatically returned to operation with minimal delay This feature also enables system maintenance to be carried out with minimum impact on traffic Concept of a protected link An unprotected PTP 800 link comprises one CMU one ODU and one antenna at each end This provides no protection against equipment failure A protected PTP 800 link comprises an Ethernet switch two CMUs two ODUs and either one or two antennas at each end A protected end consists of two neighbors If antenna protection is not implemented Figure 1 15 each neighbor consists of one CMU connected to one ODU The two ODUs are connected to one antenna via a coupler The link provides CMU and ODU protection but not antenna protection If antenna protection is implemented Figure 1 16 each neighbor consists of one CMU connected to one ODU connected to one antenna without a coupler The link provides CMU ODU and antenna protection One neighbor is labelled Primary and the other Secondary The two neighbors operate as a pair If a component of one of the neighbors fails then the other neighbor takes over the link operation The two CMUs are normally connected to the same Ethernet switch because this allows communication of management information to the inactive unit when management access is across the wireless link The protection interface is used for communicating protection status inf
96. on page 6 25 Upgrading software in an operational protected link on page 6 27 Upgrading to a new software version on page 6 28 Ensure that the correct units are upgraded as units cannot easily be downgraded afterwards If the link is operational ensure that the remote end of the link is upgraded first using the wireless connection and then the local end can be upgraded Otherwise the remote end may not be accessible Checking the installed software version To check the installed software version proceed as follows Procedure 6 1 Check software version 1 Select menu option Status The System Status page is displayed Software Version is in the Modem section Figure 6 11 2 Go to http www motorola com ptp support and find Point to Point software updates Check that the latest software version for example 800 03 00 is the same as the installed Software Version 3 If the software needs to be upgraded to the latest version perform Saving the system configuration on page 6 25 and Upgrading to a new software version on page 6 28 6 24 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 5 Upgrading software version Figure 6 11 Software Version in System Status page system Status attributes vate units attributes value units Link Wireless Link Name Bolinas Ridge to Mount Tamalpais Wireless Link Status Site Name Bolinas Ridge Maximum Transmit Power Remote WAC Address 00 04 56 30 00 c
97. oo 0 0 2 5 5 0 7 5 10 0 12 5 15 0 17 5 20 0 22 5 25 0 Distance 0 0 25 0 Meter dB sS Resolution 517 CAL ON COAX CW OFF Std Channel N A Date 11 10 2009 Time 04 50 58 Ins Loss 0 135dB m Model S311D Serial 00936036 Prop Vel 0 850 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing the CMU Installing the CMU Perform this task to mount the CMU in the building or cabinet and to connect it to ground power supply and PC To minimise radiated emissions use screened Ethernet cable for all copper connections from the CMU Ethernet ports This includes the Data port connection to any network switch and the Management port to the splitter WB3807 if fitted and onwards to any network switch Connect the CMU protection interface for either out of band or in band management as required Maximum operating ambient temperature for the CMU A WARNING HOT SURFACES care should be taken when handling an operating CMU The CMU must be mounted on either a horizontal or vertical surface The supplied mounting bracket must be used The CMU must not be operated in ambient temperatures exceeding 40 deg C unless mounted in a Restricted Access Location At ambient temperatures over this limit the temperature of the external metal case parts of the CMU may exceed a touch temperature of 70 deg C Heat warning labels are fixed adjacent to the
98. or coupler Waveguide interface The waveguide interface connects to a Motorola direct mount antenna an ODU coupler kit or a remote mount kit The ODU is secured by means of the four spring loaded latches Ground connector This is used to ground the ODU by attaching it to the mast top lightning protection unit LPU RSSI connector The received signal strength indication RSSI connector is a standard BNC female connector that provides access to an analogue voltage proportional to the received power at the ODU input A voltmeter is attached to the RSSI connector to measure the voltage when aligning the antenna For more information see Step 6 Aligning antennas on page 6 61 CMU connector This connects the ODU to the CMU For more information see ODU connector on page 1 7 1 12 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Antenna and antenna accessories Antenna and antenna accessories Antenna description Motorola supplies high performance low profile antennas for PTP 800 frequency bands in sizes from 0 3 m 1 ft to 1 8 m 6 ft Figure 1 5 The antennas are available in three variants Single polarization Motorola direct mount interface e Single polarization waveguide interface Dual polarization waveguide interface Figure 1 5 Typical PTP 800 antenna Motorola direct mount interface The Motorola direct mount interface Figure 1 6 provides a reliable and convenient way
99. signifies that The link has gone down the SNMP entity acting in an This may be due to agent role has detected that the Operational Status for one Problems with the of its communication links is PTP 800 about to enter the down state Problems on the link from some other state itself Failure of a device at the other end of the link linkUp A linkUp trap signifies that the The link is now available for SNMP entity acting in an service agent role has detected that the Operational Status for one of its communication links left the down state and transitioned into some other state normally up phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 7 19 Managing alarms and events SNMP Trap name protectionStateTrap Diagnostic alarms alignmentModeTrap linkNameMismatchTrap unitOutOfCalibrationTrap encryptionEnabledMisma tchTrap Description In a 1 1 Hot Standby configuration this indicates a change of protection with one unit becoming active and one inactive This indicates the new Protection State of a CMU ODU to the Active or Inactive State Indicates if the unit is undergoing alignment A change of state during operation may generate an SNMP trap and or SMTP email alert Signaling was received with the wrong Link Name The unit is out of calibration Encryption has been enabled on one end of the wireless link but not the other Chapter 7 Operation Cause and action Check for alarms from the newl
100. the CMU will be installed in a location that is difficult to access The short power cycle provides an additional way to start the CMU in recovery mode for remote operation For more information see Using recovery mode on page 7 50 Ensure that Link name is the same at both ends of the link If the Link name is not the same the link will not establish phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 10 Configuring wireless interface Step 2 Configuring radio license parameters When the Step 2 Radio License Configuration page is displayed Figure 6 27 or Figure 6 28 or Figure 6 29 enter the radio license attributes Table 6 12 These parameters are normally obtained from the individual license Select Next Figure 6 27 Step 2 Radio License Configuration page fixed modulation step 2 Enter details of the Radio License Radio license data entry Attributes Va Units Radio License Identifier 86195613 Radio License Band 26 GHz Radio License Region Radio License Channel Separation 56 MHz w Radio License Modulation Selection Adaptive Modulation Fixed Modulation Radio License Mad Made 2560AM O91 Radio License Max EIRP 60 0 dBm Radio License Tx Freq 24997 000 MHz Radio License Rix Frey 26005 000 MHz A Back Hext gt gt phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 6 51 Task 10 Configuring wireless interface Chapter 6 Con
101. the haceirmurn Mod Mode a Baam osz w None 2 AES 128 bit Rijndael Enabled Submit Updated System Configuration Figure 6 17 Configuration Reboot dialog The Configuration Changes Require a System Reboot The configuration changes you requested can only be activated via a system reboot Would you like to reboot the wireless unit now Alal Back phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 6 33 Task 7 Setting passwords Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Task 7 Setting passwords This task consists of the following procedures Changing password on page 6 34 Protecting access to the summary and status pages on page 6 35 Changing password Perform this task to introduce password protection or to change an existing password The administrator password is an optional feature that may be used to restrict access to the System Administration pages of the web interface PTP 800 units are shipped without pre set passwords To change the password proceed as follows 1 Select menu option Change Password The Change System Administrator Password page is displayed Figure 6 18 2 Enter the current and new passwords Table 6 7 3 Select Change Administration Password Figure 6 18 Change System Administrator Password page Change System Administration Password Change Administration Password Table 6 7 Change System Administrator Password attributes Attribute Meaning Current Pa
102. thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 128QAM 64QAM 0 76 0 82 No No 69 8 60 7 69 2 71 7 67 8 70 4 17 17 7 7 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 32QAM 0 87 Yes 49 9 78 3 73 9 72 7 22 16QAM 0 88 Yes 40 6 81 2 77 1 75 8 22 8 PSK 0 86 No 29 9 78 9 77 6 22 Wireless operation 8 PSK 0 80 114 6 76 5 75 2 ZZ QPSK 0 86 Yes 19 9 87 9 29 9 QPSK 0 80 Yes 76 3 83 5 20 9 4 77 Wireless operation Chapter 4 Reference information Table 4 100 18 GHz Brazil with 27 5 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 256QAM 128QAM 0 80 0 84 No Yes 167 148 71 4 61 8 68 1 59 8 66 9 15 17 7 7 64QAM 0 82 No 122 7 71 69 8 17 32QAM 0 85 No 99 1 73 8 72 5 22 16QAM 0 79 Yes 73 3 80 8 77 9 76 7 22 Table 4 101 18 GHz Brazil with 55 MHz channel separation Modulation 256 Fixed ref QAM 0 91 No 364 9 Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 58 6 56 7 15 256 QAM 0 80 No 343 6 58 6 56 7 15 128 QAM 0 82 No 300 4 65 63 8 17 64 QAM 0 82 No 252 6 67 9
103. type of connector is to be installed ensure that the correct crimp tool is used phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 5 39 5 40 Installing the IF and ground cables Preparing a cable end Chapter 5 Installation To prepare an IF cable to receive an N type connector proceed as follows 1 2 3 4 Comb braid straight with wire brush P z 7 E 3 y E mi Ser A ee eR Fl ia Fa a nal amp ee ee ee ee Check that the correct IF cable crimp tool and connectors are available Slide ferrule over braid ensure the chamfer is towards the braid phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing the IF and ground cables 5 Trim braid back to 9mm 0 354 inch 6 7 Chamfer the centre conductor at a angle of 45 Failure to correctly chamfer the centre conductor will cause damage to 8 Mark a line 22 mm from the end of the ferrule phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 5 41 Installing the IF and ground cables Chapter 5 Installation 9 Daub grease onto the braid uniformly 5 42 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing the IF and ground cables Crimping a connector To crimp an N type connector to an IF cable proceed as follows 1 Insert the cable into connector The cable centre conductor must be inserted into the inner contact fingers 2 Ensure that the cable is not inserted beyond the line marked in Step
104. while the ODU configuration is changing This status will normally exist for no more than a few seconds Muted ODU Fault There is a fault in the ODU Use the Home page to review the ODU alarms Muted Configuration Error The ODU is not compatible with the configured radio license Restart the Installation Wizard Muted Due to standby The CMU is the inactive unit of a 1 1 protected end Antenna alignment Repeat the Antenna Alignment procedure as described Step 6 Aligning antennas on page 6 61 Check the receive power from the RSSI connector of the ODU or from the Receive Power attribute in Step 6 Antenna Alignment If the receive power level is very small or cannot be measured continue at Check transmit and receive frequencies on page 8 11 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing the link If the receive power is close to the predicted power for the link then continue at Check link status on page 8 11 Check transmit and receive frequencies Check that the transmit frequency at the near end of the link is exactly equal to the receive frequency at the remote end of the link Check that the receive frequency at the near end of the link is exactly equal to the transmit frequency at the remote end of the link If this fails to resolve the problem continue at Check waveguide and antennas Check waveguide and antennas Check the antennas waveguides RMKs and coupler
105. will not necessarily lead to an increase in data capacity as capacity also depends on channel bandwidth and modulation mode For more information see Capacity transmit power and sensitivity on page 4 58 Available capacity upgrades are listed in Table 1 3 and Table 1 4 Select between a single step and one or more step by step upgrades as required phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 1 49 System management Chapter 1 Product description Table 1 3 Single step capacity upgrades Motorola part Capacity WB3538 20 Mbit s WB3539 30 Mbit s WB3540 40 Mbit s WB3541 90 Mbit s WB3542 100 Mbit s WB3543 150 Mbit s WB3544 200 Mbit s WB3545 300 Mbit s WB3546 Unlimited Table 1 4 Step by step capacity upgrades Motorola part Capacity increase WB3547 20 Mbit s 30 Mbit s WB3548 30 Mbit s 40 Mbit s WB3549 40 Mbit s 50 Mbit s WB3550 90 Mbit s 100 Mbit s WB3551 100 Mbit s 150 Mbit s WB3552 150 Mbit s 200 Mbit s WB3553 200 Mbit s 300 Mbit s WB3554 300 Mbit s Unlimited This flexible approach allows users to match link capacity to their developing demand and revenue stream Capacity upgrades are supplied as an access key The access key authorizes a specific capacity limit for one CMU Two access keys are needed to operate a link at enhanced capacity The upgrade is applied by entering an access key together with the MAC address of the target CMU into the PTP License Key Generator web page which may be accessed from
106. with 14 MHz channel Separation cece cece cence eeeseeeeeeeeeees 4 88 Table 4 122 38 GHz ETSI with 28 MHz channel Separation ccc eccccececeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 4 89 Table 4 123 38 GHz ETSI with 56 MHz channel Separation ccc ecc cece eeeeeeseeeeeeseeees 4 89 Table 4 124 Copper data port Specifications cccccccccececcececcceeeececeesesecenseceeeseeeuseseeeusenees 4 90 Table 4 125 Fiber data port Specie a OMS xc vcs niciavciavinsvciaceiendahacinevetentiatenlacedieesciapieeiacunveiuases 4 90 Table 4 126 Management port Specifications ccccccccccccecececececececececececececececececececeeeceeees 4 91 Table 4 127 Ethernet bridging Specifications cc ccc cccececececececececececececececeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 4 91 Table 4 128 Electrical safety specifications svc ssaactueseaenioraccucacexcesatusvevasaserescebvativantdeensastaeannes 4 92 Table 4 129 EMC immunity compliance specifications ssesseseesseseessesrereeseeseesoeseeseeseese 4 92 Table 4 130 PTP 800 minimum separation distances ETSI method cccccccceeeeeee seen 4 97 Table 4 131 PTP 800 minimum separation distances FCC method l ccesccssscssccssesseeeereeereees 4 99 Table 5 1 Tools required for PTP 800 installation ceseeesseesseesreeseessrsesseesseessreesreesseeeseeeses 5 7 Table 5 2 Expected cable loss when ODU is not connected csesecseesressresereesseesreerseeeseeeeee 5 69 Table 5 3 Selecting net
107. with the other site The name given to the site by the system administrator and set by the Installation wizard The time hh mm ss that has elapsed since the last system reboot The system can reboot for several reasons for example commanded reboot from the system reboot webpage or a power cycle of the equipment The CMU clock presented as local time allowing for zone and daylight saving Status attributes may be displayed in the System Summary page to indicate abnormal states 7 7 Web based management Chapter 7 Operation Viewing the system status To display the System Status page select menu option Status The System Status page Figure 7 5 gives the user a detailed view of the operation of the PTP 800 from both the wireless and network perspectives The contents of the System Status page depend upon the configuration of the PTP 800 For example for in band management of an unprotected unit no status information is shown for the unused Management Port For an unprotected link no 7 8 status information is shown relating to protection ANOTE Password protection can be extended to cover the System Status page For more information see Protecting access to the summary and status pages on page 6 35 Figure 7 5 System Status page unprotected link System Status Link Link Name ote Name Remote MAC Address Remote IF Address ODU ODU Status Transmitter Status ODU Type ODU Serial ODU Version
108. you free of any obligation to keep it confidential iv is independently developed by you or v is disclosed as required by law provided that you notify Motorola prior to such disclosure and provide Motorola with a reasonable opportunity to respond 3 4 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Motorola Solutions Inc end user license agreement Right to use Motorola s name Except as required in Conditions of use you will not during the term of this Agreement or thereafter use any trademark of Motorola or any word or symbol likely to be confused with any Motorola trademark either alone or in any combination with another word or words Transfer The Software and Documentation may not be transferred to another party without the express written consent of Motorola regardless of whether or not such transfer is accomplished by physical or electronic means Motorola s consent may be withheld at its discretion and may be conditioned upon transferee paying all applicable license fees and agreeing to be bound by this Agreement Updates During the first 12 months after purchase of a Product or during the term of any executed Maintenance and Support Agreement for the Product you are entitled to receive Updates An Update means any code in any form which is a bug fix patch error correction or minor enhancement but excludes any major feature added to the Software Updates are available fo
109. 0 0 90 0 dBm Vector Error 2 1 10 4 20 2 18 4 de Link Lass 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 dB Transmit Data Rate 00 0 0 00 O0 Mbps Receive Data Rate 00 0 0 0 0 O00 Mbps Aggregate Data Rate 00 0 0 00 O10 Mbps statistics Measurement Period 01 00 00 hh mm ss Reset System Statistics Attributes Data Port Counters Ethernet Data Tx Frames O 0 Ethernet Data Rx Frames O 0 Management Port Counters Ethernet Management Tx Frames 7180 509 Ethernet Management Rix Frames 71 773 015 3 154 Management Agent Counters Frames To Management Agent 266 679 653 Frames From Management Agent 7 213 540 Wireless Port Counters Wireless Data Tx Frames O 0 Wireless Data Rix Frames O 0 Wireless Management Tx Frames O 0 Wireless Management Rix Frames 0 0 Byte Error Ratio T Code Word Error Ratio 9 7 30g 1 Wireless Link Availability 0 0000 To Counter Measurement Period a Days 22 74 56 hh mm s Reset System Counters Attributes Elapsed Time Indicator a Days 22 74 56 hh mm s Statistics Page Refresh Period 3600 Seconds Submit Page Refresh Period phn 1478 O012v000 May 2011 7 41 Managing performance Chapter 7 Operation Table 7 13 System Statistics and Counters attributes Attribute System Statistics Transmit Power Receive Power Vector Error Link Loss Transmit Data Rate Receive Data Rate 7 42 Meaning The maximum mean minimum and latest measurements of Transmit Power The
110. 0 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Web based management Status page for protected links For a 1 1 protection scheme the IP addresses of the neighboring PTP 800 and the two remote PTP 800s are displayed on the System Status page Figure 7 6 If the IP address is shown then this is an active link to the GUI of the other PTP 800 and clicking it transfers access to the GUI of the other PTP 800 The full status of the protection is shown by the Protected Link screen Managing wireless link protection on page 7 28 Figure 7 6 System Status page protected link system Status atintes Vata atibutes Vatu ts i Wireless Lk Name E Wireless Link Status Toate aetna Ste Hame B Primary Masinnum Transmit Power 75 dBm Remota Primary P Address ieee Remote Mecdmum Transm Power dBm Remote Secondary P Address 17222913 Channel Separation 55 MHz Remas Prenary MAC Address O04 S6 S0008 25 Trent Power TS f5 4 T S 0i Remote Secondary MAC Address 00 04 56 30 0760 Receive Power 49 1 49 4 50 9 504 dom Protection Vector Error 4 00 341 343 lt 4 dB Protection State Active Link Loss 126 8 125 3 125 0 126 0 dB Primary Secondary hoc Primary Trent Link Capacity 64 92 Mbps Renae Prienary Secondary Mode Primary Recenve Link Capacty ab4 2 Mips Neightor P Address Lie 22342 Tren Capacity Lint Undid ect Meaghinor MAC Address 00 04 56 S0007 65 Transmit Capacity Lint Detail Running At Undmited Capacity Protection Switch Cause Ho Previous Protection seich
111. 0 units as defined above for unprotected links 4 Force a simultaneous protection switch at both ends of the wireless link as described in Forcing protection switches on page 7 31 Check that the link is operating correctly without encryption phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 7 35 Managing security Chapter 7 Operation Disable AES Encryption for both newly inactive PTP 800 units as defined in the above procedure for unprotected links Force a simultaneous protection switch at both ends of the wireless link as described in Forcing protection switches on page 7 31 Check that the link is operating correctly without encryption If a protection switch was forced at one end of the link Step 1 force a protection switch at the other end of the link so that the link is operated by the two primary units Re enable protection switching for all PTP 800 units as described in Enabling and disabling fault protection on page 7 33 Changing AES encryption keys Perform this task to update the encryption key used for data transmitted over the PTP 800 bridge For more information on AES encryption see Security on page 1 49 This procedure must be repeated at both ends of the link ANOTE If the AES encryption key is changed at one end of the link it must also be changed to the same value at the other end of the link otherwise the link will not work Unprotected link To change the AES encryption key for an unprotected link proceed as
112. 00 May 2011 4 47 Flexible waveguide specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Flexible waveguide specifications 15 GHz Motorola can supply the flexible waveguide listed in Table 4 49 for 15 GHz links Table 4 49 Flexible waveguide specifications 15 GHz Motorola part number Operating frequency range Length Attenuation VSWR Waveguide size RMK flange Antenna flange Maximum twist Minimum bend radius E plane Minimum bend radius H plane 98010076008 12 4 GHz to 18 0 GHz 900 mm 35 in 0 99 dB m 1 10 WR62 WG18 R140 PBR140 UBR140 445 m 52 mm 2 in 102 mm 4 in Flexible waveguide specifications 18 23 and 26 GHz 4 48 Motorola can supply the flexible waveguide listed in Table 4 50 for 18 23 and 26 GHz links Motorola part number Operating frequency range Length Attenuation VSWR Waveguide size RMK flange Antenna flange Maximum twist Minimum bend radius E plane Minimum bend radius H plane Table 4 50 Flexible waveguide specifications 18 23 and 26 GHz 98010076011 17 7 GHz to 26 5 GHz 900 mm 35 in 2 6 dB m 1 25 WR42 WG20 R220 PBR220 UBR220 510 m 38 mm 1 5 in 76 mm 3 0 in phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Flexible waveguide specifications Flexible waveguide specifications 38 GHz Motorola can supply the flexible waveguide listed in Table 4 51 for 38 GHz links Table 4 51 Flexib
113. 000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Rebooting the unit Rebooting the unit Rebooting or reviewing reboot reasons Perform this task either to reboot the CMU or to view a list of previous reboot reasons To reboot the CMU proceed as follows 1 From the left hand menu select Reboot The Reboot Wireless Unit page is displayed Figure 7 16 2 Select Reboot Wireless Unit The Reboot Confirmation dialog is displayed 3 Select OK The reboot progress message is displayed On completion the unit restarts A NOTE View the list of past reboot reasons in the Previous Reasons For Reset Reboot field This is as a drop down selection box where the latest reason for reboot is located at the top of the list Figure 7 16 Reboot Wireless Unit page Reboot Wireless Unit Use this page to reboot the wireless unit Previous Reasons For Reset Reboot f User Reboot Remote Mgmt Config 06 Oct 2009 11 24 11 Reboot Wireless Unit phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 7 49 Using recovery mode Chapter 7 Operation Using recovery mode This section describes how the CMU enters recovery mode and how to recover the CMU For a general description of the recovery mode see Recovery mode on page 1 48 A NOTE When the CMU is in recovery mode it cannot be recovered via a remote network connection It can only be recovered from a PC that is directly connected to the Management port using the default IP address 169
114. 01010210008 ODU 23GHz TR1200 Hi B6 22800 0 23200 0 MHz Rectangular WG Neg Pol 30010194001 SO Ohm Braided Coaxial Cable 75 meter 55010089011 1 HFP Antenna 21 20 23 60 GHz Single Pol Mot Interface 65010089013 2 5 HP Antenna 21 20 23 60 GHz Single Pol Mot Interface WES480 PTP800 Modem 1O00 100BaseT with Capacity COP 10 Mbps WBS545 PTPSO0 Modem Capacity CAP 300 Mbps per Unit WBS546 PTP8O00 Modem Capacity CAF Full Capacity per Unit WB3616 Coaxial Cable Installation 4ssembly Kit iio LPL Kitt WBS65 7 Lightning Prokection Kik f2 5PU Mounting kit Ph hi ee PI Po Ro e oe M Planning link protection Links can become unavailable because of failures of hardware or due to environmental factors affecting the radio propagation such as rain fade Link planning 2 is A protected link uses redundant hardware that is able to replace the function of failed units with a minimum of interruption to the service provided by the link It does not in general change the performance of the link due to environmental factors The two main advantages of a protected link are Better hardware availability because in the unlikely event of hardware failure the link becomes operational again almost immediately rather than after a possibly lengthy wait for a maintainer to repair or replace a failed unit This may be particularly important in remote locations or for safety critical applications Maintenance operations ca
115. 1 50 Table 4 1 Inventory for standard unprotected LiInNkKS 0 cecececececececececeeneneecnenenenenenenenens 4 2 Table 4 2 Inventory of the coaxial cable installation assembly kit WB3616 0 0 4 5 Table 4 3 Inventory for protected links ccssicnicearaandesaaniareaatiovede anomie ireeneuiakirenentatpeeemneaen 4 7 Table 4 4 Inventory for remote mounted ODUS 20 0 cece cccccececececececececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenenenenenens 4 9 Table 4 5 Inventory of other components seesseseeseeseesesseesessesseesessessessesoesoeseeseesoeseesseseeo 4 10 Table 4 6 CMU physical SpeciiiCatiOns ccsiwssscccsdsnedesavivoiave bcbcioeasdnietsavathvedeisianvedevsindnaseuseenoseds 4 13 Table 4 7 CMU environmental specificationS cesssesseessccescessecssecesscessecssereseeesseeseeesseeeseee 4 13 Table 4 8 CMU electrical speci cationsS ssisscressrrisstisseitundinid punkusnin ee 4 13 Table 4 9 ODU and CMU power consumption cscsccsssssessseeesecssecssreeseessserssrceseeeseeeseeeeseeeseee 4 14 Table 4 10 AC to DC converter Specifications ccccccecsccncececcsencscssaccccesecescsseceesesaaeeees 4 15 Table 4 11 ODU physical specifications piccpesiiseeicantisecerierinsseviawsaaarencoepncadiweeenoeiestaeaeess 4 16 Table 4 12 ODU environmental specifications cssseesseesseesecssressressecesseesseesseceseeesreesseesseee 4 16 Table 4 13 RSSI voltage received signal level and bandwidth ossssssessessessess
116. 1 Cable loss plot for a 100 meter cable with no ODU Cable Loss NO ODU 100M 0 M1 9 08 dB 350 00 MHz 5 10 m 15 O i S te 350 360 370 T 300 0 400 0 MH32 Resolution 517 CAL ON COAX CW ON Std Channel N A Date 11 11 2009 Time 03 43 56 Avg CableLoss 8 97 dB Model S311D Serial 00936036 Figure 5 12 Cable loss plot for a 100 meter cable with ODU connected Cable Loss ODU 100M i NAA i m z i neor LIU 300 310 320 330 350 360 380 390 400 ae flee 300 0 400 0 a Resolution 517 CAL ON COAX CW ON Std Channel N A Date 11 11 2009 Time 03 45 03 Avg CableLoss 17 89 dB Model S311D Serial 00936036 5 68 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Testing the installation Expected cable loss Table 5 2 quotes the expected cable loss for given cable lengths when the ODU is not connected All loss figures have a tolerance of plus or minus 10 for example 1 76 dB means that the loss is expected to be between 1 58 and 1 94 dB Table 5 2 Expected cable loss when ODU is not connected Cable Cable Loss Cable Loss 10 with two Length 10 Lightning Protection Units fitted meters at 350 MHz at 350 MHz dB dB 1 0 08 0 3 2 0 15 0 37 3 0 23 0 45 4 0 31 0 53 5 0 39 0 61 6 0 46 0 68 7 0 54 0 76 8 0 62 0 84 9 0 69 0 91 10 0 77 0 99 20 1 54 1 76 30 2 31 2 93 40 3 08 3 3 50 3 85 4 1 100 eal 7 92 phn 1478 012v000
117. 1 Hot Standby link protection Protection splitter The protection interface shares the CMU Management port with the management network connection Therefore if out of band management is required the protection and management interfaces must be connected via the out of band protection splitter Detection of link failure In the event of a protection switch the network equipment must learn the new active path To signal the need for this the currently active CMU disables all configured copper or fiber Ethernet ports for a period of between 0 5 and 1 second This causes the Ethernet switch to detect link failure and learn new routing for traffic via the newly active PTP 800 A NOTE Ensure that the Ethernet switch has the ability to recognize this signal and learn the new traffic routing Management connectivity Management connectivity uses the out of band management mode in which the management agent can be reached from the management port of the CMU The management port in the inactive CMU can be accessed for remote management either via the active PTP 800 and the Ethernet switch or via a separate management network Last hop A Last hop protected end is one that is at the edge of the network where access to the management network is not available A last hop arrangement can be provided in one of the following ways Connect the Management ports of neighboring CMUs using a crossed protection cable of maximum l
118. 10610029 B9 Lo 7414 7477 MHz 01010610030 B9 Hi 7575 7638 MHz 01010610031 B10 Lo 7449 7512 MHz 4 21 ODU specifications Motorola Part Number 01010610032 01010610033 01010610034 01010610035 01010610036 01010610037 01010610038 01010610039 01010610040 01010610041 01010610042 01010610043 01010610044 01010610062 01010610063 01010610064 01010610065 01010610066 01010610067 01010610045 01010610046 01010610047 01010610048 01010610049 01010610050 01010610051 01010610052 01010610053 01010610054 Standard ETSI ETSI Sub band B10 Hi B21 Lo B21 Hi B22 Lo B22 Hi B23 Lo B23 Hi B24 Lo B24 Hi B25 Lo B25 Hi B26 Lo B26 Hi B1 Lo B1 Hi B2 Lo B2 Hi B3 Lo B3 Hi B1 Lo B1 Hi B2 Lo B2 Hi B3 Lo B3 Hi B4 Lo B4 Hi B5 Lo B5 Hi Chapter 4 Reference information Sub band frequency 7610 7673 MHz 7484 7547 MHz 7645 7708 MHz 7919 7582 MHz 7680 7743 MHz 7939 7602 MHz 7700 7763 MHz 7974 7637 MHz 7735 7798 MHz 7609 7672 MHz 7770 7833 MHz 7644 7707 MHz 7805 7868 MHz 7443 7499 MHz 7611 7667 MHz 7485 7541 MHz 7653 7709 MHz 7927 7583 MHz 7695 7751 MHz 7093 7149 MHz 7289 7345 MHz 7121 7177 MHz 7317 7373 MHz 7149 7205 MHz 7345 7401 MHz 7177 7233 MHz 7373 7429 MHz 7205 7261 MHz 7401 7457 MHz phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Transmit and receive spacing 168 MHz 19
119. 152 4 115 8 77 1 Sensitivity dBm 63 7 65 6 68 3 71 3 77 7 83 5 ACM thresh out dBm 58 6 58 6 65 67 8 70 7 74 7 76 4 ACM thresh in dBm 56 6 56 6 63 7 66 6 69 4 73 5 75 2 Max tx power dBm 16 16 18 18 23 23 23 26 Min tx power dBm 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 4 72 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Wireless operation Capacity transmit power and sensitivity 18 GHz Table 4 90 18 GHz FCC and Canada with 10 MHz bandwidth Modulation 128QAM 64QAM 32QAM 16QAM 8PSK QPSK 0 83 0 82 0 87 0 88 0 86 0 86 Fixed ref Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Capacity 50 7 42 2 34 7 28 2 20 8 13 8 Mbit s Sensitivity 74 6 77 8 79 8 82 7 85 89 4 dBm ACM thresh 69 5 73 2 75 4 78 6 80 4 out dBm ACM thresh 68 71 9 74 1 77 3 79 1 in dBm Max tx 17 17 22 22 22 23 power dBm Min tx power 2 2 2 Z 2 2 dBm Table 4 91 18 GHz FCC and Canada with 20 MHz bandwidth Modulation 256QAM 128QAM 64QAM 32QAM 16QAM 8PSK QPSK 0 76 0 83 0 81 0 84 0 91 0 83 0 88 Fixed ref Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Capacity 113 7 102 2 84 9 67 8 58 5 40 3 28 5 Mbit s Sensitivity 70 4 72 5 75 9 78 3 80 6 83 6 87 6 dBm ACM thresh 61 8 68 7 72 1 74 8 77 3 79 8 out dBm ACM thresh 58 9 67 4 70 9 73 5 76 1 78 6 in dBm Max tx 15 17 17 22 22 22 23 power dBm Min tx power 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 dBm phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 4 73 Wireless operatio
120. 19m 17m 0 7m 0 7m with two LPUs the table result is 1 9 dB which is within the expected tolerance of 10 Figure 5 10 is a plot of cable loss taken after the ODU was connected Figure 5 9 Cable loss plot for a 17 meter cable with no ODU de I ca 30 Cable Loss Te GCU Lhe Ali 1 72d0B amp 350 00 MHz 300 310 220 330 340 350 360 a7 0 360 390 400 Fre queney 300 0 400 0 MHz Re so hton 517 CAL ORM CO AX 4 CW OW tel Charme 1 WA Date 11 11 2009 Tam 04 11 31 Aug Cable Loss 186 dB Iilodel 8 311D o erial Goo 56036 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Testing the installation Figure 5 10 Cable loss plot for a 17 meter cable with ODU connected Cable Loss ODU 17M aa Oo ok 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 Frequency 300 0 400 0 Hz Resolution 517 CAL ON COAX CW ON Std Channel N A Date 11 11 2009 Time 04 12 12 Avg CableLoss 12 89 dB Model S 311D Serial 00936036 Cable loss example using a 100 meter cable This is similar to the above example except that there is now 100m of cable between the two LPUs length y in Figure 5 8 It shows similar results Figure 5 11 is a plot of cable loss taken before the ODU was connected Figure 5 12 is a plot of cable loss taken after the ODU was connected phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 5 67 Testing the installation Chapter 5 Installation Figure 5 1
121. 2 PAUSE frames arriving at the Data Port Discard means that the bridge discards Layer 2 PAUSE frames arriving at the Data Port Pause frames are identified by the destination MAC Address being equal to 01 80 C2 00 00 01 6 17 Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Figure 6 8 Confirm LAN configuration Confirm LAN Configuration Please confirm that these changes are correct IP Interface IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Use VLAN For Management Interfaces Management hode Management Port Management Port Wireless Down Alert Management Port Auto Negotiation Management Port Auto Neg Advertisment Data Port Data Port Wireless Down Alert Data Port Copper Auto Negotiation Data Port Copper Auto Neg Advertisment Bridging Local Packet Filtering Management Committed Information Rate Data Port Pause Frames 10 10 10 50 255 255 0 0 10 10 0 0 No VLAN Tagging Out of Band Local Disabled Enabled I 400 Mbps Full Duplex I 10 Mbps Full Duplex Disabled Enabled IM 1000 Mbps Full Duplex I 400 Mbps Full Duplex Enabled 2000 Discard A Back Reconnecting to the management PC If the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway IP Address of the unit have been updated to meet network requirements then reconfigure the local management PC to use an IP address that is valid for the network Refer to Configuring the management PC on page 6 2 Wh
122. 2 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Ethernet bridging Protocol layers Protocol layers involved in bridging between Ethernet and wireless interfaces are shown in Figure 1 28 Protocol layers involved in bridging between external interfaces and the management agent are shown in Figure 1 29 In these figures the layers have the meanings defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2005 Figure 1 28 Protocol layers between Ethernet and wireless interfaces Management Data Ports Wireless Port MAC Relay Entity Media Access Method Independent Functions Media Access Method Dependent Convergence Functions PTP Medium Access Method PTP Security Media Access Method IEEE 802 3 Optional Specific Functions PTP Physical Layer Figure 1 29 Protocol layers between external interfaces and the management agent Management Agent HTTP SNMP SMTP TCP IP Management Wireless Data Ports MAC Relay Entity Media Access Method Specific Functions phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 1 43 System management Chapter 1 Product description System management This section is an overview of how the PTP 800 system is managed Management agent PTP 800 equipment is managed through an embedded management agent Management workstations network management systems or PCs can be connected to this agent using an in band mode or a choice of two out of band modes These modes are described in deta
123. 209013 01010209014 Standard ETSI FCC Brazil phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Sub band B1 Lo B1 Hi B2 Lo B2 Hi B3 Lo B3 Hi B4 Lo B4 Hi B3 Lo B3 Hi Sub band frequency 17685 17985 MHz 18695 18995 MHz 17930 18230 MHz 18940 19240 MHz 18180 18480 MHz 19190 19490 MHz 18400 18700 MHz 19410 19710 MHz 17700 18140 MHz 19260 19700 MHz Transmit and receive Spacing 1010 MHz and 1008 MHz 1560 MHz 4 27 ODU specifications Chapter 4 Reference information ODU specifications 23 GHz Motorola can supply the ODUs listed in Table 4 22 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the 23 GHz band frequency range 21 20 23 60 GHz Table 4 22 ODU specifications main frequency 23 GHz phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Motorola Standard Sub Sub band Transmit Part band frequency and Number receive Spacing 01010210001 ETSI B1 Lo 21994 22330 MHz 1008 01010210002 B1 Hi 23002 23338 MHz ee 01010210003 B2 Lo 22274 22610 MHz 01010210004 B2 Hi 23282 23618 MHz 01010210005 FCC B5 Lo 21200 21600 MHz 1200 01010210006 B5 Hi 22400 22800 MHz MHz 01010210007 B6 Lo 21600 22000 MHz 01010210008 B6 Hi 22800 23200 MHz 01010210009 B7 Lo 22000 22400 MHz 01010210010 B7 Hi 23200 23600 MHz 01010210011 ETSI B1 Lo 21200 21500 MHz 1232 01010210012 B1 Hi 22432 22732 MHz eee 01010210013 B2 Lo 21472 21786 MHz 01010210014 B2 Hi 22704 23018 MHz 01010210015 B3 Lo 21779 22093 MHz 01010210016 B3 H
124. 478_012v000 May 2011 m List of Tables Table 4 27 Antenna specifications for 6 GHz dual polarization ccc ccc ecececececeeeeeneeees 4 32 Table 4 28 Antenna specifications for 7 GHz and 8 GHz single polarization 4 33 Table 4 29 Antenna specifications for 7 GHz and 8 GHz dual polarization 4 33 Table 4 30 Antenna specifications for 11 GHz single polarization cece ec ee ee eeeees 4 34 Table 4 31 Antenna specifications for 11 GHz dual polarization ccc cece ee ee eee ees 4 34 Table 4 32 Antenna specifications for 13 GHz single polarization cece cec ec eeeeeeeees 4 35 Table 4 33 Antenna specifications for 13 GHz dual polarization cece cece cece sence ees 4 35 Table 4 34 Antenna specifications for 15 GHz single polarization c cece ec ec sence ee eees 4 36 Table 4 35 Antenna specifications for 15 GHz dual polarization cece cece ee ee eee ees 4 36 Table 4 36 Antenna specifications for 18 GHz single polarization ccccce ec ec sence ee eees 4 37 Table 4 37 Antenna specifications for 18 GHz dual polarization c cece cece ee ee eee ees 4 37 Table 4 38 Antenna specifications for 23 GHz single polarization cccecececeeeeneeeeeees 4 38 Table 4 39 Antenna specifications for 23 GHz dual polarization ccc c
125. 58 Adaptive coding and modulation PTP 800 supports both Fixed Modulation and Adaptive Coding and Modulation ACM modes In ACM mode the PTP 800 selects the modulation mode according to the quality of the received signal The selection criterion is to provide the highest link capacity that can be achieved while keeping the communication error free When compared with Fixed Modulation operation ACM can increase either link availability or average wireless link capacity or both Wireless link capacity The maximum data throughput capacity of the PTP 800 wireless link is the lower of the wireless link capacity and the data capacity limit set by the PTP 800 license key All PTP 800 CMUs are shipped with a factory set 10 Mbit s capacity limit meaning that capacity is restricted to a maximum of 10 Mbit s at the data port Users can purchase capacity upgrades in nine steps between 20 Mbit s and unlimited capacity For more information see Capacity upgrades on page 1 49 A NOTE Purchasing a capacity upgrade will not necessarily lead to an increase in data capacity as capacity also depends on channel bandwidth and modulation mode For more information see Capacity transmit power and sensitivity on page 4 58 Automatic transmitter power control PTP 800 provides closed loop automatic transmitter power control ATPC ATPC avoids overload of the receivers in links with low link loss by automatically adjusting transmitter power The ATP
126. 59 Table 4 66 Lower 6 GHz ETSI with 29 65 MHz channel separation ccccce cece ec ec eee eee ees 4 60 Table 4 67 Upper 6 GHz ETSI with 7 MHz channel separation c ccc cece sence cececeeeeeees 4 60 Table 4 68 Upper 6 GHz ETSI with 14 MHz channel separation ccc ecececeeeeeeeeen 4 61 Table 4 69 Upper 6 GHz ETSI with 30 MHz channel Sseparation ccc eee eee eeeeneeen 4 61 Table 4 70 Upper 6 GHz ETSI with 40 MHz channel separation ccc ececececeeeeeneeen 4 62 Table 4 71 Upper 6 GHz ETSI with 60 MHz channel separation cece cece ec eeeeeeeeen 4 62 Table 4 72 7 GHz ETSI with 7 MHz channel Separation cc cece cscs ececeecececeeeececesceseeeeees 4 63 Table 4 73 7 GHz ETSI with 14 MHz channel Separation ccc cece cc ecececeesececeeseseeeuees 4 63 Table 4 74 7 GHz ETSI with 28 MHz channel Separation cc ccc ccc cece ec ececeecececeeseseeeuees 4 64 Table 4 75 8 GHz ETSI with 7 MHz channel Separation cc ccc cc cc ec eee ceeceeeeeseeeeceeseseeeeees 4 64 Table 4 76 8 GHz ETSI with 14 MHz channel separation ce cececececcceeensecececeseeenes 4 65 Table 4 77 8 GHz ETSI with 28 MHz channel Separation ccc cece ece ce eceeeeeeseeeeceseeeeeuees 4 65 Table 4 78 8 GHz ETSI with 29 65 MHz channel Separation cc cece cc ec eceeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeees 4 66 Table 4 79 11 GHz FCC and Canada with 10 MHz bandwidth
127. 5h 19 Vector Error 6 0 Trace Selection blax hean Page Refresh Period 3600 Seconds Plot Selected Diagnostic 7 46 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Managing performance Downloading diagnostic data Perform this task to download snapshots of the system diagnostics to a CSV file The CSV file contains at most 5784 entries recorded over a 32 day period 3600 entries recorded in the last hour 1440 entries recorded in the previous 24 hours 744 entries recorded in the previous 31 days The following statistics can be downloaded refer to Table 7 13 for definitions Vector Error Rx Power Tx Power Link Loss Rx Data Rate Tx Data Rate Aggregate Data Rate Protection State Remote Primary Secondary Mode To download diagnostics data proceed as follows 1 Select menu option CSV Download The Generate Downloadable Diagnostics page is displayed Figure 7 15 Use the Diagnostics Selector drop down list to select a diagnostic type to download Select Generate Diagnostics The Generate Downloadable Diagnostics page is redisplayed with the name of the generated CSV file Click on the CSV file name and select Save File Save the CSV file to the hard drive of the local computer Open the CSV file in MS Excel and use it to generate statistical reports and diagrams Figure 7 15 Generate Downloadable Diagnostics page Generate Downloadable Diagnostics Attribu
128. 6 Configuration and alignment for each CMU from Task 1 Connecting to the unit on page 6 2 to Task 10 Configuring wireless interface on page 6 47 These tasks may be performed after installation if preferred When performing Task 9 Configuring protection interface on page 6 42 select the option to configure a protected link Check that it is safe to proceed and that all equipment and tools are ready by performing Preparing for installation on page 5 6 Install the ODUs and antennas by performing one or other of the following tasks If antenna redundancy is required perform Installing antenna with a single ODU on page 5 9 for each antenna and ODU pair If antenna redundancy is not required perform Installing antenna with two ODUs and a coupler on page 5 24 Perform Installing the IF and ground cables on page 5 37 for each ODU Fach ODU requires its own IF cable ground cables and LPUs Test the installation by performing Testing the installation on page 5 63 At each link end test both ODU and CMU pairs Install and ground the CMUs by performing Installing the CMU on page 5 73 for each CMU Prepare the cables to connect the CMUs to the Ethernet switch by performing Preparing the network connections protected on page 5 84 Do not complete these connections until antenna alignment is complete Align the antennas and complete the configuration by performing the following tasks from Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment
129. 6 MHz PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide ODU specifications Motorola Standard Sub Sub band Transmit Part band frequency and Number receive Spacing 01010610055 ETSI B1 Lo 7400 7484 MHz 245 MHz 01010610056 B1 Hi 7645 7729 MHz 01010610057 B2 Lo 7484 7568 MHz 01010610058 B2 Hi 7729 7813 MHz 01010610059 B3 Lo 7568 7652 MHz 01010610060 B3 Hi 7813 7897 MHz ODU specifications 8 GHz Motorola can supply the ODUs listed in Table 4 17 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the 8 GHz band frequency range 7 725 8 500 GHz Table 4 17 ODU specifications main frequency 8 GHz phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Motorola Standard Sub Sub band Transmit Part band frequency and Number receive Spacing 01010611001 ETSI B1 Lo 8279 8307 MHz 119 MHz 01010611002 B1 Hi 8398 8426 MHz and a 126 MHz 01010611003 B2 Lo 8293 8321 MHz 01010611004 B2 Hi 8412 8440 MHz 01010611005 B3 Lo 8307 8335 MHz 01010611006 B3 Hi 8426 8454 MHz 01010611007 B4 Lo 8321 8349 MHz 01010611008 B4 Hi 8440 8468 MHz 01010611009 B5 Lo 8335 8363 MHz 01010611010 B5 Hi 8454 8482 MHz 01010611011 B6 Lo 8349 8377 MHz 01010611012 B6 Hi 8468 8496 MHz 01010611019 ETSI B1 Lo 8043 8113 MHz 208 MHz 01010611020 B1 Hi 8251 8321 MHz 01010611021 B2 Lo 8099 8169 MHz 4 23 ODU specifications ODU specifications 11 GHz Chapter 4 Reference information Motorola Standard Sub Sub band Transmit Part band fre
130. 7 Remote Maximum Transmit Power Remote IP Address 10101051 Channel Bandwidth OGU Transmit Power TSt 150 T50 JDU Status Receive Power 49 0 49 0 49 0 Transmitter Status Wector Error 35 9 36 3 36 5 ODU Type 2aGHz TR1008 Hi 23002 23338MH2 Link Loss 124 4 134 4 134 4 OBU Serial R35094182 Transmit Link Capacity 236 ODU Version Bank 1 105200509 Recene Link Capacity 236 Modem Tranamit Capacity Limit Unlimited MAC Address 00 04 56 3000 bf Tranzmit Capacity Limit Detail Running At Unlimited Capacity Software Version PT PB00 B266 wodog Transmit Modulation hlode ZSA M 0 20 Hardware Version 05 00 Receive Modulation hlode 2560 4 0 80 Elapsed Time Indicator 00 31 03 Tranemit Modulation Selection Det Acquiring Link Ethernet Data Port Link Status Data Port Speed And Duplex 1000 Mbps Full Duplex Management Pert Link Status Management Port Speed And Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex Automatic page refresh period in seconds fec Seconds Update Page Refresh Period Reset form Saving the system configuration Before performing a software upgrade save the current system configuration In the unlikely event that a unit has to be replaced in the field the replacement unit can be reconfigured by restoring the saved configuration file as described in Restoring the configuration file on page 7 57 To save the current configuration before upgrading to a new software version proceed as follows Procedure 6 2 Save configuration fi
131. 70 2 68 9 22 16 QAM 0 79 Yes 152 4 77 2 74 2 73 22 Capacity transmit power and sensitivity 26 GHz Table 4 111 26 GHz FCC with 10 MHz bandwidth Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 128QAM 0 83 Yes 90 8 74 8 70 3 68 9 17 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 64QAM 0 83 Yes 42 8 77 8 73 5 72 3 17 32QAM 0 84 Yes 33 6 80 4 76 4 75 1 22 16QAM 0 91 Yes 29 1 82 9 79 1 77 9 22 SPSK 0 85 Yes 20 4 85 5 81 2 80 22 Wireless operation SPSK QPSK 0 80 0 80 No Yes 115 8 77 1 83 75 9 74 7 22 25 7 7 QPSK 0 86 Yes 13 8 90 4 23 2 4 83 Wireless operation Table 4 112 26 GHz FCC with 20 MHz bandwidth Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 256QAM 0 76 Yes 113 7 69 9 61 3 08 4 15 128QAM 0 83 Yes 102 2 72 68 2 66 9 17 64QAM 0 81 Yes 84 9 75 4 71 6 70 4 17 32QAM 0 84 Yes 67 8 77 8 74 3 73 22 Table 4 113 26 GHz FCC with 40 MHz bandwidth Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm
132. 8 Yes 181 9 72 3 68 9 67 6 21 11 32QAM 0 92 No 150 7 71 2 70 26 11 16QAM 0 79 No 103 8 76 4 75 2 26 11 8 PSK 0 80 78 9 78 1 76 8 26 11 QPSK 0 80 52 9 28 11 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Capacity transmit power and sensitivity 13 GHz Table 4 83 13 GHz ETSI with 7 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 128QAM 0 76 Yes 34 4 76 9 72 2 70 8 18 64QAM 0 82 Yes 30 79 3 74 7 73 4 18 32QAM 0 87 No 24 6 76 9 75 7 23 16QAM 0 88 Yes 20 84 2 80 1 78 8 23 8PSK 0 86 No 14 7 81 9 80 6 23 Table 4 84 13 GHz ETSI with 14 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 128QAM 0 76 Yes 71 73 9 69 1 67 7 18 64QAM 0 82 Yes 61 8 76 2 71 6 70 3 18 32QAM 0 87 Yes 50 7 78 2 73 9 72 6 23 16QAM 0 88 Yes 41 3 81 1 77 75 8 23 8 PSK 0 86 No 30 4 78 8 77 5 Zo Wireless operation QPSK 0 88 Ye
133. 8 0 cm 7 1 in Height 3 5 cm 1 4 in Depth 22 0 cm 8 7 in Weight 1 1 kg 2 4 lbs CMU environmental The PTP 800 CMU conforms to the environmental specifications listed in Table 4 7 Table 4 7 CMU environmental specifications Category Specification Temperature 33 C 27 F to 55 C 131 F Humidity 95 non condensing Waterproof IP20 UV Exposure 10 year operational life UL746C test evidence CMU electrical The PTP 800 CMU conforms to the electrical specifications listed in Table 4 8 Table 4 8 CMU electrical specifications Category Specification Input voltage 40 5 V to 60 V Input voltage withstand 0 V to 72 V CMU dissipation 21 W phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 4 13 CMU specifications Power consumption ODU in ODU in Band GHz Mute W Transmit 1 W 2 6 29 46 7 29 46 8 29 46 11 23 46 13 10 35 15 10 35 18 7 35 23 14 35 26 14 35 28 13 35 32 19 35 38 21 35 Chapter 4 Reference information The CMU and ODU power consumption figures are specified in Table 4 9 Table 4 9 ODU and CMU power consumption CMU W 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 1 0 1 1 Configuration Configuration W W 66 115 66 115 66 115 66 109 55 85 55 85 55 82 55 89 55 89 55 88 55 94 55 96 1 Typical ODU DC power consumption in Mute condition W 2 Typical ODU DC power consumption in Transmit condition W phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet M
134. 8 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 4 Installing license keys Generating a new license key To generate a new license key to activate new licensed capabilities for example activate AES encryption or increase transmit capacity proceed as follows 1 Purchase the required new capabilities from the Motorola authorized Point To Point dealer who supplied the link The dealer will supply one or more access keys Go to the PTP web support page at http www motorola com ptp support and select Key Generator The PTP License Key Generator form should be displayed Enter the required details including the access keys supplied by the dealer Submit the web form The PTP License Key Generator will respond with the new license key Entering a new license key To upgrade the unit to a new license key proceed as follows 1 Select menu option System License Key The Software License Key page is displayed Figure 6 10 Enter the new License Key Select Validate license key If the license key is valid a confirmation message is displayed Select OK to confirm The new license key is installed in the unit phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 6 23 Task 5 Upgrading software version Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Task 5 Upgrading software version This task consists of the following procedures Checking the installed software version on page 6 24 Saving the system configuration
135. AM 64QAM 32QAM 16QAM 8PSK QPSK 0 83 0 82 0 82 0 87 0 91 0 84 0 80 Fixed ref Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Capacity 301 7 258 6 217 4 178 6 150 5 103 7 65 7 Mbit s Sensitivity 65 8 69 72 74 3 76 3 79 6 84 2 dBm ACM thresh 58 5 65 6 68 5 71 73 3 76 1 out dBm ACM thresh 56 3 64 3 67 2 69 8 72 74 8 in dBm Max tx 15 17 17 22 22 22 23 power dBm Min tx power 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 dBm Table 4 95 18 GHz ETSI with 7 MHz channel separation Modulation 128QAM 64QAM 32QAM 16QAM 8 PSK QPSK 0 76 0 82 0 87 0 88 0 86 0 88 Fixed ref Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Capacity 34 4 30 24 6 20 14 7 10 Mbit s Sensitivity 76 9 79 3 84 2 90 9 dBm ACM thresh 72 2 74 7 76 9 80 1 81 9 out dBm ACM thresh 70 8 73 4 75 7 78 8 80 6 in dBm Max tx 17 17 22 22 22 20 5 power dBm Min tx power 7 7 7 7 7 7 dBm phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 4 75 Wireless operation Table 4 96 18 GHz ETSI with 13 75 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm Table 4 Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 128QAM 0 76 Yes 69 8 74 69 2 67 8 17 64QAM 0 82 Yes 60 7 76 3 71 7 70 4 17 32QAM 0 87 Yes 49 9 78 3 73 9 72 7
136. Antenna and antenna accessories ODU coupler mounting kit A coupler mounting kit Figure 1 11 allows two ODUs to share the same antenna It is required in the following configurations To support two parallel and simultaneously transmitting links each operating on a different frequency pair To support a 1 1 Hot Standby protected interface with only one ODU transmitting Couplers will increase system loss The coupler mounting kit provides an interface that is mechanically identical to that of a single ODU It can therefore be used with either a direct mounted antenna Figure 1 12 or a remote antenna via a remote mount kit The choice of coupler mounting kit depends on the frequency variant and on the coupler type required symmetric or asymmetric In protected links asymmetric couplers allow the primary link to operate with optimum link budget with the redundant link operating with reduced margin Refer to ODU coupler mounting specifications on page 4 50 Figure 1 11 ODU coupler mounting kit phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 1 17 Antenna and antenna accessories Chapter 1 Product description Figure 1 12 Two ODUs and antenna mounted on a coupler 1 18 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Cabling and lightning protection Cabling and lightning protection The cabling and lightning protection components of a PTP 800 installation are Coaxial cable IF cable Indoor Ca
137. B External Ground Bar EGB To network Network equipment Equipment rack Ground ring Lightning Protection Unit LPU phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Grounding and lightning protection Chapter 2 Planning considerations Figure 2 6 Grounding and lightning protection on mast or tower protected end LLAIN PITT Two ODUs and one antenna lt z ES connected via coupler iv Network cable O B lt q Lightning Protection Units LPUs Qa O PTP 800 ground cable Pa g Tower building ground system Y Y First point of contact with tower A e DO lt _ Mid point of tower 4 Ground bus conductor Rack Ground Bar RGB Bottom of tower Tower Ground Bar TGB External Ground Bar EGB To network Ethernet switch Equipment rack Lightning Protection Units LPUs Ground ring Protection requirements for the ODU on a high rise building If the antenna or ODU is to be mounted on a high rise building it is likely that cable entry is at roof level Figure 2 7 and equipment room several floors below Figure 2 8 In addition to the general protection requirements above the following requirements must be observed The antenna and ODU must be below the lightning terminals and finials A grounding conductor must be installed around the roof perimeter to form the main roof perimeter lightning protection ring
138. C threshold is 40 dBm received power ATPC has no effect in links where the received power is lower than the threshold Automatic adjustment of the transmitter can be enabled or disabled using the Automatic Transmitter Power Control attribute on the Configuration page of the web based interface This attribute must have the same setting at both ends of the link phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Wireless operation In some regions ATPC is a regulatory requirement and in these cases ATPC cannot be disabled The power control loop compensates for slow variations in received power and does not respond to fast fading that occurs in multipath channels In addition to its main function ATPC includes a mechanism protecting against a lock up scenario The mechanism is active regardless of the received power This lock up occurs when the configured maximum transmit power causes the received power at both ends of the link to be too high to allow correct signal demodulation In this situation no communication can be established in either direction causing the radios to wait forever for the remote end to appear The protection mechanism works as follows Upon the link dropping for more than 10 seconds ATPC drops the maximum transmit power of the end which has the lowest transmit frequency by 15 dB This ensures the link will come up even if the maximum transmit power is set incorrectly The delay prevents thi
139. Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Task 9 Configuring protection interface If the PTP 800 link is to be unprotected perform Configuring unprotected links on page 6 42 If the PTP 800 link is to be protected using the 1 1 Hot Standby feature perform Configuring protected links on page 6 43 Configuring unprotected links To ensure that protection is disabled select menu option Configuration Protection When the Protection Configuration page is displayed Figure 6 22 confirm that the Protection attribute is set to Disabled Figure 6 22 Protection Configuration page protection disabled Protection Configuration Do not enable the transmitter unless tt is safe for the ODU to radiate aitributes Value nits Transmitter Muted Enable Transmitter Attributes Protection Disabled Protection 1 1 Submit Protection Configuration The Status page Figure 6 23 shows details of the PTP 800 at the other end of the link with no protection information Figure 6 23 Status page with protection disabled extract system Status Attributes vaie CC Link Link Mame Clayton to Tavistock Site Mame Clayton Remote WAC Address 00 04 56 30 00 d4 Remote IP Address 169 254 12 6 42 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 9 Configuring protection interface Configuring protected links Configure the CMUs as two pairs of protected units prior to site installation Each
140. Check the physical link protection cable is connected as described in Preparing the network connections protected on page 5 84 Force a Protection Switchover Consider manually initiating a protection switchover as described in Forcing protection switches on page 7 31 provided the link planning indicates that the units have the capability of operating a link of satisfactory quality This particularly applies where asymmetric couplers have been used or a secondary antenna of lower power Check the configuration of the active and inactive units Check that the active and inactive units have a compatible configuration They must be configured to have The same link parameters The same radio licence parameters The same radio parameters The same encryption parameters The same management and protection options The same data connectivity parameters They must be configured to have Different IP addresses Different primary secondary attributes phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 8 13 Testing protection switchover Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 8 14 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 Glossary Glossary Term Definition ACM Adaptive Coding and Modulation AES Advanced Encryption Standard ATPC Automatic Transmitter Power Control CEPT European Conference of Postal and Telecommunications Administrations CIR Committed Information Rate CMU Compact Modem Unit EAPS Ethernet Automatic Protection Switching EIRP
141. Data port fiber status Data port configuration mismatch SNTP sync Management port disabled warning ODU status Management port configuration mismatch Wireless link status Protection interface status Byte error ratio status Code word error ratio status Wireless receive status Licensed transmit capacity phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 1 45 System management Chapter 1 Product description Wireless receive mismatch Data port Ethernet speed mismatch Management port Ethernet speed mismatch SNMP notifications are described in Managing alarms and events on page 7 13 Email alerts 1 46 The management agent can be configured to generate alerts by electronic mail when any of the following events occur Wireless link up Wireless link down Data port up Data port down Management port up Management port down Link name mismatch Alignment mode Unit out of calibration Encryption enabled mismatch Data port disabled warning Data port fiber status Data port configuration mismatch SNTP sync Management port disabled warning ODU status Management port configuration mismatch Wireless link status Protection interface status Byte error ratio status Code word error ratio status Email alerts are described in Managing alarms and events on page 7 13 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide System management S
142. FOR CNT 400 CABLE Motorola part number 01010589001 If a fiber interface between the CMU and Ethernet switch is required then two SFP modules are needed Either SFP SX Gig E Optical Pluggable Module 850 nm Motorola part number 01010430001 Or SFP LX Gig E Optical Pluggable Module 1310 nm Motorola part number 01010431001 If a fiber interface between the CMU and Ethernet switch is required then fiber cable and connectors are needed Purchase separately Installation inventories Item ODU coupler mounting kit Parabolic radome for antenna Chapter 4 Reference information Motorola description part number and notes A coupler may be required in unprotected links to support two parallel and simultaneously transmitting links each operating on a different frequency pair For part numbers refer to ODU coupler mounting specifications on page 4 50 10 Foot Radome For Par10 Antenna Motorola part number 85009295001 11 Foot Radome For Par12 Antenna Motorola part number 85009295002 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide CMU specifications CMU specifications This section contains specifications of the PTP 800 compact modem unit CMU and its power supply CMU dimensions and weight The PTP 800 CMU conforms to the physical specifications listed in Table 4 6 Table 4 6 CMU physical specifications Category Specification Dimensions Width 1
143. Hz 01010208012 B3 Hi 11455 11665 MHz 01010208013 B4 Lo 11035 11215 MHz 01010208014 B4 Hi 11565 11745 MHz ODU specifications 13 GHz Motorola can supply the ODUs listed in Table 4 19 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the 13 GHz band frequency range 12 75 13 25 GHz Table 4 19 ODU specifications main frequency 13 GHz phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Motorola Standard Sub Sub band Transmit Part band frequency and Number receive Spacing 01010583001 ETSI B1 Lo 12751 12814 MHz 266 MHz 01010583002 B1 Hi 13017 13080 MHz 01010583003 B2 Lo 12807 12870 MHz 01010583004 B2 Hi 13073 13136 MHz 01010583005 B3 Lo 12863 12926 MHz 01010583006 B3 Hi 13129 13192 MHz 01010583007 B4 Lo 12919 12982 MHz 01010583008 B4 Hi 13185 13248 MHz 4 25 ODU specifications Chapter 4 Reference information ODU specifications 15 GHz Motorola can supply the ODUs listed in Table 4 20 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the 15 GHz band frequency range 14 4 15 35 GHz Table 4 20 ODU specifications main frequency 15 GHz phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Motorola Standard Sub Sub band Transmit Part band frequency and Number receive Spacing 01010584001 ETSI B4 Lo 14501 14613 MHz 420 MHz 01010584002 B4 Hi 14921 15033 MHz 01010584003 B5 Lo 14606 14725 MHz 01010584004 B5 Hi 15026 15145 MHz 01010584005 B6 Lo 14718 14837 MHz 01010584006 B6 Hi 15138 15257 MHz 01010584007 B7 Lo 14816 14928 MHz 01010584008
144. I voltage __ Azimuth sweep gt Correct elevation angle may be in a voltage trough AE 180 Correct elevation and azimuth maximum RSSI voltage 6 64 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 11 Aligning antennas Aligning the other end Repeat the above procedure at the other end of the link Record the RSSI voltage at both ends of the link If the voltage at either end of the link is not in the range predicted by the planning report repeat alignment until this is the case Post alignment actions A NOTE In a protected link the tolerances in the ODUs may result in the Receive Power delta between the primary and secondary units at same end of the link being different from the delta predicted by the network designer Configurations using a single antenna may have up to 5 dB additional delta when compared with the design value Where separate antennas are used the tolerances may increase if either path incurs any Excess Path Loss When alignment is complete at both ends proceed as follows 1 At each end of the link in turn lock off and tighten all the adjustment bolts as per the instructions provided with the antenna and check that the RSSI voltage does not change If it does change repeat alignment for the affected end Check that the following requirements are met a RSSI voltage at both ends is within the range predicted by the planning rep
145. ICMP Echo Request packets to the CMU management agent using the Ping program at the command line interface of the management PC or workstation If the CMU responds then the command line will appear similar to this C ping 169 254 1 1 Pinging 169 254 1 1 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 169 254 1 1 bytes 32 time lms TTL 64 Reply from 169 254 1 1 bytes 32 time lt ilms TTL 64 Reply from 169 254 1 1 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 64 Reply from 169 254 1 1 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 64 Ping statistics for 169 254 1 1 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 0 loss Approximate round trip times in mIli seconds Minimum Oms Maximum 1 ms Average Oms If the CMU fails to respond then the command line will appear similar to this C ping 169 254 1 1 Pinging 169 254 1 1 with 32 bytes of data Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Ping statistics for 169 254 1 1 Packets Sent 4 Received 0 Lost 4 100 loss phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 8 7 Connecting to the web management interface Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Check the Ping response and take action as described in Table 8 7 Table 8 7 Ping response checks Ping response Reply Request timed out Likely cause and action The IP network is providing connectivity between the PC and CMU Continue at Check browser settings on page 8 8 There is no IP connectivity Check network configuration including IP addresses ga
146. In the EU Motorola in conjunction with a recycling partner ensures that equipment is collected and recycled according to the requirements of EU environmental law Disposal of surplus packaging Do not dispose of surplus packaging in landfill sites In the EU it is the individual recipient s responsibility to ensure that packaging materials are collected and recycled according to the requirements of EU environmental law In non EU countries In non EU countries dispose of Motorola equipment and all surplus packaging in accordance with national and regional regulations phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 9 Licensing requirements Licensing requirements Operating license This equipment operates in bands that require a license in most countries In most countries it is illegal to operate the PTP 800 without a license from the regional or local regulating authority United States of America This device has been verified by Motorola as being in compliance with the requirements of the rules of the Federal Communications Commission FCC 47 C F R Part 101 and may not be operated without a station license In the United States such licenses are issued by the FCC to entities other than agencies of the United States government Federal government agencies are licensed by the National Telecommunications and Information Administration NTIA acting upon the recommendation of the Interdepartment Radio Advisory Committee IRAC Motorola
147. MK flange PDR70 PDR70 Antenna flange CPR137G UDR70 Maximum twist 214 m 214 m Minimum bend radius E plane 102 mm 4 0 in 102 mm 4 0 in Minimum bend radius H plane 204 mm 8 0 in 204 mm 8 0 in phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Flexible waveguide specifications Flexible waveguide specifications 7 GHz and 8 GHz Motorola can supply the flexible waveguide listed in Table 4 47 for 7 GHz links Table 4 47 Flexible waveguide specifications 7 GHz Motorola part number 58010076019 7 1 GHz to 10 0 GHz Operating frequency range Length 900 mm 35 in 0 4 dB m Attenuation VSWR 1 10 WR112 WG15 R84 Waveguide size RMK flange PBR84 UDR84 Antenna flange Maximum twist 264 m 76 mm 3 0 in Minimum bend radius E plane 152 mm 6 0 in Minimum bend radius H plane Flexible waveguide specifications 11 and 13 GHz Motorola can supply the flexible waveguide listed in Table 4 48 for 11 GHz and 13 GHz links Table 4 48 Flexible waveguide specifications 11 GHz Motorola part number 98010076005 10 0 GHz to 15 0 GHz Operating frequency range Length 900 mm 35 in 0 6 dB m Attenuation VSWR Waveguide size 1 10 WR75 WG17 R120 RMK flange PBR120 UBR120 Antenna flange Maximum twist 360 m 64 mm 2 5 in Minimum bend radius E plane 115 mm 4 5 in Minimum bend radius H plane phn 1478_012v0
148. Management Port Status attribute values Value Meaning Down The management port is not in operation Copper Link Up The copper management port is operating normally Table 7 7 Wireless Link Status attribute values Value Meaning Up The point to point link is established Searching A red background with status text searching indicates that the link is not established and no signal has yet been detected from the PTP 800 at the other end of the link This is a valid status value if the link remains in this state it implies that the remote PTP 800 has not been detected phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 7 11 Web based management Chapter 7 Operation Value Meaning Other values A red background with status text registering acquiring initialising indicates that the link is not yet established These are normal stages in the establishment of an operational link If the link remains in any state for a long period of time it implies a problem with the PTP 800 Table 7 8 Transmit Modulation Selection Detail attribute values Value Meaning Acquiring Link The wireless link is not established Fixed The Transmit Modulation Selection is set to Fixed Installation ACM Highest This is the highest transmit modulation that can be used for the installation settings Installation ACM Lowest This is the lowest transmit modulation that can be used for the installation settings User ACM Highest The transmit modulation is the highest
149. May 2011 Interface PDR84 PDR84 PDR84 PDR84 Mid band gain 31 1 dBi 35 5 dBi 37 3 dBi 40 6 dBi Vertical Weight beamwidth 4 7 14 kg 31 1b 2 6 24 kg 53 1b Da 55 kg 121 1b L3 62 kg 137 1b 4 33 Antenna specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Antenna specifications 11 GHz Motorola can supply the antennas listed in Table 4 30 and Table 4 31 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the 11 GHz band frequency range 10 70 11 70 GHz Table 4 30 Antenna specifications for 11 GHz single polarization Motorola number Diameter Interface Mid Vertical Weight band beamwidth gain 85010089049 0 6 m 2 ft MDM 34 5 dBi 3 3 11 kg 25 1b 85010089003 0 8 m 2 6 ft MDM 37 4 dBi 2 1 30 kg 66 1b 85009298003 1 0 m 3 ft MDM 38 4 dBi 2 0 24 kg 53 1b 85010089004 1 2 m 4 ft MDM 40 4 dBi 1 5 46 kg 101 1b 85010089005 1 8 m 6 ft MDM 43 8 dBi 1 1 84 kg 185 lb 85010091019 0 6 m 2 ft PDR100 34 5 dBi 3 3 11 kg 25 1b 85010091003 0 8 m 2 6 ft PDR100 37 4 dBi 2 1 30 kg 66 lb 85010091017 1 0 m 3 ft PDR100 38 4 dBi 2 0 24 kg 53 1b 85010091004 1 2 m 4 ft PDR100 40 4 dBi 1 5 46 kg 101 1b 85010091005 1 8 m 6 ft PDR100 43 8 dBi 1 1 84 kg 185 lb MDM Motorola direct mount Table 4 31 Antenna specifications for 11 GHz dual polarization Motorola number Diameter Interface Mid Vertical Weight band beamwidth gain 85010092052 0 6 m 2 ft PDR100 34 5 dBi 3 3 11 kg 25 lb
150. N SITES 68P81089E50 to all new site build activities Preparing personnel IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS INC BE LIABLE FOR ANY INJURY TO ANY PERSONS OR ANY DAMAGE CAUSED DURING THE INSTALLATION OF THE MOTOROLA PTP 800 PRODUCT Ensure that only qualified personnel undertake the installation of a PTP 800 link Ensure that all safety precautions can be observed 5 6 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Preparing inventory Perform the following inventory checks Preparing for installation Check that an installation report is available and that it is based on the principles described in Chapter 2 Planning considerations Check that the correct components are available as described Installation inventories on page 4 2 Check the contents of all packages against their packing lists Preparing tools Check that the tools listed in Table 5 1 are available Table 5 1 Tools required for PTP 800 installation Tools Required Equipment to be Installed CMU Direct Mount ODU Remote Mount Flexible Wave Guide Flexible Wave Guide hanger Coupler Antenna phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Pozi screw driver PZ1 Ground lug crimp tool diameter 5mm 8mm spanner Lubricant supplied 17mm spanner Lubricant supplied Allen key supplied in the kit 13mm spanner omm Allen key Flat bladed screw driver 6mm or Pozi screw driver PZ2 6mm Allen key 2
151. NSED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT IN NO EVENT WILL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE IN ANY WAY FOR INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INDIRECT SPECIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST BUSINESS PROFITS OR LIABILITY OR INJURY TO THIRD PERSONS WHETHER FORESEEABLE OR NOT REGARDLESS OF WHETHER MOTOROLA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBLITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Some jurisdictions do not permit limitations of liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above exclusions may not apply to you U S government 3 6 If you are acquiring the Product on behalf of any unit or agency of the U S Government the following applies Use duplication or disclosure of the Software and Documentation is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraphs c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 92 227 19 JUNE 1987 if applicable unless being provided to the Department of Defense If being provided to the Department of Defense use duplication or disclosure of the Products is subject to the restricted rights set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 OCT 1988 if applicable Software and Documentation may or may not include a Restricted Rights notice or other notice referring specifically to the terms and conditions of this Agreement The terms and conditions of this Agreement will each continue to apply but only to the e
152. P 800 will not transmit at a level greater than the configured value of Maximum Transmit Power However if ATPC is enabled the PTP 800 may transmit at a lower power than the configured value for Maximum Transmit Power Min tx Power refers to the minimum value to which the Maximum Transmit Power parameter may be configured If ATPC is enabled the PTP 800 may transmit at a lower power than the configured value for Minimum Transmit Power 4 58 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Wireless operation The tables are ordered by frequency band as follows Capacity transmit power and sensitivity Lower 6 GHz on page 4 59 Capacity transmit power and sensitivity Upper 6 GHz on page 4 60 Capacity transmit power and sensitivity 7 GHz on page 4 63 Capacity transmit power and sensitivity 8 GHz on page 4 64 Capacity transmit power and sensitivity 11 GHz on page 4 66 Capacity transmit power and sensitivity 13 GHz on page 4 69 Capacity transmit power and sensitivity 15 GHz on page 4 70 Capacity transmit power and sensitivity 18 GHz on page 4 73 Capacity transmit power and sensitivity 23 GHz on page 4 79 Capacity transmit power and sensitivity 26 GHz on page 4 83 Capacity transmit power and sensitivity 38 GHz on page 4 87 Capacity transmit power and sensitivity Lower 6 GHz Table 4 64 Lower 6 GHz FCC and Canada with 10 MHz bandwidth Modu
153. Radio License Region Radio License Bandwidth Radio License Channel Separation Radio License Modulation Selection Radio License Mod Mode Radio License Ref Modulation Radio License Max Mod Mode Radio License Min Mod Mode Radio License Max EIRP Radio License Tx Frequency phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Meaning Enter an identifier for the radio license for example a certificate number if one was provided by the licensing authority This attribute is for reference only Select the licensed band GHz When an ODU is attached this attribute is set automatically Select the license region Select the licensed bandwidth MHz This attribute is only displayed when Radio License Region is set to FCC or Canada Select the licensed spacing between channels MHz This attribute is only displayed when Radio License Region is set to ETSI or Brazil Fixed Modulation is the default Adaptive Modulation may be available if permitted by the license Select the licensed modulation mode This attribute is only displayed when Radio License Modulation Selection is set to Fixed Modulation Reference modulation mode specified by the license This control is only visible for certain regions when Radio License Modulation Selection is set to Adaptive Select the highest modulation mode allowed by the license This control is only visible for certain regions when Radio License Modulati
154. Testing the installation on page 5 63 This section describes how to perform pre power tests on the ODU LPUs and the IF cable Installing the CMU on page 5 73 This section describes how to install and connect the CMU Preparing the network connections unprotected on page 5 80 This section describes how to connect the CMUs to the network equipment for unprotected links Preparing the network connections protected on page 5 84 This section describes how to connect the CMUs to the network equipment for 1 1 protected links phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 1 Installation process summary Chapter 5 Installation Installation process summary This section summarizes the installation process for unprotected and protected links It also summarizes the process for upgrading an unprotected link to protected Installation process for unprotected links To install a link without link protection follow this process 1 It is common practice to pre configure the CMUs during staging before site installation Perform the following tasks from Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment for each CMU from Task 1 Connecting to the unit on page 6 2 to Task 10 Configuring wireless interface on page 6 47 These tasks may be performed after installation if preferred When performing Task 9 Configuring protection interface on page 6 42 select the option to configure an unprotected link 2 Check that it is safe to proceed and that all equipment a
155. Transmit Modulation bode HEGAN 0 91 ODU Receve Modulation Moge 256Q4M 0 91 OOU Status tee es Tranema Modulation Selection Detal Installation ACM Highest fransmier Status T SSS etherne ODU Type ODUA 18GHz TRIMO H 18940 19240MHz Data Port Status Copper iwp ooo ODU Serial HBKKWVIOJ4 Data Port Speed And Duplex 1000 Mbps Full Duplex ODU Version Bank 1 106121208 Management Port Status Modem Management Port Speed And Duplex 100 Mbps Ful Duplex MAC Address OC 04 56 30 06 27 Software Version PTPER B6 2 wood Hardware Version 05 03 Elapsed Time incacatce 1 Day 00 40 49 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 7 9 Web based management Status attributes Chapter 7 Operation The System Status page contains a number of status attributes These are highlighted in green for normal operation or in red to indicate abnormal operation The following attributes are defined ODU Status Table 7 3 Transmitter Status Table 7 4 Data Port Status Table 7 5 Management Port Status Table 7 6 Wireless Link Status Table 7 7 Transmit Modulation Selection Detail Status Table 7 8 Protection State Table 7 9 Table 7 3 ODU Status attribute values Value OK ODU Fault Incompatible License In Reset Download In Progress Incompatible Firmware Version Incompatible Device IF Card Attached No Response Power Supply Fault Power Supply Disabled Meaning The ODU is ready for use The ODU has raised alarms but the CMU makes i
156. Transmitter The transmitter can be enabled as described in Enabling wireless transmission on page 7 27 or disabled as described in Disabling wireless transmission on page 7 25 Link Link Name Read only This attribute is set in the Installation wizard Table 6 11 Site Name The Site Name can be updated Antenna Antenna Gain Read only This attribute is set in the Installation wizard Table 6 11 RF Feeder Loss Read only This attribute is set in the Installation wizard Table 6 11 IF Cable IF Cable Length Read only This attribute is set in the Installation wizard Table 6 11 Modem phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 6 67 Task 12 Reviewing configuration and performance Attribute Short Power Cycle for Recovery Radio License Wireless Maximum Transmit Power EIRP User ACM Highest Mode User ACM Lowest Mod Mode Encryption Algorithm Encryption Key Automatic Transmitter Power Control Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Meaning Read only This attribute is set in the Installation wizard Table 6 11 These attributes are read only as they are set in the Installation wizard Table 6 12 Enter the maximum transmit power that the local wireless unit is permitted to use to sustain a link The actual EIRP in dBm This is the maximum modulation mode the radio can use when ACM is enabled The valid range is dependant on the region license and Tx Max Power This control is only visible for ce
157. a redundant copper Figure 1 18 interface on page 5 86 Or Installing a redundant fiber interface on page 5 87 Or one copper and one fiber 1 Management Installing an out of band protection splitter not last hop on page 5 85 Management Either Installing an out of band protection last hop splitter on page 5 85 but connect the two 2 LAN ports together using a protection cable Or Installing a protection cable on page 5 88 In band Customer Fither Installing a redundant copper Figure 1 21 interface on page 5 86 Or Installing a redundant fiber interface on page 5 87 Or one copper and one fiber 1 Management Installing a protection cable on page 5 88 1 It is possible to combine the two types of redundant interface at one link end that is connect one CMU to the network via copper and the other CMU via fiber 2 Last hop link ends are those that are at the edge of the network where access to the management network is not always available 5 84 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Preparing the network connections protected Installing an out of band protection splitter Ifa 1 1 protected configuration requires an out of band protection splitter connect the CMU Management ports to the management network as shown in Figure 5 26 Use straight through Cat5e cables with a maximum length of 2 m to connect the CMUs to the splitter A NOTE
158. acturer s instructions to attach the assembly to the mast or pole phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 29 Installing antenna with two ODUs and a coupler Chapter 5 Installation Remote mounting of antenna with two ODUs and coupler In the remote mount configuration the antenna and coupler with two ODUs are attached to the mast separately connected to each other via a flexible waveguide The flexible waveguide is designed to isolate vibration and eliminate difficulties caused by misalignment The flexible waveguide must be protected from damage that may be caused by contamination vibration or bending Observe the precautions in Remote mounting of antenna with a single ODU on page 5 12 ANOTE Before installation check that the ODUs coupler remote mount kit waveguide and antenna have compatible interfaces Attaching coupler to remote mount kit To attach the coupler to the remote mount bracket proceed as follows 1 Ensure the correct remote mount kit coupler and flexible wave guide are present for the frequency band 5 30 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing antenna with two ODUs and a coupler 2 Check that the supplied coupler is the correct type for this installation Check the contents of the coupler mounting kit N i amp p a F j m b rg n 3 T a j i Piri E oe e A 3 Ensure the correct spacers are fitted to each of the
159. age 8 7 Green flash The Ethernet link is up and is carrying traffic Continue at Off Check IP network connection on page 8 7 The Ethernet link is down Continue at Fiber Data port indicator is off on page 8 6 Fiber Data port indicator is off If the Fiber Data port indicator is off it means that the Ethernet link is down Check the following The fiber adaptor is correctly inserted at the CMU The fiber cable is correctly connected to the adaptor The associated network equipment router switch etc is powered up and operating correctly The fiber port in the associated equipment is enabled The fiber cable between the CMU and the network equipment is connected and is not damaged If possible substitute a known good fiber cable If these steps fail to resolve the problem continue at Entering recovery mode on page 7 50 selecting the option to reset IP and Ethernet configuration 8 6 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Connecting to the web management interface Check IP network connection If the Management port indicators are illuminated for a network using out of band management or the Data port indicators are illuminated for a network using in band management but the IP address of the CMU is unknown continue at Entering recovery mode on page 7 50 selecting the option to reset IP and Ethernet configuration If the IP address of the CMU is known send a sequence of
160. age is displayed Figure 7 18 4 Select the required recovery option and perform the recovery task Table 7 14 Figure 7 17 Recovery Mode Warning page Recovery Image Click this image to update IP Ethernet configuration or upgrade operational software phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 7 51 Using recovery mode Chapter 7 Operation Figure 7 18 Recovery Options page Motorola PTP 800 Series Recovery Options Browse Upgrade Software Image Configuration Management Wanagement Mode After Reset IP e Qut of Band Local 2 In Band Reset IP amp Ethernet Configuration back to factory defaults Erase Configuration roize Critical Security Parameters Reboot software Version Recovery 01 02 Recovery Reazon Short Power Cycle MAC Address 00 0 4 56 30 00 bf Option Upgrade Software Image Management Mode After Reset IP Reset IP amp Ethernet Configuration back to factory defaults Erase Configuration Zeroize Critical security Parameters Reboot Table 7 14 Recovery options Recovery task Upgrading software image on page 7 53 This option selects the management mode that will be configured following reset of the IP and Ethernet configuration or following erasure of all configuration data Resetting IP and Ethernet configuration to factory defaults on page 7 54 Erasing configuration on page 7 55 Zeroizing security parameters on page 7 56 This option is used to reboot the
161. al Weight band beam gain width 85010089038 0 3 m 1 ft MDM 40 1 dBi 1 6 6 kg 13 lb 85010089048 0 6 m 2 ft MDM 45 2 dBi 0 9 11 kg 25 lb MDM Motorola direct mount Table 4 43 Antenna specifications for 38 GHz dual polarization Motorola Diameter Interface Mid Vertical Weight number band beam gain width 85010092038 0 3 m 1 ft PBR320 40 1 dBi 1 6 7 kg 15 Ib 85010092058 0 6 m 2 ft PBR320 45 2 dBi 0 9 11 kg 25 1b 4 40 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Flexible waveguide specifications Flexible waveguide specifications This section contains specifications of the flexible waveguides and flexible waveguide accessories that are available from Motorola for PTP 800 remote mount installations Waveguide flanges Locating the flanges Figure 4 1 shows the locations of the flanges on the antenna transition waveguide and remote mount kit RMK The numbers 1 to 4 refer to Table 4 44 Figure 4 1 Locations of waveguide flanges Remote mount kit with ODU Tapered Antenna Transistion Flex Waveguide H E O G The numbered call outs in Figure 4 1 are 1 Antenna flange 2 Tapered transition flanges 3 Flexible waveguide flanges 4 RMK flange phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 4 41 Flexible waveguide specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Flanges for each frequency variant Table 4 44 specifies t
162. and data networks even in the presence of configuration errors In in band mode Figure 1 25 the management and customer data networks are not isolated and the Management port is not used 1 40 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Ethernet bridging Figure 1 23 Forwarding behavior in out of band local management mode Management agent Management port Wireless MAC bridge Figure 1 24 Forwarding behavior in out of band management mode Management agent Management port Wireless MAC bridge Figure 1 25 Forwarding behavior in in band mode Management agent Management port Wireless MAC bridge phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 1 41 Ethernet bridging Chapter 1 Product description Forwarding behavior for protected links Forwarding behavior for the active CMU is as for a non protected link Forwarding behavior for the inactive CMU in a protected link requires management data to be routed to the Ethernet management port Figure 1 26 or data port Figure 1 27 depending on the management mode Only status information from the remote CMU is forwarded at the wireless interface Figure 1 26 Inactive unit frame forwarding out of band management Management agent Management port Wireless No data forwarding Figure 1 27 Inactive unit frame forwarding in band management Management agent Management port Wireless No data forwarding 1 4
163. and feeder loss The maximum transmit power that can be configured for PTP 800 is limited by the more restrictive of the equipment limit and the spectrum license limit Maximum transmit power defaults to the maximum permitted as described above but can be reduced if necessary using Step 3 of the Installation Wizard or the Configuration page of the web based interface phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 1 23 Wireless operation Chapter 1 Product description Security PTP 800 provides optional 128 bit and 256 bit encryption using the Advanced Encryption Standard AES The implementation in PTP 800 has been validated against Federal Information Processing Standard Publication 197 FIPS 197 in the Cryptographic Algorithm Validation Program CAVP of the US National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST AES encryption protects all traffic over the wireless link including in band and out of band network management traffic Each CMU behaves as a cryptographic device in which the Ethernet interfaces transmit and receive plain text data and the IF interface transmits and receives cipher text data The IF cable and ODUs are outside the cryptographic boundary phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide 1 1 Hot Standby link protection 1 1 Hot Standby link protection The 1 1 Hot Standby feature provides an option for protecting a PTP 800 link against hardware failure In the event of failure of a single piece
164. ardous voltages occurring in the event of lightning strikes and for the protection of the equipment For a protected link both CMUs must be connected to a common ground This must be installed prior to connecting the two CMUs with the protection interface phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Front panel indicators Compact modem unit CMU The CMU front panel indicator LEDs and their functions are described in Table 1 2 Table 1 2 CMU indicator LEDs Indicator ODU indicator Management port Copper data port Fiber data indicator Modem status indicator Power indicator phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Function Green steady Green slow blink Red steady Off Yellow steady Yellow flash Off Green steady Green flash Yellow steady Yellow flash Off Green steady Green flash Off Green steady Green slow blink Yellow steady Red steady Red slow blink Off Green steady Off Description ODU is ready for use and transmitting ODU is available for use and is muted or is incompatible with the radio license configuration No response from or incompatible ODU ODU not powered Ethernet link up no traffic Ethernet link up traffic Ethernet link down or not connected 1000baseT Ethernet link up no traffic 1000baseT Ethernet link up traffic 100baseT Ethernet link up no traffic 100baseT Ethernet link up traffic Ethernet link down or not connected Fiber Ethernet l
165. as described in Table 8 3 Table 8 3 CMU status indicator checks CMU status indicator state Green steady green slow blink Yellow steady Red steady Red slow blink Off CMU out of service Likely cause and action The CMU is operating in normal not recovery mode If the CMU has not yet been attached to a network or if network is designed for out of band management continue at Check the Management port Ethernet connection on page 8 4 If the network is designed for in band management and the copper port is in use continue at Check the copper Data port Ethernet connection on page 8 5 If the network is designed for in band management and the fiber port is in use continue at Check the fiber Data port Ethernet connection on page 8 6 The CMU is booting If the status indicator remains yellow steady for longer than 60 seconds then continue at Using recovery mode on page 7 50 selecting the option to reload application software The CMU is out of service Continue at CMU out of service on page 8 3 The CMU is operating in recovery mode Continue at Using recovery mode on page 7 50 If the CMU power indicator is illuminated and the status indicator is off then the CMU has an internal power supply fault Return the CMU to Motorola for repair The out of service condition is shown by red steady illumination of the CMU status indicator Continue at Using recovery mode on page 7 50 selecting the option to re
166. ata network connection is to be copper or fiber then perform either Installing a copper data interface on page 5 80 or Installing a fiber data interface on page 5 81 For out of band management modes but not in band perform Installing a management interface on page 5 82 Installing a copper data interface If an unprotected configuration requires a copper data interface connect the CMU Data port copper to the network as shown in Figure 5 23 Figure 5 23 Copper data interface connections CMU Data port copper a RJ45 plug Cat5e cable Ethernet switch port gt 5 80 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Preparing the network connections unprotected Installing a fiber data interface If an unprotected configuration requires a fiber data interface connect the CMU Fiber SFP GigE port to the network as shown in Figure 5 24 Figure 5 24 Fiber data interface connections SFP module in CMU CMU Tx port to Ethernet switch Rx port x CMU Rx port to Ethernet switch Tx port JE SFP module in Ethernet switch Tx Rx Refer to Connecting fiber cables to the CMU on page 5 83 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 81 Preparing the network connections unprotected Chapter 5 Installation Installing a management interface If an unprotected configuration requires a management interface connect the CMU Management port to the network as shown in Figure 5 25
167. atus values and actions Value Meaning Action OK The CMU has detected Check that protection that the neighboring Switching is enabled the CMU is responding status of the wireless link and consider forcing a protection switchover Neighbor not connected The neighbor CMU is Check that the protection not physically present interface is correctly connected Neighbor not responding The neighbor CMU is Check the status of the not responding second CMU Check that Protection Switching is enabled Check the Protected Link page as described in Managing wireless link protection on page 7 28 If protection switching is disabled for this end of the wireless link re enable it see Enabling and disabling fault protection on page 7 33 If the Protection Link screen indicates that there are alarms for this unit then follow the trouble shooting guide for the alarms indicated phn 1478 _012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Testing protection switchover Check the status of the wireless interface Check the status of the wireless interface see Check link status on page 8 11 ANOTE If the wireless link quality has been affected by adverse weather it is likely that the secondary unit will not be able to provide a service either particularly if an asymmetric coupler has been used or the secondary unit is providing antenna protection with a less powerful antenna Check the physical Link Protection cable
168. ave User Guide System management Security PTP 800 provides optional 128 bit and 256 bit encryption using the Advanced Encryption Standard AES AES upgrades are supplied as an access key The access key authorizes the generation of a new license key that will enable AES operation for one CMU Two access keys are needed to operate AES on a link The upgrade is applied by entering an access key together with the MAC address of the target CMU into the PTP License Key Generator web page which may be accessed from http www motorola com ptp support This web page generates a new license key that must be installed on the CMU When the license key is installed the CMU must be rebooted before AES can be enabled Once applied the AES upgrade is bound to a single CMU and is not transferrable AES encryption in PTP 800 is based on pre shared keys An identical key must be entered at each end of the link For more information see Task 6 Configuring security on page 6 31 Restoring the operational configuration on page 7 57 Capacity upgrades All PTP 800 CMUs are shipped with a factory set 10 Mbit s capacity limit meaning that capacity is restricted to a maximum of 10 Mbit s at the data port When requiring additional capacity users can purchase upgrades Upgrades are applied through the CMU license key without any change to the hardware Capacity may be different for different directions A NOTE Purchasing a capacity upgrade
169. aving adjustments will not be applied to the time Enabled means that daylight saving adjustments will be applied to the time according to local rules Setting the real time clock to synchronize using SNTP To set the CMU clock to obtain accurate date and time updates from a networked time server proceed as follows 1 From the left hand menu select Remote Management The Remote Management page is displayed Figure 6 20 2 Inthe Clock section of the page set the SNTP State attribute to Enabled The SNTP clock attributes are displayed Figure 6 43 3 Review and update the SNTP clock attributes Table 6 16 4 Select Submit Updated Configuration Figure 6 43 Clock section of Remote Management page SNTP enabled Clock SNIP State Disabled Enabled SNIP Server IP Address o Jo o Ho SMTP Server Port Mumber 123 SMTP Foll Interval Seconds 3600 system Clack 07 Sep 2009 10 22 16 Time Zone GMT 00 00 Daylight Saving Disabled Enabled 6 72 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 13 Connecting link to the network Table 6 16 SNTP clock attributes Attribute SNTP State SNTP Server IP Address SNTP Server Port Number SNTP Poll Interval SNTP Sync System Clock Time Zone Daylight Saving phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Meaning Enabled means that the CMU will obtain accurate date and time updates from a networked tim
170. bandoned The transmitter t now muted Re start the Installation Wizard to make further changes or to perform antenna alignment Step 7 Completing alignment The Step 7 Installation Complete page is displayed Figure 6 41 Figure 6 41 Step 7 Installation Complete page step 7 Installation Complete The installation process has been completed The transmitter if now enabled You may wish to make further changes with the Configuration pages tis recommended that you Save a backup copy of the link configuration To rewiew the current link status go to the System Status page 6 66 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 12 Reviewing configuration and performance Task 12 Reviewing configuration and performance Perform this task after antenna alignment is complete This task consists of the following procedures Reviewing system configuration attributes on page 6 67 Comparing actual to predicted performance on page 6 69 Reviewing system configuration attributes To review and update the system configuration of a PTP 800 link proceed as follows 1 From the left hand menu select Configuration The System Configuration page is displayed Figure 7 8 2 Review and update the system configuration attributes Table 6 14 3 If any attributes have been updated select Submit Updated System Configuration Table 6 14 System Configuration attributes Attribute Meaning
171. be consistent with existing policy on priority of management traffic in the network Use of a high priority is strongly recommended for applications based on the in band management mode to ensure that management traffic is not discarded if the link is overloaded IP interface Choose an IP address for the IP interface of the CMU management agent The IP address must be unique and valid for the connected network segment and VLAN Find out the correct subnet mask and gateway IP address for this network segment and VLAN Ensure that the design of the data network permits bi direction routing of IP datagrams between network management systems and the CMUs For example ensure that the gateway IP address identifies a router or other gateway that provides access to the rest of the data network See Management network on page 1 37 for further explanation of configuration of the IP interface Quality of service for bridged Ethernet traffic Decide on the classification of Ethernet Frames for Quality of Service QoS Refer to Customer network on page 1 35 for an explanation of Quality of Service Maximum Capacity is achieveable for Ethernet Frames which have the highest configured Quality of Service class Maximum Capacity is 1 5 lower for Ethernet Frames with a lower classification In a protected link set the same QOS on primary and secondary units phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 2 19 Data network planning Chapter 2 Planning considerations
172. bed in this section Motorola Solutions Inc end user license agreement on page 3 2 Hardware warranty on page 3 13 Limit of liability on page 3 14 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 3 1 Motorola Solutions Inc end user license agreement Chapter 3 Legal information Motorola Solutions Inc end user license agreement In connection with Motorola s delivery of certain proprietary software or products containing embedded or pre loaded proprietary software or both Motorola is willing to license this certain proprietary software and the accompanying documentation to you only on the condition that you accept all the terms in this End User License Agreement Agreement IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT DO NOT USE THE PRODUCT OR INSTALL THE SOFTWARE INSTEAD YOU MAY FORA FULL REFUND RETURN THIS PRODUCT TO THE LOCATION WHERE YOU ACQUIRED IT OR PROVIDE WRITTEN VERIFICATION OF DELETION OF ALL COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE PRODUCT WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR ACCEPTANCE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT Definitions In this Agreement the word Software refers to the set of instructions for computers in executable form and in any media which may include diskette CD ROM downloadable internet hardware or firmware licensed to you The word Documentation refers to electronic or printed manuals and accompanying instructional aids licensed to you The w
173. bewsetemasonrseeecetext 6 61 Step 9 Starling antenna ahgnmMmenlescraacrarsriiriiristrsr irin tki E kE ar NENEN nE EEEN EEES 6 61 Step OAligning antennas apse de eas ne haces EE EEEE 6 61 Step 7 Completing alignment wiccccocccstecereracarsonecerveverweereieackotesrssiertesteeunpraveniancesiemiwens 6 66 Task 12 Reviewing configuration and performance esessseseesesseesesseesessessesseseesseseeseese 6 67 Reviewing system configuration attributes ssssessessessessessesressessesseseeseeseeseeseeseesee 6 67 Comparing actual to predicted performance ssssssesesseesessessesseseeseeseeseeseesesseesesseeo 6 69 Task 1 Connecting ink to the MEI WORK 95 ciavecevereaeiunerarenceavnrencckoeasen AEEA 6 70 Completing and testing network connectionSs sssesesseesessessesseseesseseeseeseesesseeseeseee 6 70 Deino the r ols 1 ELEN LAC 80 6 deat ete eet ener EAEE tyre meen ere T 6 71 Nantel ORGAO item 7 1 We b Dased Ta oc seg cpaarespea paso neareue EAA EAEE RE 7 2 Accessing the web interface cccececscececnenenecececeeeseneseseneseseececesececececececeasesseaeees 7 2 BOTA E E A en banhees ole T AE oie eae erate entero eG 7 4 Using he menu ODUONS carn dances pasanncucast asic cenntcn sun dendeb eter bacacescinnetsedieninduds soeseebeusbeniceueents 7 5 Viewing the systemi a svuhecenotenetseuesarng s oiie AEON ARANEA EENE EER 7 6 viewing me sy em Sea aa 7 8 viii phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Contents
174. ble but before connecting and applying power to the CMU the following tests are recommended Cable loss with ODU disconnected This test will ensure that the total cable loss including loss from the LPUs is within acceptable limits Cable loss with the ODU connected This test will confirm that the cable contains no short circuit or open circuit Distance to fault DTF return loss with the ODU connected This test confirms the position of the LPUs in the cable run and confirms there are no other points of discontinuity in the cable By comparing a current plot to a previously recorded plot it is possible to detect any degradation over time Test equipment An RF cable analyzer such as an Anritsu Site Master can be used to confirm that the installed cable between the ODU and the CMU has the correct loss and does not have any short or open circuits If the cable is faulty this equipment can be used to identify the location of a fault in the cable Figure 5 7 is an example of a cable analyzer that is suitable for performing the tests described in this section Figure 5 7 Example of a cable analyzer phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 63 Testing the installation Chapter 5 Installation Test preparation Figure 5 8 is an example to show how the equipment should be set up to perform the pre power tests In this example there is a short length of cable from the analyzer in place of the CMU to the first LPU a length
175. cecececececscecseeesesenenenesenenenenenenens 7 45 Using the diagnostics plotter seerisirmarsscsrteriiciriiaiea r rniran E TAN E RaT 7 45 Downloading dognostie dala sesar 7 47 Changing the diagnostics refresh period ccccececececececncneneneneneneseneseneseneneneseneneas 7 48 Eont ning E V OE ETT 7 48 Re BoOrNO TIG UNI see EEE E 7 49 Rebooting or reviewing reboot reasons sssessesseseesesseesessessessessessesecsoeseeseeseeseeseese 7 49 O EE gin a8 EE 7 50 E tering recovery MOG errierirerriresr r rre eoira EN E TEE EE TEE E EEEE 7 50 SE LEC RING TECOYGIY ODLOT sersa rors EEEO N ONAN EE SEENE EEA 7 51 Upgrading SOlware Mag nesa EAE AE T 7 93 Resetting IP and Ethernet configuration to factory defaults cece ec eceeeeeeeeeees 7 54 E EED E E UEUN D i AOE E I PAE E E A E E EEE SE EE TE T 7 99 PEON security Pal ANIC CLS irctcctcceoatacdteeinnenodendsadesdraincsnataederosedeenieaelacdasncetenaeiieed 7 56 Downgrading PIP OOU SOWAT Ossisssee sre Eoin EAE E 7 56 Restoring the operational configuration sssscscecrarirdsridri edee nS N 7 57 Re storing the configuration 16 covacsavuieaceaseenninanaeeepiesdunenesavndentbeninnheriie dnririeineotanses 7 57 Chapter 8 TIOUDIESNOOUING sedicciccscdaccinndcccscenssesssentiumescasdesdscatswatucsticnseientecnisdstsentienteens 8 1 Connecting to the web management interface ssessesseseesseseeseeseesesseesessessessessesoeseeseese 8 2 acta enn os cert aS ese 8 2
176. cense keys on page 6 21 Follow the procedure Changing AES encryption keys on page 7 36 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 6 31 Task 6 Configuring security Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Configuring AES encryption This procedure is only performed when the link requires AES encryption Before connecting the unit to the network ensure that access to the web based management interface is controlled in accordance with the network operator s security policy AES link encryption is only available to users who have purchased an appropriate license key Refer to Checking licensed capabilities on page 6 21 To configure AES link encryption before the link is operational proceed as follows 1 Select menu option Configuration The System Configuration page is displayed Figure 6 16 2 Select the Encryption Algorithm either AES 128 bit or AES 256 bit The same algorithm must be used at both ends of the link 3 Enter and confirm the encryption key The key consists of 32 or 64 case insensitive hexadecimal characters The same key must be used at both ends of the link 4 Select Submit Updated System Configuration The reboot confirmation dialog is displayed Figure 6 17 5 Select Reboot Wireless Unit and then OK to confirm A NOTE To enable AES encryption over an established link open two browsers log into the web interfaces at each end of the link perform the above procedure at each unit then reboot both en
177. ch cenieninnsindestbd nddutneinentajauiencsiandnseetandlenenieensbunctuisdireenvesieomnsaedel 4 55 General wireless specications sccsvocrcvnseesweniesdesaderncdeneveveuancunsonveyaeebscdsneasemuseeeneniers 4 55 Frequency bands and channel separation sesessesseseesseseeseeseeseeseesesseesessessesseseeseese 4 56 Capacity transmit power and sensitivity cece cece ec ecececnenencecseecnesesenenenenesenenenenens 4 58 Pe O E E A oneness nmcwsnana bse nkasaunrs E 4 90 Seat CIM AL SUMA GRE ole is 21 1 se oO een te Ceee Et eT tee woe Mente EMT Ce eee Teer SET eset hen eee tentE Mere enie ren trees err Sennen ne 4 90 PSP ie OE Tic gone ovine nd geen nvawownasiupbaacde EE A A ae resteaneseaenans 4 91 TE a e 0e Compi O araa es ese ee 4 92 Electrical safety compliancE eae en een ner terkena ewer ee ten teen EE EE 4 92 EMC eA Dy OT INOS aseina EEE E E LE 4 92 A UE A EE EAS 4 93 PE e E E E E R 4 94 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 v Contents Ramalhon hazard asson Sme N Meee eee eee eee eee a ce ey erm net r E rr menrye errr eer tre 4 96 EET N eerey err Ne meer er ee mT tr er eee heer ry rn yore tnrenen Tee meetin errr ron mts een ee er 4 96 a E E EAE 4 98 Chanter S NSt ON sssrinds nnan EE 5 1 l sta lation proceso Suminar hot echesteaee niece capadsined Aari EDENE TEROAREA TEA AE 5 2 Installation process for unprotected links sscesesesseesesssesssressecesseesseesseeeseesseeeseeeeseesee 5 2 Installation proc
178. chapter Installation inventories on page 4 2 CMU specifications on page 4 13 ODU specifications on page 4 16 Antenna specifications on page 4 31 Flexible waveguide specifications on page 4 41 ODU coupler mounting specifications on page 4 50 Protection interface specifications on page 4 53 Wireless operation on page 4 55 Data network on page 4 90 Flectromagnetic compliance on page 4 92 Radiation hazard assessment on page 4 96 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 4 1 Installation inventories Chapter 4 Reference information Installation inventories This section contains inventories of the components required both for standard unprotected PTP 800 bridge installations and for the main installation options such as protected links and remote mounted ODUs Standard link components Standard links that is links without 1 1 Hot Standbay protection remote mounted ODUs or fiber interfaces require the components listed in Table 4 1 Table 4 1 Inventory for standard unprotected links Item Motorola description part number and notes Antenna Two antennas are required per link example with single ODU fitted For part numbers refer to Antenna specifications on page 4 31 Outdoor unit ODU Two ODUs are required per link D For part numbers refer to ODU o gt specifications on page 4 16 roronora 4 2 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide item Compact modem unit CMU kit
179. cted links on page 6 43 See that the wireless interface is enabled for all units as described in Enabling wireless transmission on page 7 27 Check that there are no alarms on any unit as described in Managing alarms on page 7 13 Initiate a protection switch so that the link is running active to active If primary recovery is set the units will switch automatically after the timer has expired phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 5 Preparing for installation Chapter 5 Installation Preparing for installation This section describes the checks to be performed before proceeding with the installation Precautions before installation All national and local safety standards must be followed while developing a site installing equipment or performing maintenance A WARNING In planning installing or modifying any antenna tower or other antenna site the need to comply with regulations and standards concerning human exposure to RF energy must be considered The following guidelines should be followed Always power down the ODU before exposing the antenna port Never work in front of the antenna when the ODU is powered Always power down the CMU when connecting and disconnecting the IF cable from either the CMU or ODU The installation must meet the requirements defined in Grounding and lightning protection on page 2 7 Apply the practices and procedures detailed in manual R56 STANDARDS AND GUIDELINES FOR COMMUNICATIO
180. d 3 161 168 196 254 7 7 8 5 F 386 8 119 7 14 28 126 208 266 311 32 29 65 10 7 11 7 Rec12 06E F 387 10 490 40 530 12 75 13 25 12 02E F 497 7 266 7 14 28 14 4 15 35 T R 12 07 F 636 3 420 7 14 28 56 490 728 17 7 19 7 Rec12 03E F 595 9 1010 7 413 75 27 599 F 595 9 An 3 1008 7 21 2 23 6 T R 13 02E An A E 637 3 An 3 5 1008 7 14 28 56 F 637 3 An 1 1232 7 14 28 24 5 26 5 13 02 An B F 748 4 An 1 1008 7 14 28 56 37 39 5 T R 12 01 F 749 2 An 1 1260 7 14 28 56 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Wireless operation FCC 101 147 defines the frequency plans for FCC The relevant sections of FCC 101 147 are summarized in Table 4 62 Table 4 62 FCC band plan Frequency FCC T R GHz MHz 5 9 6 4 252 04 10 7 11 7 Part 101 147 o 10 1 08 Edition 490 17 7 19 7 Part 101 147 r 10 1 08 Edition 1560 21 2 23 6 Part 101 147 s 10 1 08 Edition 1200 24 5 26 5 Part 101 147 s 10 1 08 Edition 800 37 39 5 700 The frequency plan for Brazil is summarized in Table 4 63 Table 4 63 Brazil band plan Frequency ERC CEPT ITU R T R GHz MHz 17 7 19 7 F 595 9 An 7 1560 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Bandwidth MHz 10 30 40 30 10 50 40 30 20 10 90 40 30 20 10 40 20 10 50 10 Channel separation MHz D9 2 7 07 L379 4 57 Wireless operation Chapter 4 Reference information Capacity transmit power and sensitivity This section contains tables
181. d by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ty jh cryptsort icom Copy Fight remains Eric Young sy and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are Meu 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 3 9 Motorola Solutions Inc end user license agreement Chapter 3 Legal information Pay notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this List of conditions and the following disclaimer in th documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eGayGcryptsoit com The word cryptographic can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps
182. d ground cables Installing and grounding the main IF cable Perform this procedure to install and ground the IF cable from the top LPU to the building entry point Figure 5 5 The IF cable must be grounded at the points specified in Protection requirements for a mast or tower installation on page 2 10 Figure 5 5 IF cable grounding on a mast or tower IF cable O Ground cable To top LPU _ q First point of contact with tower lt Mid point of tower a Bottom of tower To building entry point Tower Ground Bar TGB Ground ring phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 5 55 Installing the IF and ground cables Chapter 5 Installation To install and ground the main IF cable proceed as follows Attach the N type connector at the top end of the main IF cable to the SURGE port of the top LPU Protect the N type connectors on the LPU from the weather by applying self amalgamating and PVC tape as described in Weatherproofing an N type connector on page 5 47 Lay the main IF cable as far as the building entry point ensuring there is enough length to extend through the wall of the building to the bottom LPU Attach the main IF cable to the supporting structure using the cable ties provided Ground the IF cable at the points specified in Protection requirements for a mast or tower installation on page 2 10 Follow the procedure Making an IF cable ground point on page 5 57 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP
183. d onto direct mount mechanical interface ccecececeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 1 14 Figure 1 8 Remote mount antenna waveguide interface ssesessesrsseseesessesesresrsseseeseseesee 1 15 Figure 1 9 Remote mount kit showing the waveguide interface ccceceeeeseeeeecececeeeees 1 16 Figure 1 10 Remote mount kit showing the ODU interface ccc ceccc ec eeeecececeeeeneneeeees 1 16 Figure 1 11 ODU coupler mounting Kit cece cess cecececececececececececececececececeseseceeeseeees 1 17 Figure 1 12 Two ODUs and antenna mounted on a coupler ccccececeeeecececececeesecesececes 1 18 Figure 1 13 Cable grounding kit for 1 4 and 3 8 Cable c ccc cccecececeeeecececeseececeseceees 1 20 Figure 1 14 PTP O00 LPU end Wee crc ci gens ec canee scp ass ce sdcancaanacsneeieaensenusaiehaseearerserae re esiecsecenes 1 20 Figure 1 15 Protected end without antenna protection c ccccceceesecececeeeecesecsceceeeeseceees 1 26 Figure 1 16 Protected end with antenna Protection cccccccececeececececececececececececececeeeeees 1 27 Figure 1 17 Active and inactive customer data paths in a protected link cceeeeeeees 1 29 Figure 1 18 Out of band management connections for a protected end ceceeeeeeeeees 1 30 Figure 1 19 Last hop protected end with protection Cable c ccc cecececececececececececececeeees 1 32 Figure 1 20 Last hop protected end with spli
184. d to trigger protection switching by Spanning Tree Protocol STP or Ethernet Automatic Protection Switching EAPS in a redundant network Protocol model Ethernet bridging behavior at each end of the wireless link is equivalent to a three port managed transparent MAC bridge where the three ports are Ethernet Management Port Ethernet Data Port Wireless Port Frames are transmitted at the Wireless port over a proprietary point to point circuit mode link layer between ends of the PTP 800 link For a single CMU configuration or the active CMU in a 1 1 Hot Standby configuration Ethernet frames received at the data or management ports or generated internally within the management agent are encapsulated within a lightweight MAC layer for transmission over the wireless link For the inactive CMU at a protected end no traffic is transmitted over the wireless link Any management traffic generated is transmitted towards the management port for out of band management or the traffic port for in band management Forwarding behavior In out of band local mode Figure 1 23 and out of band mode Figure 1 24 the management network shown in red is isolated from the customer data network shown in blue In out of band mode the management network is isolated from the customer data at the wireless port by use of a separate service access point and associated dedicated logical channel Ethernet frames will not leak between management
185. data for ease of purchasing It can provide path data by an automated email service It can model all Motorola PTP products It can plan multiple links in the same session It can generate an export file for Motorola s FCC Coordination service The PTP LINKPlanner provides path profile information for individual links as shown in Figure 2 1 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 2 3 Link planning Chapter 2 Planning considerations Figure 2 1 LINKPlanner profile view Link Bolinas Ridge to Mount Tamalpais Equipment Region and Equipment Selection Band Regulation Product 23GHz2 v PTP 3800 PTP23800 Configuration TIF Spacing Bandwidth Dual Payload Modulation Mode Polarisation 1200 MHz 40MHz Enabled Profile 4 3 kilometers Line of Sight Bolinas Ridge Height Above Sea Level meters 02 04 06 08 1 12 14 16 18 2 22 24 26 28 3 32 34 36 38 4 Range on path kilometers The PTP LINKPlanner also provides configuration and performance details as Shown in Figure 2 2 and Bill of Materials data as shown in Figure 2 3 This is necessarily a brief introduction to the PTP LINKPlanner Please download and evaluate this free software in further detail Figure 2 2 LINKPlanner configuration and performance details Configuration at Each End Bolinas Ridge Mount Tamalpais Motorola 1ft HP Antenna 85010089011 35 3061 w Motorola 1ft HP Antenna 85010089011 35 3061 ka ntenna Height meters Max height at site is 20 0
186. de hangers on page 5 16 Attaching antenna to pole Follow the antenna manufacturer s instructions to attach the antenna to its bracket and to the mast or pole Attaching ODUs to coupler To attach the ODUs to the coupler and mount the assembly on the pole proceed as follows 1 Fit the flex waveguide to the remote mount bracket es _ Sey a z E TRO 2 Fit assembly to pole 5 34 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing antenna with two ODUs and a coupler 3 Connect the flexible waveguide to the antenna 4 Remove protective film from coupler ports Apply silicone grease to the O rings of the coupler transitions 6 Fit the ODUs to the coupler transitions ensuring that the waveguide interfaces align correctly for vertical or horizontal polarization Both ODUs must be fitted with handles at the top and connectors at the bottom For asymmetric couplers check that the MAIN and STANDBY sides of the coupler can still be identified phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 35 Installing antenna with two ODUs and a coupler Chapter 5 Installation 7 Support the flexible waveguide with the waveguide hangers Do not exceed the flexible waveguide minimum bend radius 8 Check the finished installation 5 36 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing the IF and ground cables Installing t
187. ds of the link The software is designed to allow five seconds so that a user can command both ends of the link to reboot before the wireless link drops phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 6 Configuring security Configuring link encryption over an established link will necessitate a service outage Therefore the configuration process should be scheduled during a period of low link utilization Figure 6 16 System Configuration page system Configuration Thiz page controls the day to day configuration of the PTF wireless unit Attributes Wa Units Transmitter Enabled Mute Transmitter Attributes Mae rts Link Link Mame Site Mame Antenna Antenna Gain RF Feeder Loss IF Cable IF Cable Length Modem Short Power Cycle For Recovery Radio License Radio License Identitier Radio License Band Radio License Region Radio License Channel Separation Radio License Max EIRP Radio License Tx Freq Radio License Fx Freq Radio License Modulation Selection Radio License Ret Modulation Wireless Maximum Transmit Power Max 17 0 Min 7 0 EIRP User ACM Highest Mod Mode User ACM Lowest Mod Mode Encryption Algorithm Encryption Key Automatic Transmitter Power Control Test of AM Installation Wizard Cool vial 30 0 0 0 Disabled 18 GHz ETSl T MHZ 30 0 18192 500 19202 500 Adaptive Modulation 1282 4 0 76 47 0 55 0 lt Please re select
188. e 4 53 ODU coupler physical specifications cece cece ecececececececececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 50 Table 4 54 ODU coupler environmental specifications c cece cece cece ec cceececeseseeeeeneeeesesees 4 50 Table 4 55 ODU coupler return losses and iSolation cccc cc cc ec ccceceeececcececeeeeseeeeeeceusesees 4 51 Table 4 56 ODU coupler insertion losses ccsssscseeeseesseessecesressecesseesrersseeesecesseeeseceseeeseeesseess 4 51 Table 4 57 ODU coupler mounting kit part numbers sseseesseseesseseeseesseseeseeseesesseesesseesesee 4 52 Table 4 58 Out of band protection splitter specifications sssseesseesressseeereeesecsseceseeesseeeee 4 53 Table 4 59 Out of band protection Cable Pin OuUtsS cece cece cscs ec eececececcececeuseeeeenseseusesees 4 54 Table 4 60 General wireless specifications cccccccccccececcecececcesececeuseeeeeneeceeeseseeeueecesesees 4 55 Table 4 01 ETSI Dand genic nid phos nvinnea Enni aR rE E REEERE RA E EEA EEEE 4 56 Table 4 62 PCC Dand Plan viiectecacesccsvnccecutrasanserbesecubanusssenteasencecueratankenbadlewseconseveveaswecsovaareianses 4 57 Tahle d0 Pa Dand Piri ps aes tact E NEEE RA 4 57 Table 4 64 Lower 6 GHz FCC and Canada with 10 MHz bandwidth cece cece es 4 59 xvi phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 List of Tables Table 4 65 Lower 6 GHz FCC and Canada with 30 MHz bandwidth cece ec ee eee ees 4
189. e IF and ground cables 4 Cut a 125mm 5 inches length of rubber tape self amalgamating 5 Expand the width of the tape by stretching it so that it will wrap completely around the connector and cable 6 Press the tape edges together so that there are no gaps The tape should extend 25mm 1inch beyond the PVC tape phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 49 Installing the IF and ground cables Chapter 5 Installation 7 Wrap a layer of 50 mm 2 inch PVC tape from bottom to top starting from 25 mm 1 inch below the edge of the self amalgamating tape overlapping at half width 8 Repeat with a further four layers of 19 mm 0 75 inch PVC tape always overlapping at half width Wrap the layers in alternate directions Second layer top to bottom Third layer bottom to top Fourth layer top to bottom Fifth layer bottom to top The bottom edge of each layer should be 25 mm 1 inch below the previous layer 5 50 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing the IF and ground cables 9 Completed weatherproof connection Hoisting the main IF cable Hoisting grips are designed for hoisting cable safely up a tower or building and providing permanent support so that mechanical connection to an antenna can be made A clamp is placed over the grip and secured to the cable with a special tool When the cable is in position and the grip handle is fastened to a tower member the hoist
190. e PTP 800s see Step 1 Configuring equipment parameters on page 6 48 This unit is aligned to the wrong link partner phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Alarm FCC capacity check Wireless Receives Signal Status Licensed Transmit Capacity Status Data Port Ethernet Speed Status Management Port Ethernet Speed Status phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Definition The Transmit Capacity Limit of the unit lower of license key and negotiated Ethernet speed at remote end is below the appropriate level required by FCC Part 101 141 The Wireless Receive Signal Status indicates if the receiver is able to demodulate the transmit signal from the remote end of the link If it cannot a protection switch may occur in a system configured for 1 1 Hot Standby Ina 1 1 Hot Standby configuration this indicates that the Licensed Transmit Capacity is below that of its neighbor Ina 1 1 Hot Standby configuration this indicates if the Ethernet Speed of the Data Port is below that of its neighbor Ina 1 1 Hot Standby configuration this indicates if the Ethernet Speed of the Management Port is below that of its neighbor Managing alarms and events Likely cause This is probably due to a configuration error or the wrong license being applied to one of the CMUs This may be due to hardware problems the ODU the antenna or CMU see the diagnostic procedures under Installi
191. e carries the following multiplexed signals Power supply 48 V dc Transmit signal at 350 MHz Receive signal at 140 MHz ODU control and status signals Do not connect or disconnect the IF cable when the 48 V supply is applied to the CMU Management port The PTP 800 system supports network management communications in two modes out of band and in band In the out of band mode the system is managed by connecting to the CMU through the management port The management port supports 10baseT and 100baseT Ethernet For more information on the Ethernet interfaces see Wireless operation on page 4 ao For 1 1 Hot Standby protection unused pins of the management port are utilised to provide the protection interface between the two CMUs at one end ofa protected link For more information see 1 1 Hot Standby link protection on page 1 25 Recovery switch The recovery switch is used to start the CMU in recovery mode Recovery mode provides a means to recover from serious configuration errors including lost or forgotten passwords and unknown IP addresses For more information see Recovery mode on page 1 48 Recovery mode also allows new main application software to be loaded even when the integrity of the existing main application software has been compromised Copper data port The copper data port connects the customer traffic network In the in band management mode the system is managed through th
192. e cece ec ee sentences 4 38 Table 4 40 Antenna specifications for 26 GHz single polarization cccccececeeeeeeeeeeees 4 39 Table 4 41 Antenna specifications for 26 GHz dual polarization ccc cece cece ee eeeeeeeees 4 39 Table 4 42 Antenna specifications for 38 GHz single polarization cc cece ececeeeeeeeeees 4 40 Table 4 43 Antenna specifications for 38 GHz dual polarization cece cece ec eeeeeeeees 4 40 Table 4 44 Antenna transition waveguide and RMK flanges cece cece ececececeeeeeeeeeeees 4 42 Table 4 45 Torque value in Nm lb ft for each fastener SIZEC 0 cece cc ec ec eccececeeeeseeeeeueees 4 46 Table 4 46 Flexible waveguide Specifications 6 GHZ ccc ceceececececececececeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 46 Table 4 47 Flexible waveguide specifications 7 GHZ c ccc cccececececececececececececececececeeeeees 4 477 Table 4 48 Flexible waveguide specifications 11 GHZ cece ec ecececececececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 477 Table 4 49 Flexible waveguide specifications 15 GHZ cece cccececececececececececececeeeeeeees 4 48 Table 4 50 Flexible waveguide specifications 18 23 and 26 GHZ sssssessessesessesesseseese 4 48 Table 4 51 Flexible waveguide specifications 38 GHZ cece cccccccecececececececececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 49 Table 4 52 Flexible waveguide accessory specifications cceceeseececececececececececececececees 4 49 Tabl
193. e data port and management traffic is multiplexed with customer traffic The copper data port supports 100baseT or 1000baseT Ethernet For more information on the Ethernet interfaces see Wireless operation on page 4 55 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 1 7 Compact modem unit CMU Chapter 1 Product description Fiber SFP interface The Fiber SFP interface is a standard small form factor pluggable SFP gigabit interface that allows connection of an optional fiber optic module When a Supported SFP module is present and is working and the fiber carrier is present the customer traffic network and in band management network if enabled connects through fiber and the copper data port is not used If the fiber link fails or loses the carrier signal the Ethernet service falls back to the copper LAN connection The Fiber SFP interface is a Class 1 laser product safe under all conditions of normal operation For more information on the Ethernet interfaces see Wireless operation on page 4 5D Power connector The CMU is powered from a standard 48 V dc telecommunications supply with Supply range 40 5 V to 60 V The 0 V positive connection is grounded at the CMU casing IF cable outer shield and ODU casing Ground stud 1 8 The CMU must be grounded at this M5 ground stud using the supplied connector The ground cable must be fitted to a suitable low impedance ground point This will ensure protection to personnel from haz
194. e nr aleg a i EEEE IEA E E E ANAT S ET T E T 1 20 Lig Un protecion umts GLP SP seses aces cxscsnnsateasnanaceaiaciateoreaaieesiearseneiaewenicaseraeieteoses 1 20 Wree ODOT a oo cans crs Comin renee cians enhademies tan guainncnsi tie enieitvannsetieeaienianicuas 1 21 Borie Ne cra eka hea PERR eee A ee were nner ay areata E nied een mmr te Mr wren nr ner einen emer ie eee ay 1 21 Modulation TE usin coccnesnesmepausecaiatcanemnaimadecanersonasbavaesaseieioncomestanagesmaieetnuasrounacaisiontent 1 21 Adaptive coding and Ts vices vee canee neni seanednecentcaneue EAD 1 22 Wireless link Capacity spose ater eas cern nce vowed even ENEE EEEE EESE EEEE 1 22 Automatic transmitter DOWEL CONLIN secsirecesisrnerue rieni nap ito EEEE ENE EEEE 1 22 Bee aaa cere em arnar iA EE EEA ENEE 1 23 Maximum iransnil POWE errrierenieir iniae ninian ide E EEA EANA 1 23 E E A E TEE E EEE E nnt rt er Te 1 24 LFL HOL ou ey ink proleclion sercis AE EEAO 1 25 CONC ol a protected aaah te cents OEE DETENER 1 25 Operanon Or a protecled 10 espre EAEE E 1 28 Protected link antenna interfaces sesssseseesessesesresessesersesesseseesessesessesesseseeseseesesee 1 28 Protected link network interfaceSs sssssssessesessesrssesrersesessessesrrseserseseesesseseesesessesee 1 29 Protected link with out of band management sssseesessessessessesseseeseesseseesoeseeseeseeseee 1 30 Protected link with in band management essesseseeseesessessessessesseseessese
195. e rests on two finials the space under the sphere is considered to be in the zone of protection Assess locations on masts towers and buildings to determine if the location is in Zone A or Zone B Zone A In this zone a direct lightning strike is possible Do not mount equipment in this zone Zone B In this zone direct EMD lightning effects are still possible but mounting in this zone significantly reduces the possibility of a direct strike Mount equipment in this zone phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 2 7 Grounding and lightning protection Chapter 2 Planning considerations A WARNING Never mount equipment in Zone A Mounting in Zone A may put equipment structures and life at risk Figure 2 4 Rolling sohere method to determine the lightning protection zones Equipment Zone B General protection requirements To adequately protect a PTP 800 installation both ground bonding and transient voltage surge suppression are required A NOTE Where an installation already has or requires the use of a Master Ground Bar then the requirements of Motorola specification R56 Standards And Guidelines For Communication Sites 668P81089E50 take precedence over those in this guide This specification may be downloaded from http www motorola com ptp software 2 8 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed E
196. e server Enter the IP address of the networked SNTP server Enter the port number of the networked SNTP server By convention the default value for the port number is 123 Enter the period at which the SNTP client polls the server for time correction updates default 1 hour If an SNTP poll fails the client will automatically perform three retries before waiting for the user defined poll period This shows the current status of SNTP synchronization If No Sync is displayed then review the SNTP Server IP Address and Port Number A change of state may generate an SNMP trap or SMTP email alert This displays the local time allowing for the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings Set the time zone offset from Greenwich Mean Time GMT Disabled means that daylight saving adjustments will not be applied to the time Enabled means that daylight saving adjustments will be applied to the time according to local rules 6 73 Task 13 Connecting link to the network Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment 6 74 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Operation This chapter describes how to operate a PTP 800 link The following topics are described in this chapter Web based management on page 7 2 Managing alarms and events on page 7 13 Disabling and enabling the wireless interface on page 7 25 Managing wireless link protection on page 7 28 Managing security on page 7 35 Ma
197. e the same on neighbors in order for an inactive unit to protect an active unit If the inactive unit does not match it will be Shown in red on the Protected Link page and the reason will be Configuration not protecting To determine which attribute is not matched select the Home page of the misconfigured unit If the inactive unit is not protecting the active unit for any reason for example it is misconfigured or has a fault a summary attribute called protectionAvailabilityStatus will be displayed on the Home page of both the active and inactive unit On the active unit it will have the value of Not Protected On the inactive unit it will have the value of Not Protecting 7 30 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Managing wireless link protection Forcing protection switches Protection switches may be forced for a variety of reasons for example During maintenance operations During software or hardware upgrades To investigate error conditions that have not resulted in a protection switch To confirm that the inactive unit remains fully functional To avoid loss of service force protection switches only if link planning indicates that the unit s are capable of operating a satisfactory link After a protection switch has been initiated if work is to be carried out on the newly inactive unit ensure that fault protection is temporarily disabled until the activit
198. ected link or for a protected link that uses ODU couplers perform Aligning a pair of antennas on page 6 61 Introduction to antenna alignment Licensed microwave links use parabolic dish antennas which have narrow beam widths ranging from 4 7 down to 0 5 Beam width depends on antenna gain larger gain antennas having narrower beam widths It is most important that all PTP 800 antennas are precisely aligned at the centre of the main beam If antennas are not aligned at the centre of the main beam performance will be dramatically reduced The alignment process requires the elevation angle vertical plane and azimuth angle horizontal plane to be adjusted Antenna assemblies provide a mechanism for independently adjusting in both planes whilst the antenna mounting bracket is securely mounted to the mast Please refer to the instructions provided with the antenna Alignment is achieved by monitoring the receive signal strength indicator RSSI This is provided at the ODU BNC socket in the form of a dc voltage RSSI Voltage phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 6 59 Task 11 Aligning antennas Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Prerequisites for alignment Before starting alignment check that the following requirements have been met The antennas cables and CMUs have been installed at both ends of the link A link planning report is available for example from LINKPlanner It should include predicted RSSI voltage ranges or rece
199. ection switchovers A NOTE If configuration is carried out on site then before the new units are taken to site radio transmission should be inhibited as described in Disabling wireless transmission on page 7 25 This prevents possible interference with the existing operational unit To implement protection on an unprotected link follow this process 1 It is common practice to pre configure the two new CMUs during staging before site installation Perform the following tasks from Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment for each CMU from Task 1 Connecting to the unit on page 6 2 to Task 10 Configuring wireless interface on page 6 47 These tasks may be performed after installation if preferred When performing Task 9 Configuring protection interface on page 6 42 select the option to configure a protected link 2 Check that it is safe to proceed and that all equipment and tools are ready Perform Preparing for installation on page 5 6 3 In the field upgrade the operational CMUs to the latest software version by performing Task 5 Upgrading software version on page 6 24 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installation process summary 10 11 12 13 14 In the field configure the operational CMUs for protected operation by performing Task 9 Configuring protection interface on page 6 42 ANOTE If this is done in advance of installation of the new CMUs the PTP 800 wil
200. ection inside high building Network cable g O PTP 800 ground cable To roof mounted a Building ground system equipment o l Building cable entry port typically at roof level Building To MGB grounding system Equipment area within a larger building To network Lightning Protection Unit LPU phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Grounding and lightning protection In a 1 1 Hot Standby protected end prior to connecting CMUs via the protection interface the front panel ground stud of both CMUs must be connected to a common ground Figure 2 9 Figure 2 9 Grounding and lightning protection inside high building protected end Network cable g O PTP 800 ground cable To roof mounted equipment Building ground system Building cable entry port typically at roof level To MGB grounding system Ug Equipment area within a larger building To network Lightning Protection Units LPUs phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 2 15 Grounding and lightning protection Chapter 2 Planning considerations Power supply considerations Consider the following when planning the power supply to the PTP 800 A means of removing power from the PTP 800 without disrupting other equipment for example a circuit breaker e If the link is protected a means of removing power from one PTP 800 without disrupting the other PTP 800 Any circuit breaker or switch should be labeled e Wiring
201. ed to be hazardous Table 4 130 PTP 800 minimum separation distances ETSI method Band Antenna diameter 0 3 m 0 6 m 0 8 m 1 2 m 1 8 m 1 ft 2 ft 2 5 ft 4 ft 6 ft 6 GHz N A N A N A 1 7m 1 8m 7 and 8 GHz N A 2 0 m 2 2m 2 2m 2 1m 11 GHz N A 1 8m 2 2m 2 0m 1 8m 13 GHz 1 6m 1 4m 1 4m 1 5m 1 4m 15 GHz 1 8 m 1 5 m 1 6 m 1 6 m 1 6 m 18 GHz 2 1m 1 6 m 1 7 m 1 9m 1 6m 23 GHz 2 0 m 1 8 m 2 0 m 2 0m 2 0 m 26 GHz 2 4m 2 0 m 2 3m 2 9m N A 38 GHz 2 4m 2 1m N A N A N A phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 4 97 Radiation hazard assessment Chapter 4 Reference information These separation distances are significantly lower than those calculated by the method specified by the FCC The ETSI method recognises that radiation is distributed across the antenna aperture and is not in reality a point source FCC method Relevant standards North America and EC applicable when working with RF equipment are Calculation ANSI IEEE C95 1 1991 IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields 3 kHz to 300 GHz US FCC limits for the general population See the FCC web site at http www fcc gov and the policies guidelines and requirements in Part 1 of Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations as well as the guidelines and suggestions for evaluating compliance in FCC OET Bulletin 65 Health Canada limits for the general population See the Health Canada web site at http www hc sc gc ca ewh s
202. eeenenenens 6 53 Table 6 13 Step 3 Wireless Configuration attributes ccecececececececececscsesesenenenenenenenees 6 55 Table 6 14 System Configuration attribute ccc cccccecececececececececececececececeesenesesenenenenenens 6 67 Table 6 15 Manual clock GUUS vcs isasccctonsariectsamonsecacerorasycicesccctspiasinaleninasecsensoseeuseviaevsntonee 6 72 Tape oo NIF clock aT OS sea E 6 73 Table 7 1 Procedures performed from each menu Option essssssessesseesseessecerecssecesseesseesseesee 7 5 Table 7 2 System Summary Br OU ES seiras srei srire t nEn E ENEEK NANE E 7 7 Tabl 7 3 ODU Status attribute eS vac ce secs cowsncacsealtesdungapedacadwaxesaheis bircaisenteniuesnoscacedwareaubeoss 7 10 Table 7 4 Transmitter Status attribute values cccccccececeeeecececeeeecececececeeeseecesececneeesesees 7 11 Tabl 7 9 Data Port Status attribute valles s crsirasasaceasercenvonnoanesoneniansenduannicrad Seonesanumineetehonins 7 11 Table 7 6 Management Port Status attribute Values c ccc cecececececececececnenenenenenenenenenenens 7 11 Table 7 7 Wireless Link Status attribute Values ccccccesecsceceeeecececeeeceesecececeseecesecsceeess 7 11 Table 7 8 Transmit Modulation Selection Detail attribute ValUues cece sceeeeceeeeeenes 7 12 Table 7 9 Protection State attribute Values cccccccececeecesececnceenececececeecesececsceseecesecseneees 7 12 Table 7 10 System GIANG ai cucccactscssc
203. eers amine sete Secret te OA eto tert ae rst EEN 6 25 Upgrading software in an operational protected Link eee cece eceeeeeeneneenenenees 6 27 Upgrading to a NEW software version ccccccecececececececececececececececececeeeeeenenenenenenenens 6 28 Toe Gomurio OCU geen ete i en nae oo ie Tn ere een eee Netter ee anne er ee nee eet 6 31 Configuring encryption in an operational protected Link ccc cecec ec eeeececeeeeeenenees 6 31 Conigurng AES ODCTYD ON 1 1 4 ncsinnsowranienconcenuiaiturtueevianeousaniarenboeeperpeurbiracnaracnosninael 6 32 DD E EENE IE E EAEE TA ENEA A AE E A E 6 34 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 vii Contents ie UE i a T N aaa ene E EEE AE EEE EE T E AET 6 34 Protecting access to the summary and status pages cccecececececececececececececececeeees 6 35 Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages sseseesseseesresreseesreseesessessesseseesseserseeseeseesoese 6 36 Configuring generation of SNMP notifications ssesseessesseeseessesseesseeseeseesseeseessesso 6 36 Configuring generation Of email messages esssseesesseesessessesseseessesseseesoeseeseeseeseeo 6 39 Configuring generation of diagnostics GIBTING ssessessessessesseseeseesseseessesesseesseseee 6 40 Task 9 Configuring protection INLET TAC essiirsrsiriessrnririsceriarer rskr tiina nia inir An ETER ERA 6 42 Configuring unprotected links i pa conan tie vesatawscnntiaatadested
204. eight traffic classes QO to Q7 Untagged frames can also be assigned to any of the eight classes Classification by Layer 2 Control Protocol PTP 800 provides a method for classifying Ethernet frames that contain an IEEE 802 1 bridge protocol including STP RSTP PAUSE or the Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP Bridge frames have destination addresses in the range 01 80 c2 00 00 00 to 01 80 c2 00 00 0f GARP frames have destination addresses in the range 01 80 c2 00 00 20 to 01 80 c2 00 00 2f Bridge frames and GARP frames can be separately classified into any of the eight traffic class from QO to Q7 Bridge frames and Garp frames which are tagged will not be classified by the Prority Code Point Fragmentation The PTP 800 Series minimizes latency and jitter for high priority Ethernet traffic by fragmenting Ethernet frames before transmission over the wireless link The fragment size is selected automatically according to channel bandwidth and modulation mode of the wireless link Fragments are reassembled on reception and incomplete Ethernet frames are discarded Traffic is not fragmented in the highest priority traffic class 1 36 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Ethernet bridging Management network IP interface Each PTP 800 CMU contains an embedded management agent with a single IP interface Network management communication is exclusively based on IP and associated h
205. emt pubs radiation 99ehd dhm237 limits limites_e html and Safety Code 6 ICNIRP International Commission on Non Ionizing Radiation Protection guidelines for the general public See the ICNIRP web site at http www icnirp de and Guidelines for Limiting Exposure to Time Varying Electric Magnetic and Electromagnetic Fields FCC OET Bulletin 65 specifies the far field method to calculate power density _ PG Am R Where S Power density W m P Maximum average transmit power capability of the radio Watts G Antenna gain R Distance from point source meters FCC Title 47 Part 1 1310 defines the exposure limit for the general population to be 10 W m 1 mW cm in the frequency range 1500 to 100 000 MHz This defines an exposure time of 30 minutes Higher levels are permitted for shorter periods of exposure Rearranging terms to solve for distance yields 47S PG R phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Radiation hazard assessment Distances from antenna Table 4 131 specifies calculated minimum separation distances for a range of frequency bands and antenna sizes at the peak of the antenna beam At these and greater distances the power density from the RF field is not considered to be hazardous Table 4 131 PTP 800 minimum separation distances FCC method phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Band Antenna diameter 0 3 m 0 6 m 0 8 m 1 2 m 1 8 m 1 ft 2 ft 2 5 ft 4 ft
206. en the IP address of the unit has been reconfigured log in using the new IP address Refer to Logging into the web interface on page 6 6 Access to the CMU can be recovered using Recovery mode as described in Resetting IP and Ethernet configuration to factory defaults on page 7 54 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 3 Configuring quality of service Task 3 Configuring quality of service Configuring QoS To configure the classification of Layer 2 Control Protocol frames and priority encoded Ethernet frames into up to eight traffic classes proceed as follows 1 Select menu option Configuration Bridge Configuration The Bridge Configuration page is displayed Figure 6 9 2 Review and update the quality of service attributes Table 6 5 3 To use IEEE 802 1Q classification rules select Set Default 802 1Q Priority Mappings 4 Ifany attributes have been updated select Submit Updated Values Figure 6 9 Bridge Configuration page Bridge Configuration This page controls the bridging function and classification of tagged Ethernet frames into priorty queues 20 is the lowest priority queue Layer 2 Control Protocol Frames L2CP Queue Mapping cy v OF v Tagged Ethernet Frames wianPrionty po f e f Pe f ea f ea f ps pe f Pr untagged VLAN Priority Queue Mapping G v ao v a2 v E v E v os v E v E v E v
207. ength 2 meters Figure 1 19 In this arrangement the protection cable provides both protection and a data connection for remote management of the inactive unit If local access is required for example during maintenance the protection cable can be removed from the Management port of the CMU Connect the two LAN ports of the out of band protection splitter using either a straight through or a crossed Ethernet cable Figure 1 20 If local access is required a connection can be made via the protection splitter LAN port without effecting the protection interface phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 1 31 1 1 Hot Standby link protection Chapter 1 Product description Figure 1 19 Last hop protected end with protection cable IF cable to Primary ODU IF cable to Secondary ODU Primary CMU secondary CMU aoa aO ua amp 0 0 0 6 0 E F cable D Cat5e protection cable 8 D Cat5e cable for customer network o 9 e Alternative fiber cable for customer network 2 l Customer network equipment for example NodeB or BTS Figure 1 20 Last hop protected end with splitter IF cable to Primary ODU IF cable to Secondary ODU Primary CMU Secondary CMU ao a ao 0 i a a g G 0 0 0 0 CHEE F cable a 0 Cat5e cable for management network 0 CD Catde cable for customer network s ee Alternative fiber cable for customer 8 g network Out of band Q protection amp split
208. enigennerieleakerieseiatediciedoeteantoeniens 6 42 Configuring protected links 5 iiccccssaneuotawinnimeiocmdeneieyeuseceontextnieninaissaretsacoeseureniesiestmnens 6 43 Task LO Conhiguring wireless SS osrisstisuitireriddeni Unna a Ea 6 47 Prerequisites for the Installation Wizard eeccseeeseseresessessecssressressseesseessseesseesseeesees 6 47 Step 1 Configuring equipment parameters ssesseesseseesseesecsseeseessessecssceserseesseeseesso 6 48 Step 2 Configuring radio license parameters eseesseseesesseesessessesseseesoeseeseeseeseeseese 6 51 Step 3 Configuring wireless parameters esssseesesseesesscsseesessesseseeseesseserseeseeseeseese 6 54 Step 4 Confirming installation configuration ssessessessesrosseereseseresrossesresesseeseesesse 6 55 Step 5 Skipping antenna alignment sseesessessesseseesseseeseesseseesseseeseeseesesseesesseeseeseeo 6 57 Step 6 Completing configuration without alignment ssssessesseseessesseseesseseeseeseese 6 58 Toe a a A 6 59 Introduction to antenna alignment sseseesseseesreseesesseeseesesseesesseesesseesessessesseseeseeseesot 6 59 PREPEQUISILGS TOP alignment cxcisrasnconcsesanscucsvacdtcacnotsoncedatresteraeurienentaersuiaenmwonesenevesntesneess 6 60 Algming proteciedantonnas sisrirnisnisrar aarin renr sen ste uv enncesdearsansanabanenreeieeseiercones 6 60 Alhgning a pair of antennas paeescteaneceavdrecacen onenaraniacevedseieicicesinnaarensasaisere
209. enna mounting bracket and ODU are assembled 8 Follow the manufacturer s instructions to attach the assembly to the mast or pole Remote mounting of antenna with a single ODU In the remote mount configuration the antenna and ODU are attached to the mast separately connected to each other via a flexible waveguide The flexible waveguide is designed to isolate vibration and eliminate difficulties caused by misalignment The flexible waveguide must be protected from damage that may be caused by contamination vibration or bending When installing a flexible waveguide observe the following precautions 5 12 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing antenna with a single ODU Unpacking To avoid damage to the waveguide do not unpack it until required When unpacked protect the waveguide from dirt dust or ingress of foreign objects Vibration Flexible waveguides may be damaged if subjected to excessive vibration or excessive bending If a flexible waveguide is installed in a stressed tensile condition vibration should be kept to a minimum as the waveguide rubber jacket may become more susceptible to ozone and general environmental attack Always use the waveguide hangers two hangers should be used for the 900mm 3ft flexible waveguide Bend radius Conform to the bend radii maximum twist and torque settings specified in Flexible waveguide specifications on page 4 41
210. ensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing the IF and ground cables 7 Attach the other end of the LPU ground cable to the grounding bar of the Supporting structure 8 Protect the N type connector at the ODU from the weather by applying self amalgamating and PVC tape as described in Weatherproofing an N type connector on page 5 47 Weatherproofing an N type connector The following procedure should be used to weatherproof the N type connectors fitted to the ODU and LPU ANOTE Before weatherproofing the connectors ensure that the installation has been tested as described in Testing the installation on page 5 63 These tests require connection and disconnection of the IF cables at various places ANOTE N type connectors should be tightened using a torque wrench set to 15 lb in or 1 7 Nm If a torque wrench is not available N type connectors may be finger tightened To weatherproof an N type connector proceed as follows phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 5 47 Installing the IF and ground cables Chapter 5 Installation 1 Ensure the connection is tight A torque wrench should be used if available 2 Wrap the connection with a layer of 19 mm 0 75 inch PVC tape starting 25 mm 1 inch below the connector body Overlap the tape to half width and extend the wrapping to the body of the LPU Avoid making creases or wrinkles 5 48 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing th
211. ent and the software release notes of supported releases 2 Visit the Motorola website at http www motorola com ptp 3 Ask for assistance from the Motorola product supplier 4 Gather information from affected units such as o The IP addresses and MAC addresses o The software releases o The configuration of software features o Any available diagnostic downloads 5 Escalate the problem to Motorola as follows o Either send e mail to support ptp motorolasolutions com o Or call Wireless Broadband Technical Support Repair and service If unit failure is suspected visit http www motorola com ptp support for details of the Return Material Authorization RMA process Warranty Motorola s standard hardware warranty is for one 1 year from date of shipment from Motorola or a Motorola Point to Point Distributor Motorola warrants that hardware will conform to the relevant published specifications and will be free from material defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service Motorola shall within this time at its own option either repair or replace the defective product within thirty 30 days of receipt of the defective product Repaired or replaced product will be subject to the original warranty period but not less than thirty 30 days To register PTP products or activate warranties visit http www motorola com ptp support For warranty assistance contact the reseller or distributor Using non Mo
212. er To disable trap generation enter 0 0 0 0 in the IP Address Enter the port number of either the networked SNMP manager or trap receiver By convention the default port number is 162 The SNMP community string acts like a password between the network management system and the distributed SNMP clients PTP 800 CMUs Only if the community string is configured correctly on all SNMP entities can the flow of management information take place By convention the default value is set to public Enter the port that the SNMP agent is listening to for commands from a management system By convention the default port number is 161 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages Configuring generation of email messages Perform this task to enable the CMU to generate Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP email messages If SMTP is enabled then the CMU will generate email messages to alert the system administrator when certain events occur The CMU may be configured to generate Email messages for the following events Link status change Diagnostic alarms To configure SMTP email messages proceed as follows 1 From the left hand menu select Remote Management The Remote Management page is displayed Figure 6 20 2 Update the SMTP attributes Table 6 9 3 Select Submit Updated Configuration The Configuration Change Reboot dialog is displayed 4
213. er 01010589001 can make it easier to install the CMU in the rack Figure 5 20 Figure 5 20 Rack mounted CMU with a right angled IF cable connector 5 76 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing the CMU Grounding the CMU Ground the CMU to a rack ground bar master ground bar or other suitable ground using a minimum cable cross section of 10 mm 6AWG Figure 2 5 It is a condition of the safety approval that the unit is grounded ANOTE For a protected link ground both CMUs to the same grounding point Figure 2 6 Attach the ground cable to the CMU ground connector Figure 5 21 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 5 77 Installing the CMU Chapter 5 Installation Connecting the CMU to the IF cable Cut any surplus length from the CMU end of the LPU CMU IF cable and fit an N type connector as described in Fitting an N type connector to an IF cable on page 9 39 ANOTE For a protected link with an asymmetric coupler ensure that the following connections are made o The IF cable from the MAIN side of the ODU coupler is connected to the CMU labelled Primary o The IF cable from the STANDBY side of the ODU coupler is connected to the CMU labelled Secondary 5 78 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing the CMU Connecting the CMU power supply Connect the CMU to a minus 48 Volt 48V supply capable of s
214. er 6 Configuration and alignment Figure 6 32 Step 4 Confirm Installation Configuration page step 4 Confirm Installation Below if a summary of the configuration If any of the configuration tems are incorrect please use the Back button and apply your corrections Once the configuration is correct press the Submit Updated Installation Configuration button This will commit the parameters to non volatile memory Installation configuration summary attributes a units Link Link Name cite Name Link ID Antenna Antenna Gain RF Feeder Loss ODU ODU Type IF Cable IF Cable Length Modem Shor Fower Cycle For Recovery Radio License Radio License Identifier Radio License Band Radio License Region Radio License Bandwidth Radio License hlax EIRP Radio License Tx Freg Radio License Rx Freg Radio License hlod Mode Wireless Maximum Transmit Power EIRP Bolinas Ridge to Mount Tamalpa Bolinas Ridge 6690524 35 2 0 0 25GHz TR1006 Hi 25557 25893MH z Disabled o641956L35 26 GHz ETSI 56 MHZ 60 0 25505 000 24577 000 2560AM 0 94 15 0 oO Submit Updated Installation Configuration iai Back phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 10 Configuring wireless interface Step 5 Skipping antenna alignment If the Installation Wizard is being run during pre configuration before site installation then antenna alignment must be deferred until site in
215. er WB3807 Required for a protected link using data over redundant copper fiber with in band management Purchase separately For specification see Protection cable on page 4 54 phn 1478 _012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installation inventories Remote mounted ODU components Remote mounted ODUs require the components listed in Table 4 4 Table 4 4 Inventory for remote mounted ODUs Item Motorola description part number and notes ODU remote mount kit One kit required per remote mounted ODU For part numbers refer to ODU remote mount kit specifications on page 4 30 Flexible waveguide One waveguide required per remote m mounted ODU For part numbers refer to Flexible waveguide specifications on page 4 41 Required for remote mount installations Two hangers are required for one 900mm flexible waveguide For part numbers refer to Flexible waveguide specifications on page 4 41 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 4 9 Installation inventories Chapter 4 Reference information Item Motorola description part number and notes Tapered transition Required for mounting an 11 GHz antenna with taper transition and flexible waveguide For part numbers refer to Flexible waveguide specifications on page 4 41 Other components Table 4 5 Inventory of other components Item Motorola description part number and notes AC to DC power supply convertor Output voltage 48 VDC No mai
216. er indicator The CMU power indicator shows the presence of the DC supply within the CMU Check the state of the CMU power indicator and take action as described in Table 8 1 Table 8 1 CMU power indicator checks CMU power Likely cause and action indicator state Green steady Continue at Check the CMU status indicator on page 8 3 Off The DC supply may be absent or the CMU may be faulty Continue at Check the DC supply to the CMU on page 8 2 Check the DC supply to the CMU Check the DC supply at the CMU using a suitable voltmeter and take action as described in Table 8 2 Table 8 2 DC supply checks when CMU power indicator is off DC supply state Likely cause and action Absent or less than Check the AC supply power converters wiring 40 5 V circuit breakers and fuses as appropriate Reversed polarity The CMU has been damaged Return the CMU to Motorola for repair Correct polarity and The CMU has an internal power supply fault Return within the range 40 5 V the CMU to Motorola for repair to 60 V 8 2 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Connecting to the web management interface Check the CMU status indicator The CMU status indicator shows if the CMU has a hardware fault is booting is operating in recovery or is operating in normal mode Additionally in normal mode it indicates if the wireless link is up or down Check the state of the CMU status indicator and take action
217. erences emphasized in blue text in electronic versions are active links to the references This document is divided into numbered chapters that are divided into sections Sections are not numbered but are individually named at the top of each page and are listed in the table of contents phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 3 Contacting Motorola Contacting Motorola Feedback We appreciate feedback from the users of our documents This includes feedback on the structure content accuracy or completeness of our documents Send feedback to support ptp motorolasolutions com Motorola Point to Point Postal address Motorola Solutions Inc 1303 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg Illinois 60196 U S A URLs Main web site http www motorola com ptp Web support http www motorola com ptp support Email addresses Sales enquiries sales ptpo motorolasolutions com Email support support ptp motorolasolutions com Telephone numbers North America 1 866 961 9288 Latin Central America 420 533 336 946 Europe Middle East or Africa 44 203 0277499 Asia Pacific 420 533 336 946 For full list of Motorola Wireless Broadband Support telephone numbers see http www motorola com ptp support contact 4 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 Contacting Motorola Reporting problems If any problems are encountered when installing or operating this equipment follow this procedure to investigate and report 1 Search this docum
218. erties dialog cccccecececeececececececececeeseneseseeeees 6 4 Figure 6 3 Setting Speed amp Duplex Broadcom adaptor eee ee cece ee necececececececececececeseeees 6 4 Figure O Web interlace Home pago cng ene canaiease ceereeneuaderacteaseenneuedsesgpagndeeenatine cucdesechessasueveendeai 6 6 A ey D O eserves canes EEEE 6 6 Figure 6 6 LAN Configuration page with VLAN disabled ccccecececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaenenes 6 11 Figure 6 7 LAN Configuration page with VLAN enabled ccccceeeeecececececececececeeeeeeees 6 12 Figure 0 o Contry LAN connguratigii accesses anesausedanseconaaseedeniansenanesnianatdansseanaeatdeueeertvereaewsaedes 6 18 Figure G 9 Bridge Coniigurati n Page mi cccsaccomnnerrioesunuriadasmeonotanenrsseenash ones arava AAEE 6 19 Figure 6 10 Software License Key PaCS ccsecescsavercdindssicseiecsecssideessdedadeavetedestasecneiecencemaeeeaieess 6 22 Figure 6 11 Software Version in System Status Page ccccccscesescscececececesescesecsceceeseseeees 6 25 Figure 6 12 Save amp Restore Coniigurati n 0a 6 csi ciccvcieisavepiwardutvaciadeeraeuasanteetiarcanveeriuarencts 6 26 Figure 6 13 Software Upgrade page oesoesseseesseseeseeseeseeseesessessessessesseseessesersoeseesoeseeseeseese 6 29 Figure 6 14 Software Upgrade Confirmation page ssessesseseesseseeseeseesesseesessessesseseeseeseesee 6 30 Figure 6 15 Software Upgrade Complete page eseesseessesseesecs
219. erver Before performing this task ensure that the Enabled Diagnostic Alarms box has been ticked in either the SNMP or SMTP sections of the Remote Management page To configure the generation of diagnostic alarms proceed as follows 1 From the left hand menu select Diagnostic Alarms The Diagnostic Alarms page is displayed Figure 6 21 2 Tick the boxes against the required alarms These alarms are described in Managing alarms on page 7 13 3 Select Submit Updated Configuration phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages Figure 6 21 Diagnostic Alarms page Diagnostic Alarms units ta Alignment Mode Link Name Mismatch Unit Out Of Calibration Encryption Enabled Mismatch SMTP Synchronization Failed Wireless Link Status Wireless Link Disabled Warning Enabled Diagnostiese Data Port Configuration Mismatch Data Port Disabled Warning Data Port Fiber Status Management Port Contiqguration Mismatch Management Port Disabled Warning ODL Status Data Port Status Management Port Status FOC Capacity Check Protection Availabilty Status Protection Configuration Status v Wwireless Receive Signal Status Enabled Diagnostic Protection Alarms Licensed Transmit Capacity Status Data Port Ethernet Speed Status Management Port Ethernet speed Status Protection Intertace Status phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 6 41 Task 9 Configuring protection interface
220. es Configuring generation of SNMP notifications on page 6 36 Configuring generation of email messages on page 6 39 Configuring generation of diagnostics alarms on page 6 40 Configuring generation of SNMP notifications Perform this task to enable the CMU to generate Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP traps If SNMP is enabled then the CMU generates SNMP traps when certain events occur and sends the traps to the network SNMP management agent which notifies the system administrator The CMU may be configured to generate SNMP notifications for the following events Cold start Link status change Diagnostic alarms To configure SNMP notifications proceed as follows 1 From the left hand menu select Remote Management The Remote Management page is displayed Figure 6 20 2 Update the SNMP attributes Table 6 8 3 Select Submit Updated Configuration A NOTE A reboot is required when SNMP State attribute is changed but not when traps are enabled 6 36 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages Figure 6 20 Remote Management page Remote Management HTTP and Telnet HTTP Access Enabled Telnet Access Enabled fom f Wee Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP SNMP State t Desaited Enabled I Cold Start Iw Wireless Link Up Down Iw Management Port Up Down Iw Enabled Diagnostic Alarms SNMP Trap Version SNMP version 1
221. eseeseesresee 4 17 Table 4 14 ODU specifications main frequency Lower 6 GHZ cccececececececeeeeeeeeeenenens 4 20 Table 4 15 ODU specifications main frequency Upper 6 GHZ soessessesssesessessessessesseseeo 4 20 Table 4 16 ODU specifications main frequency 7 GHZ ssessessessesseseesseseesreseesesseesesseesee 4 21 Table 4 17 ODU specifications main frequency 8 GHZ sssessessessessesresseseeseeseeseeseesessessee 4 23 Table 4 18 ODU specifications main frequency 11 GHZ sesseesessessessessessessesseseeseeseeseeo 4 24 Table 4 19 ODU specifications main frequency 13 GHZ sesseesessessessessesseseeseeseeseeseeseeo 4 25 Table 4 20 ODU specifications main frequency 15 GHZ cece cececececececeeeenenenenenenenees 4 26 Table 4 21 ODU specifications main frequency 18 GHZ sesseesesseesessessessessesseseeseeseeseo 4 27 Table 4 22 ODU specifications main frequency 23 GHZ esssseesessessessessessesseseeseeseeseeseo 4 28 Table 4 23 ODU specifications main frequency 26 GHZ sssseesessessessessesseseeseeseeseeseeseo 4 29 Table 4 24 ODU specifications main frequency 38 GHZ ssssssesessessessessesseseeseeseeseeseeseo 4 29 Table 4 25 ODU remote mount kit specifications cesssesseesressressressreessersseeeseresrersreessseesees 4 30 Table 4 26 Antenna specifications for 6 GHz single polarization sesseseessesseseeseesresre 4 32 phn 1
222. ess Receive Signal Status indicates if the receiver is able to demodulate the transmit signal from the remote end of the link If it cannot demodulate the Signal a protection switch may occur in a system configured for 1 1 Hot Standby In a 1 1 Hot Standby configuration this indicates that the Licensed Transmit Capacity is below that of its neighbor In a 1 1 Hot Standby configuration this indicates that the Ethernet Speed of the Data Port is below that of its neighbor phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Managing alarms and events Cause and action This may be due to failure of the link or equipment at the either end of the link Note that a failure trap may not be received if no route is available If this trap is generated when a unit is not protected or not protecting check the configuration of both units and check for alarms on the inactive unit Check whether fault protection switching is enabled In a protected configuration check the configuration of both units This may be due to hardware problems the ODU antenna or CMU It may also be due to incorrect configuration or adverse weather conditions This is probably due toa configuration error or the wrong license being applied to one of the CMUs This is probably due to a configuration error 7 23 Managing alarms and events Chapter 7 Operation SNMP Trap name Description Cause and action managementPortEthernet In a 1 1 Hot Standby Thi
223. ess for protected links csssesseesseessessseseseesseessecsseeesseesseeeseeeseessseesee 5 3 Upgrading an unprotected link to protected cece ce cece ecececececneneneneceececececeaeaeaeass 5 4 Pie O O a E 5 6 Precautions before installation sesnesesseseseesessesrrsesesseserseseesesseseesrsesseseesessesessesersese 5 6 Piorar a POr O a E rE T rene rer rr creer esa ra er eet eee 9 6 Prenar NVO EOT aeeenr cement eeses tn aoa eet eee Cra eer ener ttt ane tine nny Ter enT tamer ee Tatar Ter nr nrc renee Te 5 7 Propoaring TOOS ners iucerianaannreprapeeneayeatasterieanpcivetreerared TEES TEREE EREE NE ETE ERE 5 7 Mstaling antenna re ea I ODU errsenisnrirenai anin Esa EAA EEEE 5 9 Direct mounting of antenna with a single ODU cece cece ecececneneneeeeeeeeeaeceaeeeees 5 10 Remote mounting of antenna with a single ODU ssesessessessessesseseesseseeseeseesesseeseesese 9 12 Installing antenna with two ODUS and a coupler c cece cece ec scecneneneeecececececececeeeaeaeess 5 24 Direct mounting of antenna with two ODUS and coupler sssseesesseesessessesseseesseseee 5 25 Remote mounting of antenna with two ODUs and coupler seessssessessessesseseesseseeo 5 30 Installing the IF and ground cables ss s sssesisiisciresenssiidisikiivieninn diaserie aa 5 37 Pen ara a E ro a E E A E AE AEE E A E 5 39 Fitting an N type connector to an IP cablesssiesiisissroi aen inaia aE 5 39 Connecting the ODU to t
224. ess transmission If so select Mute Transmitter The Transmitter attribute changes to Muted Set the Protection attribute to Protection 1 1 The Protection Configuration page is displayed with protection attributes for either a primary unit Figure 6 24 or a secondary unit Figure 6 25 Review and update the Protection Configuration attributes Table 6 10 Select Submit Updated configuration phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 6 43 Task 9 Configuring protection interface Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment 6 44 A NOTE If a CMU is set to primary when a coupler is used it must be connected to the ODU on the MAIN side of the coupler This is especially important for an asymmetric coupler where the performance of the MAIN unit will be enhanced In this case Primary Recovery Period should be set toa non zero value to maximize the use of the Main Path ANOTE If antenna protection is used and the two antennas are not the same then the CMU connected to the more powerful antenna must be the primary In this case for optimum link performance Primary Recovery Period must also be set to a non zero value Figure 6 24 Protection Management page primary with protection enabled Protection Configuration Do not enable the transmitter unless Itis safe for the ODU to radiate Attributes CC O funis Tranamitter Muted Enable Transmitter Attributes a funis Protection gt Disabled Protection 1 1 Fault Pro
225. esseesseeeseees 4 30 Anenii Mess Ble 61S es ON oera a N A TON a ee ne Oe 4 31 Antenna wind velocity Mii sss 00g cn encqussuneaaenoesderenaneresenteavnrenenuchorniadiateeemranatasennenness 4 31 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Contents Antenna specifications Lower 6 GHz and Upper 6 GHZ cc ccc cceceececceeeeeeeenseees 4 32 Antenna specifications 7 GHz and 8 GHZ seessseessesssessssrsssesssesesosessesssesssessssessoe 4 33 Antenna specifications 11 GHZ sssesseseessseseresssssesssrssssecsessceseesesessereesseeseseeseesereese 4 34 Antenna specilications 19 GHZ sicscassavecsiovceracievaaiecenseawenesmeestndbecncantansdentedeersuamernoanes 4 35 Antenna specications 19 GHZ resser n sarai A 4 36 Antenna specifications 18 GHZ ssssssreessossssossssosssrsssersssessssoseseoeesssessssossssseessoo 4 37 Antenna specifications 23 GHZ cere ws rence cuevsahbeeantestanscarsoeaenelnicwey rS ARTE 4 38 Antenna specifications 26 GHZ sssessesessesesreeesssssssereesseesesscessesesessersesseereseessesereese 4 39 Antenna specifications 38 GHZ sssssesrssesseessrecesssecssseressreressecssseeeseeeeeseeeresseeesseeees 4 40 Fl xible waveguide specifications cracecaccuvseeseziaveceseticcaskentueascdecsensseneaaveeeiestinsaisipuusasaiaveesinces 4 41 Waveguide flanges ssersprrieiiririitt etrr trid uenn E rE EEEE EEEE EENET EEE 4 41 Flexible waveguide specifications 6 GHZ s
226. esseseeseeseeseesee 1 33 Grounding and lightning protection for protected ends sseesessessesseseesseseeseeseeseso 1 34 IAA TV Dr eers a E EEE AE 1 35 Customer NETWOLK essorer risos o aiee nnr ar FE RNE EEEF Erian 1 35 Waa ae A E e AEE A I A E ORE OE S AENA A S E NE OE E NR ETEN 1 37 nsira Ea E ratoa E EAE E AEST EIE E E SAE T ET IE ANTEE A ET TE T 1 40 SDE aioe E E PEE E TE A E E E E A E ees 1 44 Dom a E A E E E E S 1 44 T a E E O E E 1 44 D a E N E E et smn yr Teen re ty atte re rere tey 1 44 Coni inur on Da E eE EE E A 1 44 UI E E A E tinue eandacacuses 1 45 EuT e E nr rr tren rrr tt 1 46 OC UPO a ecrire Ee EEE en tee EE tobe EEEE EEr 1 47 are coop P E E P E E AE EE EP E E E E A PE T A 1 48 E A EAA E E E T 1 49 a I OE E E A de eee a 1 49 i phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 Contents Uparading toa Protecied Mnk sic crpsussuicunersionatiaceanereresatecueeian toutes EREA AA 1 51 Chapter 2 Planning considerations ssssss2s2222222202u2022202202u220u20uun0unnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 2 1 EE ee E A E A E A 2 2 Dotnet cece dnc enna ab EO A 2 2 E E E aE NE E E E E E 2 2 Mokum IF eane leno a ease cees ph usr ees ie pen saranen nea eeoaeeeacss dee eaaanes 2 3 PIPETTE eE E E 2 3 Pe Unk OW errer aranin n a AE EEEE E RER 2 5 Grounding and Patera proleti sirsiran rnn AE 2 7 SENATE LENS EEEE P E EPEE AE I EEEE E S TE AE E EA E I A E A TE 2 7 JIS oh aH ProrecHion OE eegee eE e EEE 2 7 General protection requirements
227. example Testing the installation This example shows typical DTF return loss in a good installation The distances from the test equipment to first LPU marker M2 and then the second LPU marker M3 are clearly shown The cable between them shows no discontinuity There are two plots Figure 5 13 is a plot of DTF return loss before the ODU is connected The final peak marker M1 is the position of the cable open circuit Figure 5 14 is a plot of DTF return loss after the ODU is connected The final peak remains in the same position but is now reduced in amplitude because less signal is reflected as a consequence of the better match of the ODU Figure 5 13 DTF plot for a 17 meter cable with no ODU 0 M1 5 03 dB 18 56 m Distance to fault LPU 17M M2 13 11 dB 63 m M3 17 41 dB 17 83 m i i o AANA Resolution 517 Std Date 11 10 2009 Model S311D phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Ik aa NN by ne A 10 0 12 5 15 0 Distance 0 0 25 0 Meter CAL ON COAX CW OFF Channel N A Time 04 49 26 Ins Loss 0 135dB m Serial 00936036 Prop Vel 0 850 5 71 Testing the installation Chapter 5 Installation Figure 5 14 DTF plot for a 17 meter cable with ODU connected Distance to fault ODU LPU 17M 0 M1 16 41 dB 18 70 m M2 13 08 dB 63 m M3 17 50 dB 17 83 m My LAAT Oe T AA 60 Lid l MIAN At A A Mui w ih M2 T nih
228. f Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm Table 4 71 256QAM 0 91 Yes 368 6 63 2 58 1 56 1 22 14 256QAM 0 80 No 236 6 59 8 57 8 22 Yes 347 1 65 1 58 1 56 1 22 14 128QAM 0 82 Yes 206 8 69 4 66 1 64 9 24 14 256QAM 0 80 128QAM 0 82 Yes 303 5 67 8 64 5 63 2 24 14 64QAM 0 88 Yes 181 9 71 8 68 4 67 1 24 14 Yes 299 2 70 8 67 3 66 1 24 14 64QAM 0 82 32QAM 0 92 No 150 7 70 7 69 5 26 14 32QAM 0 84 0 79 No No 202 7 152 4 70 2 74 2 68 9 73 26 28 14 14 Chapter 4 Reference information 16QAM 0 79 No 103 8 75 9 74 7 28 14 Upper 6 GHz ETSI with 60 MHz channel separation 16QAM 8 PSK 0 80 78 9 77 6 76 3 28 14 8PSK 0 80 115 8 75 9 74 7 28 14 QPSK 0 80 92 5 30 14 QPSK 0 80 77 1 30 14 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Capacity transmit power and sensitivity 7 GHz Table 4 72 7 GHz ETSI with 7 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 128QAM 0 76 Yes 34 4 76 4
229. f the status of the wireless link and associated equipment Figure 7 4 System Summary page system Summary Attributes A Link Mame Clawton to Tavistock Site Mame Tavistock Elapsed Time Indicator D6 52 14 hh mm 28 System Clock 15 Mar 2011 15 59 33 The System Summary page displays any uncleared system alarms below the System Clock attribute Whenever system alarms are outstanding a yellow warning triangle is displayed on the navigation bar For more information refer to Managing alarms on page 7 13 7 6 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Web based management A NOTE Password protection can be extended to cover the System Summary page For more information see Protecting access to the summary and status pages on page 6 35 The attributes of the System Summary page are described in Table 7 2 Table 7 2 System Summary attributes Attribute Wireless Link Status Link Name Site Name Elapsed Time Indicator System Clock Status attributes phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Meaning Current status of the wireless link A green background with status text Up means that the point to point link is established A red background with suitable status text for example Searching indicates that the link is not established The name of the PTP link as set in the Installation wizard The Link Name must be the same at both sites as it is used to establish a connection
230. figuration and alignment 6 52 Figure 6 28 Step 2 Radio License Configuration page FCC adaptive modulation step 2 Enter details of the Radio License Radio license data entry Radio License Identitier G61 95eLS Radio License Band 18 GHz Pe Radio License Region FEC hni Radio License Bandyidth 40 MHz w Radio License Modulation Selection Adaptive Modulation O Fixed Modulation Radio License Max Mod Mode Radio License Min Mod Mode PSK 0 50 Ww Radio License Max EIRP 60 0 Radio License Tx Freq i 0192 500 Radio License Rix Freq 19202 500 Aa Back Figure 6 29 Step 2 Radio License Configuration page ETSI adaptive modulation step 2 Enter details of the Radio License Radio license data entry a vae O funis Radcid EE E 56 1958L3 Radio License Band 18 GHz w Radio License Region ETSI oa Radio License Channel Separation 13 75 MHz wyt Radio License Modulation Selection Adaptive Modulation Fixed Modulation Radio License Ret Modulation b42 4M 0 82 wy Radio License Max EIRP 90 0 Radio License Tx Freq 1 5192 500 Radio License Rx Freq 49202500 lt 0 Back phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 10 Configuring wireless interface Table 6 12 Step 2 Radio License Configuration attributes Attribute Radio License Identifier Radio License Band
231. figuration attributes Table 6 11 Select Next Figure 6 26 Step 1 Equipment Configuration page step 1 Enter equipment details Equipment configuration data entry Link Link Name Bolinas Ridge to hount Tamalpais Site Name Bolinas Ridge Antenna Antenna Gain RF Feeder Loss ODU ODU Status ODU Type 26GHz TR1008 Hi 25557 25693MH Z ODU Serial R30090928 ODU Tx Power hax 25 0 ODU Tx Power Min 2 0 IF Cable IF Cable Length fol Modem Short Power Cycle For Recovery Disabled Enabled Next I 6 48 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 10 Configuring wireless interface Table 6 11 Step 1 Equipment Configuration attributes Attribute Link Link Name Site Name Antenna Antenna Gain RF Feeder Loss ODU ODU Status ODU Type ODU Serial ODU Tx Power Max ODU Tx Power Min IF Cable phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Value Enter a meaningful name for the PTP link It is used to establish a connection with the PTP 800 at the other link end site The Link Name must be the same at both ends of the link Enter a descriptive name for the site together with any additional notes This is used for reference only Enter the antenna gain dBi as specified in Antenna specifications on page 4 31 Enter the loss dB in the feeder waveguide between the ODU and antenna including loss of couplers This should be zero for a direct mount configurati
232. figuration of an installed link In general configuration changes can be completed without a reboot Configuration pages include controls relating to the management agent IP interface the Ethernet interfaces quality of service at the wireless interface security passwords and AES keys 1 44 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide System management SNMP The management agent supports fault and performance management by means of an SNMP interface The management agent is compatible with SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c using the following MIBs PTP 800 enterprise MIB The system group and the interfaces group from MIB II RFC 1213 The interfaces group and the ifXTable from RFC 2233 The dotidBase group and the dotldBasePortTable group from the Bridge MIB RFC 1493 The PTP 800 enterprise MIB is available for download in the application software package from http www motorola com ptp software SNMP must be enabled for use by means of the SNMP State attribute in the web based interface Activation of SNMP in PTP 800 requires a reboot of the CMU The web based interface must be used to configure the destination IP address for SNMP notifications and to enable or disable generation of each supported SNMP notification Supported notifications are as follows Cold start Link up Link down Link name mismatch Alignment mode Unit out of calibration Encryption enabled mismatch Data port disabled warning
233. fing kit Quantity per kit 1 Kit contains 6 reels of self amalgamating tape 2 reels of 19mm wide PVC tape and 1 reel of 50mm wide PVC tape wily amp Th N type connector Quantity per kit 4 To fit CNT 400 cable Use crimp tool part number 66010063001 Quantity per kit 50 4 6 phn 1478 _012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Protected link components Installation inventories Links with 1 1 Hot Standby protection require the components listed in Table 4 3 Table 4 3 Inventory for protected links I tem Antenna example with single ODU fitted Outdoor unit ODU Compact modem unit CMU kit Lightning protection unit LPU end kit CNT 400 coaxial cable 50 Ohm IF cable Hoisting Grip for CNT 400 cable Coaxial cable installation assembly kit for CNT 400 cable Cable grounding kits for 1 4 and 3 8 cable Crimp tool for N type connector phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Motorola description part number and notes If antenna protection is required four antennas are required per protected link For details see Table 4 1 Four ODUS are required per protected link For details see Table 4 1 Four CMUs are required per protected link For details see Table 4 1 Four kits are required per protected link total eight LPUs For details see Table 4 1 Protected links require twice the quanity of IF cable as unprotected links as each ODU
234. following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 3 11 Motorola Solutions Inc end user license agreement Chapter 3 Legal information THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Portions of this code are copyright c 2001 2002 Cambridge Broadband Ltd All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retai
235. follows 1 From the left hand menu select Configuration The System Configuration page is displayed Figure 7 8 If the encryption attributes are not displayed or if the Encryption Key attribute is set to None see Configuring AES encryption on page 6 32 Update the Encryption Key attribute Select Submit Updated System Configuration The Configuration Change Reboot dialog is displayed Select Reboot Wireless Unit The Reboot Confirmation dialog is displayed Select OK The reboot progress message is displayed On completion the unit restarts with AES encryption enabled using the new key phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Managing security Protected link This procedure must be performed for all units When upgrading each pair of units then either the web interface can be opened simultaneously for each CMU or the remote system can be configured and then the local system configured A NOTE Before changing encryption keys check that no alarms are outstanding for the units to be upgraded See Managing alarms on page 7 13 It is expected that this procedure will normally take place from an initial status of Primary to Primary especially for an asymmetric coupler or for a protected antenna when the inactive unit has a lower capacity To change the AES encryption key for a 1 1 protected link proceed as follows 1 Disable local and remote protection switching as descr
236. formation Table 4 120 38 GHz ETSI with 7 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 128QAM 0 76 Yes 34 4 74 4 69 7 68 3 16 6 64QAM 0 82 Yes 30 76 8 72 2 70 9 16 32QAM 0 87 No 24 6 74 4 73 2 20 16QAM 0 88 Yes 20 81 7 77 6 76 3 20 8 PSK 0 86 No 14 7 79 4 78 1 20 Table 4 121 38 GHz ETSI with 14 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 128QAM 0 76 Yes 71 71 4 66 6 65 2 16 6 64QAM 0 82 Yes 61 8 73 7 69 1 67 8 16 32QAM 0 87 No 50 7 71 4 70 1 20 16QAM 0 88 Yes 41 3 78 6 74 5 73 3 20 8 PSK 0 86 No 30 4 76 3 75 20 QPSK 0 88 Yes 10 88 4 23 QPSK 0 86 Yes 20 3 85 3 23 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Table 4 122 38 GHz ETSI with 28 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 296QAM 0 80 Yes 170 5 66 1 59 2 57 2 14 6 128QAM 0 84
237. four legs 11GHz spacer length 27mm 18 GHz 23 GHz and 26 GHz spacer length 7 75mm phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 31 Installing antenna with two ODUs and a coupler Chapter 5 Installation 4 Check that the circular transition on the coupler is correctly aligned for remote mount bracket polarity vertical or horizontal If necessary rotate the circular transition according to the manufacturer s instructions 6 Take note of the word TOP embossed in the casting ensure this edge is upper most when attached to the antenna 5 32 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing antenna with two ODUs and a coupler 7 Remove the protective film from the coupler remote mount port TO or 9 g j a a a 8 Apply silicone grease to the O ring of the remote mount transition f 7 es 9 Fit the coupler to the remote mount bracket by following this sequence t e Initially hand tighten two of the diagonally opposed M8 bolts with the Allen Key supplied in the kit e Using the latch clamp clip the same two corners e Repeat the above on the remaining two diagonally opposed bolts and clips e Torque down all four M8 bolts to 18Nm phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 33 Installing antenna with two ODUs and a coupler Chapter 5 Installation Assembling the flexible waveguide hangers Assemble the hangers as described in Assembling the flexible wavegui
238. from the power source to the PTP 800 should be sized accordingly All supply wiring should be to national standards and best practice A rack mounted power supply should be grounded in accordance with national standards and best practice For more information refer to AC to DC converter specifications on page 4 15 A 4 Amp fuse or similar protection device must be provided between the 48 volt supply source and the PTP 800 CMU Always ensure that the 48V supply is turned off before attempting any service on the PTP 800 The CMU ODU is positive ground and the DC power supply or battery must also be positive ground or isolated Figure 2 10 Alternative supply arrangements PTP 800 Ground point PTP800 To Master Ground Bar MGB or Rack Ground Bar RGB PTP800 Power Connector Pin 1 IEI Pin number Function 7 1 48V wW Alternative supply arrangements 2 ov 3 Not Connected AC Input 4 hassi 100 240V 50 60Hz a egroune AC DC Converter Motorola part WB3622 Isolating device 48 V Power system 4 amp fuse phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Data network planning Data network planning Management mode Decide how the PTP 800 will be managed For a single PTP 800 the default mode is out of band local management mode the management agent can be reached only from the Management port of the CMU I
239. gement Diagnostics Plotter Change Password License Key Properties Reboot 7 2 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Web based management To maintain security users must explicitly log out of the web interface at the end of a session The System Administration menu options are not password protected until a password has been set For more information see Task 7 Setting passwords on page 6 34 A NOTE If there is no user activity for a set period of time the system administrator is automatically logged off To change the automatic logout time period or to disable automatic logout see Changing the log out timer on page 7 39 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 7 3 Web based management Chapter 7 Operation Menu navigation bar All web pages contain the menu navigation bar on the left hand side Figure 7 3 The menu is used to navigate to other web pages The currently selected option is always highlighted with a light blue background Figure 7 3 System Administration menu with all submenus opened Home Status a System Administration a Configuration LAN Configuration Bridge Configuration SFP Configuration Save And Restore Protection Protected Link a Statistics Detailed Counters Installation Wizard Software Upgrade Remote Management Diagnostic Alarms a Diagnostics Plotter CSV Download Change Password License Key Properties Reboot A NOTE The menu opt
240. gement PTP 800 provides a dedicated management channel over the wireless link for locally generated management traffic similar to the out of band management mode Ethernet frames received at the Data port are classified into eight traffic classes one of which is assigned to management traffic for transmission at the wireless port Source address learning If Local Packet Filtering is enabled the management agent learns the location of end stations from the source addresses in received management frames The agent filters transmitted management frames to ensure that the frame is transmitted at the Ethernet data or management port or over the wireless link as appropriate If the end station address is unknown then management traffic is transmitted at the Ethernet port and over the wireless link In out of band local management mode management frames are not transmitted over the wireless link and so address learning is not active phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 1 39 Ethernet bridging Chapter 1 Product description Wireless link down alert The PTP 800 Series provides an optional indication of failure of the wireless link by means of a brief disconnection of the Copper data port or the Fiber data port The Ethernet disconnection occurs at both ends of the link even for a unidirectional loss of the wireless link The Ethernet disconnection normally occurs within 50 ms of loss of the wireless link The Wireless link down alert can be use
241. gout Timer 60 Minutes Distance Units Metric 2 Imperial Use Long Integer Comma Formatting C Disabled Enabled Popup Help Disabled Enabled Apply Properties phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 7 39 Managing performance Chapter 7 Operation Managing performance Checking system statistics and counters Perform this task to check system statistics and counters 1 From the left hand menu select Statistics The System Statistics and Counters page is displayed Figure 7 13 2 Review the statistics and counters Table 7 13 A NOTE To enable or disable the display of commas in long integers for example 1 234 567 select Properties from the menu and update the Use Long Integer Comma Formatting attribute A NOTE Transmit power receive power vector error and link loss are presented as an array of four elements These elements represent the maximum mean minimum and latest values respectively The maximum mean and minimum are calculated over a running one hour period A NOTE The frame counter attributes each contain a number in parentheses this shows the number of frames received since the last page refresh 7 40 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Managing performance Figure 7 13 System Statistics and Counters page System Statistics and Counters Attributes CC System Statistics Transmit Power 60 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 dBm Receive Power 90 0 90 0 9
242. hat the security parameters have been zeroized Select Reboot The Reboot Confirmation dialog is displayed 4 Select OK The reboot progress message is displayed On completion the CMU restarts Figure 7 23 Zeroize Security Parameters dialog The page at http 169 254 1 1 says amp re vou sure vou want to Zeroize the Critical Security Parameters bank Cancel Downgrading PTP 800 software To downgrade to an older version of PTP 800 software Carefully record the existing configuration of the link Delete all configuration data as described in Erasing configuration on page 7 Jo Load the older software image as described in Upgrading software image on page 7 53 Re install using the Installation Wizard and Configuration pages 7 56 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Restoring the operational configuration Restoring the operational configuration Restoring the configuration file Perform this task to restore the operational configuration of the unit The save and restore feature allows the system administrator to save and restore the operational configuration of the units Motorola recommends that the configuration should be saved immediately after a successful link installation and immediately before a software upgrade In the unlikely event that a unit has to be replaced in the field the replacement unit can be reconfigured by restoring the saved configuration
243. he IF and ground cables Perform this task to install the IF cable connection from the ODU to the CMU and to provide grounding and lightning protection for the installation For a protected link perform this task separately for each CMU ODU pair in the installation This task consists of the following procedures Preparing IF cables on page 5 39 Fitting an N type connector to an IF cable on page 5 39 Connecting the ODU to the top LPU on page 5 44 Weatherproofing an N type connector on page 5 47 Hoisting the main IF cable on page 5 51 Installing and grounding the main IF cable on page 5 55 Making an IF cable ground point on page 5 57 Installing and grounding the IF cable at building entry on page 5 61 The IF and ground cable installation must meet the requirements defined in Grounding and lightning protection on page 2 7 To provide effective protection against lightning induced surges grounding cables must be installed without drip loops and pointing down towards the ground To ensure that IF connections are not damaged by water ingress all outdoor IF connectors must be protected from the weather with self amalgamating and vinyl tape Do not connect or disconnect the IF cable when the 48 V supply is applied to the CMU Always ensure the lightning protection units are connected the correct way round Figure 5 2 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 37 Installing the IF and ground cables Figure 5 2 Correct
244. he antenna transition waveguide and RMK flanges for each frequency variant Table 4 44 Antenna transition waveguide and RMK flanges Frequency antoand A O ae nik Wave flange transition flange flange flange guide flanges antenna ODU size 6 GHz PDR70 n a UDR70 PDR70 UDR70 WR137 6 GHz CPR137G n a CPR137G PDR70 UDR70 WR137 7 GHz PDR84 n a UDR84 PBR84 UBR84 WR112 8 GHz PDR84 n a UDR84 PBR84 UBR84 WR112 11 GHz PDR100 UDR100 UBR120 PBR120 UBR120 WR75 PBR120 13 GHz PBR120 n a UBR120 PBR120 UBR120 WR75 15 GHz PBR140 n a UBR140 PBR140 UBR140 WR62 18 GHz PBR220 n a UBR220 PBR220 UBR220 WR42 23 GHz PBR220 n a UBR220 PBR220 UBR220 WR42 26 GHz PBR220 n a UBR220 PBR220 UBR220 WR42 38 GHz PBR320 n a UBR320 PBR320 UBR320 WR28 These flanges are used for both Lower 6 GHz and Upper 6 GHz 4 42 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Flexible waveguide specifications Waveguide flange diagrams Waveguide flanges are illustrated in Figure 4 2 Lower and Upper 6 GHz Figure 4 3 7 to 15 GHz Figure 4 4 18 to 38 GHz and Figure 4 5 11 GHz tapered transition Figure 4 2 Waveguide flanges 6 GHz RMK Side Antenna Side Flange Flange 6 GHz 6 GHz CPR137G Note that the CPR137G has the same overall dimensions as the PDR70 but with a shallower groove depth phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 4 43 Flexible waveguide specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Figure 4 3
245. he proper location on the cable before attaching the connector Allow a sufficient length of cable leader to reach the antenna connector when cable hoisting and attachment of the grip handle is completed Hold the heel with one hand and firmly slide the other hand along the grip to tighten it aN Grip handle Grip heel phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing the IF and ground cables 3 Crimp the clamp with Andrew crimping tool 243333 at each hoisting grip clamp location Using the hoist line A WARNING Maintain tension on the hoisting grip during hoisting Loss of tension can cause dangerous movement of the cable and result in injury or death to personnel on or near the tower Also do not release tension on the grip until after the cable has been fastened to the tower members Attach the hoist line to the grip Figure 5 4 Tie the cable leader to the hoist line so that the leader does not dangle Apply tension slowly to the hoist line allowing the hoisting grip to tighten uniformly on the cable Hoist the main IF cable up to the ODU phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 53 Installing the IF and ground cables Chapter 5 Installation Figure 5 4 Using the hoist line N type connector Minimum leader 1 5m Kf 5 ft Cable hoist 5 54 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing the IF an
246. he top LPU cccssronnainaciecevcasiwesieesneneacenssemirnaeeesticesteaverecnaens 5 44 Weatherproofing an N type cConnector sssesesseesessessessessesseseeseeseeseesseserseeseeseeseesees 5 47 Hoiing he main Naat etoile cee ene ee renee E 9 51 Installing and grounding the main IF Cable cece cece ene cececececececececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 95 Makngan IF canle ground poini acersnarre Ore Rete ata REE 5 57 Installing and grounding the IF cable at building eENtry cece ce cee ec ee eeeeeee es 5 61 Testing the installation oneaandieryunspoynexcesentantsvenseecsentamueniusaureessireslovis vensiereontedionsiagauresrentantuniars 5 63 Recommended pre DOwer TESS sississcrssrissrsrosiasiidtai oskust ank dhar ahina deviant asiri irasaid bidan 5 63 Tesle nE arenie ierra rE EEEE EE 5 63 BE gs Bell G2 TET 0 RAEI EEE E A NE E E O E EE E E O E E E ET 5 64 TO TEENA 5 65 Measuring distance t fault gonsicnaanasagusaevgntenauianiahesaneecdewecrswnsnaebentadantriectasteniatmecneciweswes 5 70 a E a E E A E EAA A 5 73 Maximum operating ambient temperature for the CMU cece cecececececeeeeeeeeeeees 9 73 Operation of CMU in a Restricted Access LOCAtION ccccc ccc eccececececceceeeeeeeeeeusesees 5 73 Ponne Ee U a E A 5 74 vi phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Contents eT EN ATE Ero er E E T E E E A AEA 5 77 Connecing the CMU to the IF Cae sesiis enceccnvcaiccyesdtoeeneatvearaccensenentaeeebineneianenns 5 78 Connec
247. hen auto negotiation enabled Maximum frame size bytes 9600 Table 4 125 Fiber data port specifications Feature Specification Ethernet Speed 1000 Base SX 1000 Base LX Requires upgrade kit Auto negotiation advertisement options 1000 Mbit s Full Duplex Forced configuration options None Auto MDI MDIX Not applicable Maximum frame size bytes 9600 4 90 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Data network Table 4 126 Management port specifications Feature Ethernet Speed Specification 100 Base T Auto negotiation advertisement options 100 Mbit s Full Duplex Forced configuration options Auto MDI MDIX Maximum frame size bytes Ethernet bridging 10 Mbit s Full Duplex 100 Mbit s Full Duplex 10 Mbit s Full Duplex Enabled when auto negotiation enabled 2000 The PTP 800 conforms to the Ethernet bridging specifications listed in Table 4 127 Table 4 127 Ethernet bridging specifications Feature Frame types Service type Service classes for bridged traffic QoS Classification Scheduling phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Specification Ethernet IEEE 802 3 2008 C VLAN IEEE 802 1Q 2005 S VLAN IEEE 802 1ad 2005 Transparent Ethernet bridging equivalent to Ethernet private line EPL 8 classes Out of band management mode 7 Classes In band management mode Layer 2 based on the priority code point PCP in the outermost VLAN tag strict prior
248. http www motorola com ptp support This web page generates a new license key that must be installed on the CMU Capacity upgrades become active as soon as the license key is validated There is no need to reboot the CMU and the upgrade process does not involve a service interruption Once applied the capacity upgrade is bound to a single CMU and is not transferrable phn 1478 _012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide System management For more information see Restoring the operational configuration on page 7 57 Upgrading to a protected link A single CMU link may be upgraded to a protected link The method for upgrading an existing CMU to one of a pair at a protected end and adding a second CMU is described in Upgrading an unprotected link to protected on page 5 4 No special licenses are required for a protected link but each of the CMUs providing the protected link must be individually licensed at the capacity of the link phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 1 51 System management Chapter 1 Product description 1 52 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 Chapter 2 Chapter 2 Planning considerations This chapter provides information to help the user to plan a PTP 800 link The following topics are described in this chapter Link planning on page 2 2 Grounding and lightning protection on page 2 7 Data network planning on page 2 17 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 2 1 Link planning Chapter 2 Plan
249. i 23011 23325 MHz 01010210017 B4 Lo 22086 22386 MHz 01010210018 B4 Hi 23318 23618 MHz PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide ODU specifications 26 GHz ODU specifications Motorola can supply the ODUs listed in Table 4 23 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the 26 GHz band frequency range 24 25 26 50 GHz Table 4 23 ODU specifications main frequency 26 GHz Motorola Part Number 01010403003 Standard Sub ETSI band Sub band frequency Transmit and receive Spacing 24549 24885 MHz 01010403004 01010403005 01010403006 01010403007 01010403008 B1 Lo B1 Hi B2 Lo B2 Hi B3 Lo B3 Hi 29997 25893 MHz 24829 25165 MHz 29837 26173 MHz 29109 25445 MHz 1008 MHz 26117 26453 MHz 01010403001 01010403002 FCC B1 Lo B1 Hi 24250 24450 MHz 800 MHz 29050 25250 MHz ODU specifications 38 GHz Motorola can supply the ODUs listed in Table 4 24 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the 38 GHz band frequency range 37 39 5 GHz Table 4 24 ODU specifications main frequency 38 GHz Motorola Part Number Standard Sub FCC band Sub band frequency Transmit and receive Spacing 38595 38805 MHz 01010433002 01010433003 01010433004 01010433005 01010433006 01010433007 01010433008 B1 Lo B1 Hi B2 Lo B2 Hi B3 Lo B3 Hi 39295 39505 MHz 38795 39005 MHz 39495 39705 MHz 38995 39205 MHz 39695 39905 MHz
250. ibed in Enabling and disabling fault protection on page 7 33 Force a protection switch at the local end of the wireless link as described in Forcing protection switches on page 7 31 so that the link is operating between a primary and a secondary unit Change AES Encryption keys for both inactive PTP 800 units as defined in Unprotected link on page 7 36 If an incorrect encryption key is entered at the remote end then it may be necessary to go to the remote end to correct the encryption key Force a simultaneous protection switch at both ends of the wireless link as described in Forcing protection switches on page 7 31 Check that the link is operating correctly using the new encryption key Change AES Encryption keys for both newly inactive PTP 800 units as defined in Unprotected link on page 7 36 Check the System Status page for encryption alarms Figure 7 11 If any are displayed investigate and correct the encryption configuration Force a simultaneous protection switch at both ends of the wireless link as described in Forcing protection switches on page 7 31 Check that the link is operating correctly using the new encryption keys Force a protection switch at the local end of the link so that the link is running Primary to Primary and check that the link is operating correctly This confirms that the new encryption key is the same for all four units Re enable local and remote protection switching as described in Enab
251. icrowave User Guide CMU specifications AC to DC converter specifications This section describes the AC to DC converter that is available from Motorola For details of alternative power supply arrangements refer to Power supply considerations on page 2 16 The PTP 800 AC to DC converter conforms to the specifications listed in Table 4 10 Table 4 10 AC to DC converter specifications Category Input range Output voltage Maximum output power Line frequency Inrush current Input current Power conversion efficiency Electromagnetic compatibility Safety ground leakage current Hold up time Overvoltage protection Overcurrent protection Thermal protection Waterproof Temperature phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Specification 90 to 264 V ac wide range Single output 48 V dc nominal 80 W 47 to 63 Hz 40 A maximum at 264 V ac cold start 25 C 1 8 A maximum 85 typical FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A EN55022 CISPR 22 Class A 3 5 mA maximum at 60 Hz 254 V ac input 10 ms minimum at full load at 90 264 V ac 53 60 V latching type recycle ac to reset Output short circuit protection automatic recovery Output will latch off IP20 33 C 27 F to 55 C 131 F ODU specifications Chapter 4 Reference information ODU specifications This section contains specifications of the outdoor units ODUs that are available from Motorola for PTP 800 installations ODU dimensions and weight The PTP 800 ODU
252. igher layer transport and application protocols The default IP address of the management agent is 169 254 1 1 The PTP 800 does not require use of supplementary serial interfaces In a 1 1 protection scheme each CMU contains a separate management agent MAC address The management agent end station MAC address is recorded on the underside of the enclosure The MAC address is not configurable by the user VLAN membership The management agent can be configured to transmit and receive either untagged priority tagged C tagged IEEE 802 1Q or S tagged IEEE 801 ad frames S tagged frames must be single tagged in other words an S tag with no encapsulated C tag The VLAN ID can be 0 priority tagged or in the range 1 to 4094 Out of band management PTP 800 supports an end to end out of band management mode in which the management agent can be reached from the management port at the local CMU and assuming that the wireless link is established the management port at the remote CMU This management mode allows communication from the CMU management port to Ethernet end stations reached through the remote CMU Supporting construction of an extended management network that is isolated from the customer network End to end out of band management is possible only when the network management mode is configured to out of band at every CMU phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 1 37 Ethernet bridging Chapter 1 Product description Out of ba
253. ightning protection units LPUs The PTP 800 LPU end kit Figure 1 14 is required for IF cables One LPU is installed next to the ODU and the other is installed near the building entry point Figure 1 14 PTP 800 LPU end kit 9 gF Ya r tae phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Wireless operation Wireless operation Channel bandwidth The PTP 800 wireless link supports the following channel bandwidths 7 MHz 10 MHz 13 75 MHz 14 MHz 20 MHz 27 9 MHz 28 MHz 29 65 MHz 30 MHz 40 MHz 50 MHz 99 MHz 56 MHz The available selection of channel bandwidths varies depending on band and region Modulation modes The PTP 800 wireless link operates using single carrier modulation with the following fixed modulation modes QPSK 8 PSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM The available selection of modulation modes varies depending on band region and channel bandwidth phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 1 21 Wireless operation Chapter 1 Product description PTP 800 uses Low Density Parity Check LDPC forward error correction FEC coding The code rate is calculated as the ratio between the un coded block size and the coded block size FEC code rate in PTP 800 varies between 0 76 and 0 94 depending on channel bandwidth and modulation mode For more information see Capacity transmit power and sensitivity on page 4
254. il in Management network on page 1 37 Web interface The PTP 800 management agent contains a web server The management agent provides comprehensive web based fault configuration performance and security management functions Web based management offers a convenient way to manage the PTP 800 equipment from a locally connected computer or from a network management workstation connected through a management network without requiring any special management software The web based interface is the only interface supported for installation of PTP 800 and for the majority of PTP 800 configuration management tasks Management tasks using the web based management interface are described in detail in Chapter 7 Operation Installation wizard The web based interface includes an Installation wizard This feature simplifies the process of entering initial configuration details setting the system into alignment mode achieving the lowest possible link loss through correct antenna alignment and reporting on the performance of the installed link The process handles the important configuration settings that must be set to comply with individual license conditions These important settings are not normally modified in an operating link and cannot be changed in PTP 800 except through use of the Installation wizard Configuration pages The web based interface includes a number of configuration pages These pages allow for modification of the system con
255. ime server SNTP In the absence of an SNTP server connection the clock can be set to run manually The clock is battery backed and will continue to operate for several days after the CMU is switched off If an SNTP server connection is available the clock can be set to synchronize with the server time at regular intervals Setting the real time clock manually To set the CMU clock to keep time without connecting to a networked time server proceed as follows 1 From the left hand menu select Remote Management The Remote Management page is displayed Figure 6 20 2 Inthe Clock section of the page set the SNTP State attribute to Disabled The manual clock attributes are displayed Figure 6 42 Review and update the manual clock attributes Table 6 15 4 Select Submit Updated Configuration Figure 6 42 Clock section of Remote Management page SNTP disabled Clock SNTF State Disabled Enabled Daylight Saving Disabled Enabled phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 6 71 Task 13 Connecting link to the network Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Table 6 15 Manual clock attributes Attribute Meaning SNTP State Disabled means that the CMU will keep time without connecting to a networked time server Set Time Set hours minutes and seconds Set Date Set year month and day Time Zone Set the time zone offset from Greenwich Mean Time GMT Daylight Saving Disabled means that daylight s
256. in band management the commissioning engineer can connect to both PTP 800s in the following ways On the bench via a local router Configure and test the final data port configuration on the bench Access for commissioning will be available from a port on a locally connected switch or router This has the advantage that simultaneous access is possible to both the CMUs being installed On the bench via the management network As above but with a connection to a management centre not across the wireless link being installed where a co worker is able to configure and control the PTP 800 units Using out of band Install the CMUs using out of band management and configure in band management on site However a protection splitter is required and the management setup needs to be reconfigured Errors could cause loss of the management connection Using a local PC Use in band management and connect a PC locally to the copper data port This is possible if VLAN tagging is disabled Some reconfiguration may be needed but if the data network is not fully commissioned this could be an alternative It is recommended that in the final configuration VLAN tagging is enabled phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces Configuring the IP interface and management mode The IP interface allows users to connect to the PTP 800 web interface either from a
257. ink up no traffic Fiber Ethernet link up traffic Ethernet link down or not connected Normal operation Wireless link down CMU booting Out of service Recovery mode Power supply fault there may still be power to the CMU Power okay Power supply fault there may still be power to the CMU 1 9 Outdoor unit ODU Chapter 1 Product description Outdoor unit ODU ODU description The PTP 800 outdoor unit ODU Figure 1 3 converts signals between a modulated intermediate frequency IF and radio band frequencies for transmission over a line of sight link Figure 1 3 ODU phn 1478 0O12v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Outdoor unit ODU ODU interfaces The ODU interfaces are illustrated in Figure 1 4 Figure 1 4 ODU front rear and side view Waveguide interface i Eos ho Spring loaded 7 catche o Waveguide polarization arrow x h as as gt _ i j B Ead EEN Ground connector a S E oE RSSI connector _ CMU connector phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 1 11 Outdoor unit ODU Chapter 1 Product description Waveguide polarization arrow The waveguide polarization arrow indicates the orientation of the waveguide interface The arrow is parallel to the short dimension of the rectangular waveguide aperture Spring loaded latches The ODU has four spring loaded latches These are used to fasten the ODU to the antenna remote mount kit
258. interface and management mode on page 6 9 Reconnecting to the management PC on page 6 18 Managing the units during configuration and alignment Choose the best way to manage the PTP 800 units during the configuration and alignment process Out of band management Where out of band management is chosen the management port is active and a PC can be locally connected Once the wireless link is operational the remote PTP 800 unit may also be accessed across the wireless link In a 1 1 protected link with out of band management the commissioning engineer can connect to both PTP 800s in the following ways Locally from the Ethernet port of the protection splitter From a PC connected to a local switch where routing and connectivity exist for accessing the Ethernet port of the protection splitter Before the protection splitter is installed locally from the management port phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 6 7 Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment In band management 6 8 Where in band management is chosen the choice of scheme depends on the available data network and the method of network connectivity With in band management there is a risk that a configuration error could lead to loss of management connectivity If connectivity is lost recover the units to a known working saved configuration as described in Using recovery mode on page 7 50 In a 1 1 protected link with
259. ion Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment 6 Test that the upgrade is successful as follows If the coupler is symmetric or if the coupler is asymmetric but the secondary units provide a good quality link perform these tests a Force a local protection switch and check that the link is working b Force a protection switch at the other end of the wireless link to return to the initial configuration If the couper is asymmetric or if the antenna is protected and the inactive neighbor has a lower capacity a Force a combined protection switch and check that the link is working b Force a local end protection switch so that the optimum performing units are in use that is Primary to Primary 7 Re enable local and remote protection switching Upgrading to a new software version Perform this task to upgrade the units to a new version of PTP 800 operational software A NOTE The CMU application software image contains an embedded software image for the ODU If a CMU software upgrade introduces a new ODU software version then the ODU software is upgraded automatically following reboot of the CMU A NOTE CMU software version must be the same at both ends of the link Limited operation may sometimes be possible with dissimilar software version but such operation is not supported by Motorola ANOTE Upgrade the remote end of a link before upgrading the local end and for a protected link upgrade the inactive units and f
260. ion Protected Links is only available if 1 1 protection has been configured see Configuring protected links on page 6 43 7 4 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Web based management Using the menu options Table 7 1 lists the procedures that may be performed from each menu option Many of these procedures are part of the initial configuration and alignment process described in Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Table 7 1 Procedures performed from each menu option Menu option Home Status system Administration Configuration LAN Configuration SFP Configuration Bridge Configuration Save And Restore Protection Protected Link Statistics Detailed Counters Installation Wizard Software Upgrade phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Procedures Viewing the system summary on page 7 6 Viewing the system status on page 7 8 Logging into the web interface on page 6 6 Configuring AES encryption on page 6 32 Reviewing system configuration attributes on page 6 67 Disabling wireless transmission on page 7 25 Enabling wireless transmission on page 7 27 Disabling AES encryption on page 7 35 Changing AES encryption keys on page 7 36 Configuring the IP interface and management mode on page 6 9 This option is only available when an SFP module is fitted It displays information about the SFP module There is no associated procedure Configuring QoS on page 6 19 Saving the s
261. istory Version information The following shows the issue status of this document since it was first released Document Date of Remarks issue issue 001v000 Oct 2009 System Release 800 01 00 original 002v000 Oct 2009 System Release 800 01 00 revised 004v000 Dec 2009 System Release 800 01 00 addition of 11 GHz ETSI 005v000 Apr 2010 System Release 800 02 00 006v000 May 2010 System Release 800 02 01 007v000 Jul 2010 System Release 800 02 02 008v000 Aug 2010 System Release 800 02 03 009v000 Sep 2010 System Release 800 02 04 010v000 Nov 2010 System Release 800 02 04 revised 011v000 Mar 2011 System Release 800 03 00 012v000 May 2011 System Release 800 03 10 2 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 General information General information Purpose Motorola Point To Point documents are intended to instruct and assist personnel in the operation installation and maintenance of the Motorola Point To Point equipment and ancillary devices It is recommended that all personnel engaged in such activities be properly trained Motorola disclaims all liability whatsoever implied or express for any risk of damage loss or reduction in system performance arising directly or indirectly out of the failure of the customer or anyone acting on the customer s behalf to abide by the instructions system parameters or recommendations made in this document Cross references References to external publications are shown in italics Other cross ref
262. ithin 60 seconds from applying power phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 6 5 Task 1 Connecting to the unit Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Logging into the web interface A NOTE If the management PC is connected to another LAN it may need to be configured to not use proxy servers for this IP address To log into the CMU web interface proceed as follows ra Start the web browser from the management PC Type this IP address of the unit into the address bar 169 254 1 1 Press ENTER The web interface menu and System Summary page are displayed Figure 6 4 Select menu option System Administration The login page is displayed Figure 6 5 4 Leave the Password blank and select Login Figure 6 4 Web interface Home page AA MOTOROLA POINT TO POINT WIRELESS SOLUTIONS an system Summary Link Name hae Elapsed Time Indicator 00 00 17 hh mm ss Status System Clock 22 Oct 2009 19 27 24 System Administration Transmitter Status Muted By User Radio License Incompatible Alarm eve te eae ee es oe Figure 6 5 Login page system Administration Login System Administration Password i 6 6 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces This task consists of the following procedures Managing the units during configuration and alignment on page 6 7 Configuring the IP
263. ity 4 91 Electromagnetic compliance Chapter 4 Reference information Electromagnetic compliance Electrical safety compliance The PTP 800 hardware has been tested for compliance to the electrical safety specifications listed in Table 4 128 Table 4 128 Electrical safety specifications Region Specification USA UL 60950 Canada CSA C22 2 No 60950 International CB certified amp certificate to IEC 60950 EMC immunity compliance The PTP 800 has been tested for compliance to the EMC immunity specifications listed in Table 4 129 The top level Specification is ETSI 301 489 Table 4 129 EMC immunity compliance specifications Specification Comment EN 55082 1 Generic EMC and EMI requirements for Europe EN 61000 4 2 2001 Electro Static The levels used for testing were Discharge ESD Class 2 8 kV air 4 increased to ensure immunity to kV contact discharge 15kV air and 8kV contact discharges EN 61000 4 3 2006 Radiated Immunity 3 V m EN 61000 4 4 2004 Bursts Fast Equipment was tested with level Transients Class 4 4 kV level increased for dc input and signal power lines AC amp DC lines 0 5 kV open circuit voltage EN 61000 4 5 2006 Surge Immunity EN 61000 4 6 1996 Injected RF Signal lines Class 3 3 V RMS un power line Class 3 10 V m modulated 4 92 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Electromagnetic compliance Compliance testing Changes or modifica
264. ived signal levels and bearings for both ends of the link If the report specifies predicted receive signal levels dBm but not voltages then convert dBm to volts using the formula or graph in RSSI output on page 4 17 Two voltmeters with BNC connectors are available No personnel are in front of the antennas Aligning protected antennas For a protected link with two antennas at each end of the link align each of the following three pairs by following Aligning a pair of antennas on page 6 61 1 Align the Tx Hi primary antenna to the Tx Lo primary antenna Do not make any further adjustments to the two primary antennas 2 Align the Tx Hi secondary antenna to the now fixed Tx Lo primary antenna 3 Align the Tx Lo secondary antenna to the now fixed Tx Hi primary antenna Step 1 should be performed first but step 3 can be performed before step 2 if preferred phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 11 Aligning antennas Aligning a pair of antennas Connect the CMUs to a management PC and open the web interfaces at both ends of the link For more information see Connecting to the PC and powering up on page 6 5 and Logging into the web interface on page 6 6 ANOTE When the Start Alignment option is selected the Installation Wizard automatically enables wireless transmission in alignment mode Antennas are aligned by monitoring ODU ou
265. l FCC IC ETSI FCC ETSI FCC IC ETSI Overview Frequency coverage 5 925 6 425 GHz 6 425 7 125 GHz 7 110 7 9 GHz 7 725 8 5 GHz 10 7 11 7 GHz 12 75 13 25 GHz 14 4 GHz 15 35 GHz 17 7 19 7 GHz 21 2 23 6 GHz 24 25 26 5 GHz 37 40 GHz 1 5 Compact modem unit CMU Chapter 1 Product description Compact modem unit CMU CMU description The PTP 800 compact modem unit CMU Figure 1 1 is used as a component of a line of sight licensed band microwave link to deliver a point to point Ethernet service between two locations The CMU converts data signals between Ethernet frames and a modulated intermediate frequency IF carrier The CMU operates in indoor locations mounted on a shelf on a wall using the provided bracket or in a standard 19 inch rack using the optional 1U rack mounting kit It is ideally suited to applications where space is limited Figure 1 1 PTP 800 CMU CMU interfaces The CMU front panel interfaces are illustrated in Figure 1 2 Figure 1 2 CMU front panel ODU Management Copper Fiber Ground connector port data SFP stud port interface Power ODU Recovery Fiber Modem Power indicator switch data status indicator indicator indicator 1 6 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Compact modem unit CMU ODU connector The CMU is connected to the ODU using the IF cable The ODU connector is a standard N type female The IF cabl
266. l still be operational and the wireless link can operate with single units but alarms will be issued due to the absence of protecting units The Protected link page is now available with local and remote ends shown as unprotected see Viewing the status of a protected link on page 7 28 Install the new ODUs and antennas by performing one or other of the following tasks If antenna redundancy is required perform Installing antenna with a single ODU on page 5 9 for each antenna and ODU pair If antenna redundancy is not required perform Installing antenna with two ODUs and a coupler on page 5 24 Perform Installing the IF and ground cables on page 5 37 for each ODU Each ODU requires its own IF cable ground cables and LPUs Test the installation Perform Testing the installation on page 5 63 A NOTE At each link end test both ODU and CMU pairs Install and ground the CMUs by performing Installing the CMU on page 5 73 for each CMU Prepare the cables to connect the CMUs to the Ethernet switch by performing Preparing the network connections protected on page 5 84 Do not complete these connections until antenna alignment is complete Align the antennas and complete the configuration Perform the following tasks from Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment from Task 11 Aligning antennas on page 6 59 to Task 13 Connecting link to the network on page 6 70 Enable Fault Protection Switching as described in Configuring prote
267. lation 128QAM 0 83 Fixed ref Yes Capacity Mbit s 50 7 Sensitivity dBm 74 1 Max tx power dBm 22 Min tx power dBm 9 Table 4 65 Lower 6 GHz FCC and Canada with 30 MHz bandwidth Modulation 256QAM 128QAM 64QAM 0 80 0 82 0 87 Fixed ref Yes Yes Yes Capacity Mbit s 177 4 155 1 135 4 Sensitivity dBm 67 8 70 6 73 ACM threshold out dBm 60 1 67 3 69 6 ACM threshold in dBm 97 5 66 1 68 3 Max tx power dBm 22 22 pap Min tx power dBm 9 9 9 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 4 59 Wireless operation Chapter 4 Reference information Table 4 66 Lower 6 GHz ETSI with 29 65 MHz channel separation Modulation 256QAM 128QAM 64QAM 32QAM 16QAM 8PSK QPSK 0 80 0 84 0 82 0 85 0 79 0 80 0 80 Fixed ref Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Capacity 170 5 151 1 125 3 101 2 74 8 56 8 37 8 Mbit s Sensitivity 68 1 70 9 73 9 76 4 80 3 86 1 dBm ACM thresh 61 2 67 5 70 4 73 2 77 3 79 out dBm ACM thresh 59 2 66 3 69 2 71 9 76 1 77 8 in dBm Max tx 22 24 24 28 28 28 30 power dBm Min tx power 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 dBm Capacity transmit power and sensitivity Upper 6 GHz Table 4 67 Upper 6 GHz ETSI with 7 MHz channel separation Modulation 128QAM 64QAM 32QAM 16QAM 8PSK QPSK 0 76 0 82 0 87 0 88 0 86 0 88 Fixed ref Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Capacity Mbit s 34 4 30 24 6 20 14 7 10 Sensitivity dBm 76 4 78 8 80 8 83 7 90 4 ACM thresh out dBm 71 7 74 2 76 4 79 6 81 4 ACM thresh in dBm
268. ld be set phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Grounding and lightning protection Grounding and lightning protection Structures equipment and people must be protected against power surges typically caused by lightning by conducting the surge current to ground via a separate preferential solid path The actual degree of protection required depends on local conditions and applicable local regulations Motorola recommends that PTP 800 installation is contracted to a professional installer Standards Full details of lightning protection methods and requirements can be found in the international standards IEC 61024 1 and IEC 61312 1 the U S National Electric Code ANSI NFPA No 70 1984 or section 54 of the Canadian Electric Code EMD Lightning damage is not covered under standard warranty The recommendations in this user manual when implemented correctly give the user the best protection from the harmful effects of EMD However 100 protection is neither implied nor possible Lightning Protection Zones The rolling sphere method is used to determine where it is safe to mount equipment An imaginary sphere typically 50 meters in radius is rolled over the structure Where the sphere rests against the ground and a strike termination device such as a finial or ground bar all the space under the sphere is considered to be in the zone of protection Zone B Similarly where the spher
269. le 1 Select menu option Configuration Save And Restore The Save amp Restore Configuration page is displayed Figure 6 12 2 Select Save Configuration File 3 Save the configuration file to a PC hard drive phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 6 25 Task 5 Upgrading software version Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment 6 26 The configuration file format is MAC mm mm mm IP iii iii iii iii cfg Where Is mm mm mm MAC address of unit Li 111 111 i11 IP address of unit Figure 6 12 Save amp Restore Configuration page save amp Restore Configuration Save Configuration 4 snapshot of the latest system configuration can be saved to a file as a backup The file can then be used to restore this unit to a known state or configure a replacement unit to the same state The configuration values are encrypted for security Click the button below to save the configuration file Save Configuration File Restore Configuration Mote this utility vill only restore configuration files that were saved using software version 999 00 Please select the configuration file to restore Browse Restore Configuration File and Reboot phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 5 Upgrading software version Upgrading software in an operational protected link In protected links the forced protection switch minimizes the link down time since all units are inactive when upgraded Protectio
270. le waveguide specifications 38 GHz Motorola part number Operating frequency range Length Attenuation VSWR Waveguide size RMK flange Antenna flange Maximum twist Minimum bend radius E plane Minimum bend radius H plane 98010076014 26 5 GHz to 40 1 GHz 900 mm 35 in 3 3 dB m 1 30 WR28 WG22 R320 PBR320 UBR320 910 m 38 mm 1 5 in 76 mm 3 0 in Flexible waveguide accessory specifications Motorola can supply the flexible waveguide accessories listed in Table 4 52 To provide adequate support for a 900mm flexible waveguide two hangers are required The 11 GHz remote mount antenna requires the use of the tapered transition fitted between the antenna and the flexible waveguide Table 4 52 Flexible waveguide accessory specifications Accessory WR137 flex twist hanger kit WR112 flex twist hanger kit WR75 flex twist hanger kit WR62 flex twist hanger kit WR42 flex twist hanger kit WR28 flex twist hanger kit Tapered transition phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Frequency Motorola part variant number 6 GHz 07010118001 7 8 GHz 07010118002 11 13 GHz 07010118003 15 GHz 07010118004 18 26 GHz 07010118005 38 GHz 07010118006 11 GHz 58010077001 4 49 ODU coupler mounting specifications Chapter 4 Reference information ODU coupler mounting specifications This section contains specifications of the ODU coupler mounting kits that are available from Motorola for PTP 800 installations Coupler di
271. license agreement The PTP 800 must be operated in accordance with the Motorola Solutions Inc end user license agreement as specified in Chapter 3 Legal information 10 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 Chapter 1 Chapter 1 Product description This chapter provides a high level description of the PTP 800 product It describes in general terms the function of the product the main product variants and typical deployment It also describes the main hardware components The following topics are described in this chapter Overview on page 1 2 Introduces the key features typical uses product variants and components of the PTP 800 Compact modem unit CMU on page 1 6 Describes the CMU and its interfaces Outdoor unit ODU on page 1 10 Describes the ODU and its components Antenna and antenna accessories on page 1 13 Describes the antennas and accessories such as the remote mount kit and ODU coupler Cabling and lightning protection on page 1 19 Describes the cabling and lightning protection components of a PTP 800 installation Wireless operation on page 1 21 Describes how the PTP 800 wireless link is operated including modulation modes power control and security 1 1 Hot Standby link protection on page 1 25 Describes the 1 1 Hot Standby feature which protects the PTP 800 link against hardware failure Ethernet bridging on page 1 35 Describes how the PTP 800 controls Ethernet data in both the cus
272. line can be removed A suitable hoisting grip for CNT 400 IF cable is Motorola part number 07009304001 used together with the correct crimp tool SG IT Andrew part number 243333 A WARNING Failure to obey the following warnings may result in injury or death o Use the hoisting grip to hoist one cable only Attempting to hoist more than one cable may cause the hoisting grip to break or the cables to fall o Do not use the hoisting grip for lowering cable unless the clamp is securely in place o Do not reuse hoisting grips Used grips may have lost elasticity stretched or become weakened Reusing a grip can cause the cable to Slip break or fall o Use hoisting grips at intervals of no more than 60 m 200 ft o Use the proper hoisting grip for the cable being installed If the wrong hoisting grip is used slippage or insufficient gripping strength will result phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 51 Installing the IF and ground cables Chapter 5 Installation Attaching the hoisting grip A NOTE Attach one or more hoisting grips to the main IF cable before fitting the N type connector to the top end as described in Preparing IF cables on page 5 39 Attach one additional hoisting grip for each 60 m 200 ft of cable To attach a hoisting grip to the main IF cable proceed as follows 1 Compress the grip ends towards each other and slide the grip heel woven end onto the cable see photo Place the hoisting grip s at t
273. ling and disabling fault protection on page 7 33 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 7 37 Managing security Chapter 7 Operation Figure 7 11 Encryption key mismatch System Summary Atir ibites Y alhi Ai to BS 18 Mar 2011 09 36 05 J j lrer in eileen F o d hat In air Hat nt Standley Sanvfigeretion nelghboring CLs AUS be configured Wih ihe same vale pola ene Key The Encryption Key Neighbor Cor iInchcates when ths iz mot the case 7 38 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Managing security Changing the log out timer Perform this task to change the automatic logout time period The automatic logout time period is the amount of time without user activity that is allowed to elapse before the system administrator is logged off To change the log out timer proceed as follows 1 From the left hand menu select Properties The Web Page Properties page is displayed Figure 7 12 2 Set the Auto Logout Timer attribute to the number of minutes that should elapse before automatic logout occurs If automatic logout is not wanted set Auto Logout Timer to zero This means that the system administrator will remain logged on with or without user activity 3 Select Apply Properties Figure 7 12 Web Page Properties page Webpage Properties Properties attributes uae Units M Disable FrontPage login Web Properties _ Disable HTTP NO CACHE META data Auto Lo
274. load application software phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 8 3 Connecting to the web management interface Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Check the Management port Ethernet connection Check the state of the Management port indicators and take action as described in Table 8 4 Table 8 4 Management port indicator checks Management Likely cause and action port indicator state Yellow steady The Ethernet link is up but is not carrying traffic Continue at Check IP network connection on page 8 7 Yellow flash The Ethernet link is up and is carrying traffic Continue at Check IP network connection on page 8 7 Off The Ethernet link is down Continue at Management port indicator is off on page 8 4 Management port indicator is off 8 4 If the Management port indicator is off it means that the Ethernet link is down If the CMU Management port is connected to a management network check the following The associated network equipment workstation PC router switch etc is powered up and operating correctly The Ethernet port in the associated equipment is enabled The Ethernet cable between the CMU and the network equipment is connected and is not damaged If possible substitute a known good Ethernet cable The Ethernet ports have compatible auto negotiation and duplex settings as described in Configuring the IP interface and management mode on page 6 9 If the CMU Management port is connected directly to a PC
275. locally connected computer or from a management network Before setting Management Mode to Out of Band or In Band ensure that the local and remote CMUs are configured with different IP addresses otherwise the management agent will not be able to distinguish the two CMUs Similarly for a 1 1 protected link all four CMUs must be configured with different IP addresses so that the active and inactive units may be distinguished as well as the local and remote CMUs A NOTE Forcing Ethernet configuration is a last resort that should only be selected if problems are experienced with auto negotiation The Ethernet Auto Negotiation and Auto Neg Advertisement attributes must have the same settings in the CMU and in connected network equipment If they are not consistent then a duplex mismatch will occur resulting in greatly reduced data capacity The Auto Neg Advertisement data rate must be within the capability of the connected network equipment otherwise loss of service will occur A NOTE To configure the Ethernet link to run at a fixed speed and duplex leave Ethernet Auto Negotiation set to Enabled and set Auto Neg Advertisement to the required speed phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 6 9 Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment To configure the IP interface proceed as follows 1 Select menu option Configuration LAN Configuration The LAN Configuration page is displayed
276. m ntenna Height meters Max height at site is 20 0 m Maximum EIRP 50 3 dBm User lirit 60 0 dBm Maximum EIRP 50 3 dBm User limit 00 dBm Maximum Power 15 0d6m User limit Maximum Power 15 0d6m User limit Tx Frequency 23030 00 MHz Tx Frequency 21630 00 MHz Tx Capacity Limit 300 Mbps Tx Capacity Limit 300 Mbps C Interference LC Interference Performance Summary Throughput to Bolinas Ridge Link Summary Throughput to Mount Tamalpais Mean IP Predicted 236 58 Mbps Aggregate IP Throughput 473 15 Mbps Mean IP Predicted 236 58 Mbps Mean IP Required Mbps Link Availability 99 9946 Mean IF Required Mbps oO i 1 oO oO i 1 oO OF Required IP 118 eyeten Gansta 16 15 dB OF Required IP 118 Free Space Path Loss 132 13 dB Mean Atmospheric Loss 0 80 d Min IP Required 0 Mbps Min IP Required 200 0 Mbps Min IF availability Required 99 9900 Excess Path Loss 0 00 dE Min IF Availability Required 99 9900 Total Path Loss 132 92 dB Min IP Availability Predicted 99 9946 el Min IP Availability Predicted 99 9946 2 4 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Figure 2 3 LINKPlanner Bill of Materials view Bill of Materials for Marin Pity Description no part number Unspecified 23 GHz ODU finvalid TH Frequency selection 01010210007 ODU A 23GHz TR1200 Lo B6 21600 0 22000 0 MHz Rectangular WG Neg Pal
277. m unit CMU for the PTP 800 must be properly grounded It is the user s responsibility to install the equipment in accordance with national regulations In the USA follow Section 810 of the National Electric Code ANSI NFPA No 70 1984 USA In Canada follow Section 54 of the Canadian Electrical Code These codes describe correct installation procedures for grounding the ODU CMU mast lead in wire and discharge unit size of grounding conductors and connection requirements for grounding electrodes Other regulations may apply in different countries and therefore it is recommended that installation of the outdoor unit be contracted to a professional installer The PTP 800 ODU and CMU must be grounded to a protective earth in accordance with the Local Electrical Regulations phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Safety Electrical safety The power cable connections must meet International Electrotechnical Commission IEC safety standards Always power down and unplug the equipment before servicing When using alternative DC supplies such as battery backed DC power source the Supply must be SELV rated Primary disconnect device The power supply must include a primary disconnect device with appropriate fusing External cables Safety may be compromised if outdoor rated cables are not used for connections that will be exposed to the weather RF exposure near the antenna Strong radio frequency RF fields will be present close t
278. maximum pr eT Click Higiment Complete when the antenna is corectii aligned Click Abandon Alignment to abandon alignment The transmitter will be muted for ha Alignment status ODU Status Transmitter Status Transmit Power 15 0 Receive Power 51 0 Vector Error 4 6 Link Loss 148 9 LS 0 Abandon Alignment Alignment Complete Preparing for alignment To prepare the antennas for alignment proceed as follows at both link ends 1 Using the instructions provided with the antenna set the elevation and azimuth adjustment mechanisms to the centre of the range 2 Using the instructions provided with the antenna adjust the position of the antenna mounting bracket such that the antenna is pointing at the other end of the link Use a compass and the bearing provided by the planning report Once the antenna is in position resecure the mounting bracket 4 Connect a suitable voltmeter to the ODU RSSI connector Figure 6 36 Ensure that the centre of the RSSI connector is connected to the positive terminal of the voltmeter This will be used to monitor the RSSI voltage 6 62 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 11 Aligning antennas Figure 6 36 Testing ODU voltage output Aligning one end Align the antenna at one end of the link while keeping the antenna at the other end of the link stationary To find the correct elevation and azimuth angles at one end pr
279. mensions and weight The PTP 800 ODU coupler mounting kit conforms to the physical specifications listed in Table 4 11 Table 4 53 ODU coupler physical specifications Category Specification Packed 250 x 280 x 390 W x Lx H mm dimensions 10x 11x15 5 Wx Lx H ins Weight 6 GHz band 7 GHz to 11 GHz bands 4 6 kg 10 1 lbs 13 GHz to 38 GHz bands 4 2 kg 9 3 lbs Coupler environmental The PTP 800 ODU coupler mounting kit conforms to the environmental Specifications listed in Table 4 12 and Table 4 7 Table 4 54 ODU coupler environmental specifications Category Specification Temperature 40 C 40 F to 50 C 122 F Relative humidity 0 to 100 Weatherproofing IP67 Exposure Salt mist industrial atmospheres and UV radiation Shock and ETSI EN 300 019 2 4 class 4 1E IEC class 4M5 Vibration 4 50 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide ODU coupler mounting specifications Coupler losses and isolation Table 4 55 contains ODU port return losses and isolation figures for Motorola supplied ODU couplers These figures apply to both symmetric and asymmetric couplers Table 4 55 ODU coupler return losses and isolation Bands ODU port return loss Isolation between ODU ports 6 GHz 18 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 7 GHz to 38 GHz 20 dB maximum 20 dB minimum Table 4 56 contains ODU port insertion losses for Motorola supplied ODU couplers Table 4 56 ODU coupler insertion losses Bands C
280. must be able to route management traffic received from the active CMU to the inactive CMU using its data port see Figure 1 22 Similarly if out of band management is used if an Ethernet Switch is used it must route the management traffic received from the active CMU to the inactive CMU using its management port see Figure 1 24 For maintenance the technician should be able to connect a PC to the Ethernet Switch and access both the CMUs If this is not possible then either the technician may have to connect directly to the data port or the management mode may have to be changed remotely and the technician given access via the local management port phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Data network planning VLAN membership Decide if the IP interface of the CMU management agent will be connected in a VLAN If so decide if this is a standard IEEE 802 1Q VLAN or provider bridged IEEE 802 1ad VLAN and select the VLAN ID for this VLAN Use of a separate management VLAN is strongly recommended for applications based on the in band management mode Use of the management VLAN helps to ensure that the CMU management agent cannot be accessed by customers See Management network on page 1 37 for further explanation of VLAN membership Priority for management traffic Choose the Ethernet priority for management traffic generated within the CMU management agent The priority should be selected so as to
281. n Chapter 4 Reference information Table 4 92 18 GHz FCC and Canada with 30 MHz bandwidth Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 296QAM 0 80 Yes 177 4 68 5 61 5 59 6 15 2 128QAM 0 82 Yes 155 1 71 2 67 9 66 6 17 64QAM 0 82 Yes 130 4 74 2 70 8 69 5 17 32QAM 0 84 Yes 103 6 76 8 73 6 72 4 22 16QAM 0 79 Yes 77 9 80 6 77 6 76 4 22 Table 4 93 18 GHz FCC and Canada with 40 MHz bandwidth Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 296QAM 0 80 Yes 236 6 67 2 60 3 58 3 15 2 128QAM 0 82 Yes 206 8 69 9 66 6 65 4 17 64QAM 0 88 Yes 181 9 72 3 68 9 67 6 17 32QAM 0 92 Yes 150 7 74 4 71 2 70 22 16QAM 0 79 Yes 103 8 79 3 76 4 75 2 22 8 PSK 0 80 Yes 59 1 82 8 79 4 78 1 22 BPSK 0 80 Yes 78 9 81 5 78 1 76 8 22 QPSK 0 80 Yes 39 4 86 4 23 QPSK 0 80 Yes 52 5 85 1 23 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Wireless operation Table 4 94 18 GHz FCC and Canada with 50 MHz bandwidth Modulation 256QAM 128Q
282. n 1478_012v000 May 2011 128QAM 0 76 Yes 71 73 4 68 6 67 2 17 7 64QAM 0 82 Yes 61 8 75 7 71 1 69 8 17 32QAM 0 87 No 50 7 73 4 72 1 22 16QAM 0 88 Yes 41 3 80 6 76 5 75 3 22 8PSK 0 86 No 30 4 78 3 77 22 Wireless operation QPSK 0 88 Yes 10 90 4 20 QPSK 0 86 Yes 20 3 87 3 25 4 85 Wireless operation Chapter 4 Reference information Table 4 116 26 GHz ETSI with 28 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 296QAM 0 80 Yes 170 5 68 1 61 2 59 2 15 7 128QAM 0 84 Yes 151 1 70 9 67 5 66 3 17 64QAM 0 82 Yes 125 3 73 9 70 4 69 2 17 32QAM 0 85 Yes 101 2 76 4 73 2 71 9 22 16QAM 0 79 Yes 74 8 80 3 77 3 76 1 22 Table 4 117 26 GHz ETSI with 56 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 256 QAM 0 91 Yes 368 6 63 2 58 1 56 1 15 256 QAM 0 80 347 1 65 1 58 1 56 1 128 QAM 0 82 Yes 303 5 67 8 64 5 63 2 17 64 QAM 0 82 Yes 299 2 70 8 67 3 66 1 17
283. n be carried out such as installation of new software with a minimum of interruption to the service provided by the link Three variants of link protection are supported see Protected link antenna interfaces on page 1 28 These are A single antenna and symmetric coupler A single antenna and asymmetric coupler Two antennas each connected to a separate ODU A NOTE When using LinkPlanner to plan a protected link different values can be used for the required minimum availability for the primary to primary link and the primary to secondary link phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 2 5 Link planning Chapter 2 Planning considerations Designating primary and secondary units Where an asymmetric coupler is used or two antennas with different performance characteristics the unit with the best predicted radio performance characteristics is designated the primary unit and must be configured as such see Configuring protected links on page 6 43 If the characteristics of both CMU ODU antenna paths are the same then either unit can be designated as the primary The other unit is designated as the secondary unit Choosing asymmetric operation An asymmetric coupler maximizes the performance of the radio link when the two primary units are operating the link this is known as primary to primary operation Before deciding to use an asymmetric coupler consider the following questions Can the link be operated satisfacto
284. n switching to the newly upgraded units allows a fallback path should the upgrade have problems Upgrading in a different order could make the remote end of the protected link inaccessible and therefore require an engineer to visit the site to perform the upgrade ANOTE Before upgrading the software check that no alarms are outstanding for the units to be upgraded See Managing alarms on page 7 13 It is expected that upgrades will normally take place from an initial status of Primary to Primary especially for an asymmetric coupler or for a protected antenna when the inactive unit has a lower capacity If the 1 1 protected link is operational upgrade the units in the following order 1 Disable local and remote protection switching See Enabling and disabling fault protection on page 7 33 If link planning indicates that the inactive units are able to operate a link of satisfactory quality go to step 3 Otherwise force a protection switch at one end of the wireless link as described in Forcing protection switches on page 7 31 so that the link is operating between a primary and a secondary unit Upgrade software on the remote inactive CMU then on the local inactive CMU Force a protection switch at both ends to inactive CMUs and check that the link is working Upgrade software on the remote formerly active CMU then on the local formerly active CMU phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 6 27 Task 5 Upgrading software vers
285. n the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 3 12 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Hardware warranty Hardware warranty Motorola s standard hardware warranty is for one 1 year from date of shipment from Motorola or a Motorola Point to Point Distributor Motorola warrants that hardware will c
286. n the default out of band local management mode the management agent can be reached only from the Management port of the CMU This mode is appropriate during configuration and installation when the equipment is managed using a locally connected PC at each end of the link It may additionally be useful where network management communication is based on a completely independent data network for example one based on a 3G cellular wireless terminal at each site In many network applications the wireless link will provide the only communication path to a remote site In such applications CMUs and other network equipment at the remote site will be managed over the wireless link For applications of this type select either out of band or in band management mode Use the out of band management mode where management traffic is segregated using a physically separate network interface at the CMU Use the in band management mode where management traffic is multiplexed with customer traffic at a single physical interface Make sure that the same management mode is selected for CMUs at both ends of a link See Management network on page 1 37 for further explanation of management modes ANOTE When using out of band management mode avoid connecting Management and Data ports in the same network Loops in the network can be complicated to detect and correct phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 2 17 Data network planning Chapter 2 Planning considerations Pr
287. n to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright c 2001 2002 Networks Associates Technology Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the
288. naging performance on page 7 40 Rebooting the unit on page 7 49 Using recovery mode on page 7 50 Restoring the operational configuration on page 7 57 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 7 1 Web based management Chapter 7 Operation Web based management This section describes the layout and the main menu options of the PTP 800 web based management interface Accessing the web interface The web interface is best viewed using a screen resolution of at least 1024 x 768 pixels The web pages have been tested with Internet Explorer 7 Internet Explorer 8 Firefox 3 and Firefox 3 5 Other browsers have not been tested To access the web interface type the IP address of the unit into the browser address bar and press ENTER If the Login page Figure 7 1 is displayed enter Password if set and select Login Figure 7 1 System Administration Login page system Administration Login System Administration Pass ord i The web interface consists of the title bar at the top the menu bar on the left and the web page for the selected menu option on the right Figure 7 2 Figure 7 2 Web interface AA MOTOROLA POINT TO POINT WIRELESS SOLUTIONS system Summary Attributes TS Link Mame Clayvton to Tavistock Hare Site Mame Tavistock Status Elapsed Time Indicator 06 52 14 hh mm s2 System Administration System Clack 15 Mar 2011 15 59 33 Configuration Statistics Installation Wizard Software Upgrade Remote Mana
289. nd quality of service Out of band management traffic is forwarded over the wireless link using a dedicated channel The management channel represents a single traffic class and the same quality of service is afforded to all management frames Traffic in the management channel is fragmented for transmission over the wireless link to minimize the jitter imposed on high priority traffic in the customer network The management channel has higher priority than traffic in the customer network subject to a configurable committed information rate CIR with a range between 200 Kbit s and 2 Mbit s Committed capacity that remains unused by management traffic is available for customer traffic Out of band local management The out of band local management mode is similar to the standard out of band mode except that management frames are not forwarded over the wireless link Connection to the management agent is solely through the management port of the local CMU The management channel CIR control is disabled in out of band local mode Out of band local management is the default management mode If the management port is not accessible remotely this mode should be changed to permit remote management In band management In the in band management mode the management agent can be reached from the data port at the local CMU and assuming that the wireless link is established the data port at the remote CMU In this mode the management port is di
290. nd tools are ready Perform Preparing for installation on page 5 6 3 Install the ODUs and antennas by performing one or other of the following tasks Either Installing antenna with a single ODU on page 5 9 for each antenna and ODU pair Or Installing antenna with two ODUs and a coupler on page 5 24 Perform Installing the IF and ground cables on page 5 37 for each ODU Test the installation Perform Testing the installation on page 5 63 Install and ground the CMUs Perform Installing the CMU on page 5 73 yY oO ul amp Prepare the cables to connect the CMU to the Ethernet switch by performing Preparing the network connections unprotected on page 5 80 Do not complete these connections until antenna alignment is complete 8 Align the antennas and complete the configuration by performing the following tasks from Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment from Task 11 Aligning antennas on page 6 59 to Task 13 Connecting link to the network on page 6 70 9 Check that there are no alarms on any unit as described in Managing alarms on page 7 13 5 2 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installation process summary Installation process for protected links To install a link with the 1 1 Hot Standby link protection feature follow this process 1 10 It is common practice to pre configure the CMUs during staging before site installation Perform the following tasks from Chapter
291. nductor memories or other media Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola its licensors and other 3 Party supplied software certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material including the exclusive right to copy reproduce in any form distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material Accordingly any copyrighted material of Motorola its licensors or the 3 Party software supplied material contained in the Motorola products described in this document may not be copied reproduced reverse engineered distributed merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Furthermore the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication estoppel or otherwise any license under the copyrights patents or patent applications of Motorola or other 3rd Party supplied software except for the normal non exclusive royalty free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product Restrictions Software and documentation are copyrighted materials Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means without prior written permission of Motorola Solutions Inc License Agreements The software described in this document is the property
292. needs its own IF cable For details see Table 4 1 At least four grips are required per protected link For details see Table 4 1 Four kits are required per protected link For details see Table 4 1 Additional grounding kits may be required to cover all IF cable grounding points For details see Table 4 1 Required for crimping N type connectors to IF cables For details see Table 4 1 4 7 Installation inventories Item Screened Cat5e cable ODU coupler mounting kit Pi e TEs e A y Out of band protection splitter CMU 1 CMU 2 Q MOTOROLA 1 1 OQut of Band Splitter Part No WB3807A Made in USA LISTS Me CLP Laane ELECTRICAL Serene CDA CANA Mia GOL Z CAUTION This preckect mand tee ienkaiied in ssctordancs with the inutruciions bn the User Guide LAN 1 LAN 2 a Protection cable 4 8 Chapter 4 Reference information Motorola description part number and notes For all copper connections from the CMU Ethernet ports Data or Management to any network switch Required for mounting one antenna with two ODUs Two kits are required per protected link Not required if antenna protection is implemented For part numbers refer to ODU coupler mounting specifications on page 4 50 Required for a protected link using out of band management Two splitters are required per protected link 1 1 Out of Band Splitter Kit Motorola part numb
293. nel Separation cece ec cece ecececeeseeeeeeseeees 4 81 Table 4 108 23 GHz ETSI with 14 MHz channel separation scccsseessessseesseesseesreeeseesseesse 4 82 Table 4 109 23 GHz ETSI with 28 MHz channel separation essssssscssrssresresreseresseereeseessees 4 82 Table 4 110 23 GHz ETSI with 56 MHz channel separation esesssssessrssresresressresreereesreesee 4 83 Table 4 111 26 GHz FCC with 10 MHz bandwidth ec ec ceec eee eceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeenenees 4 83 Table 4 112 20 GHZ FCC with 20 M Zz andwidth acesc ceciacansanssencenesaerivassnescuatiecimaniensatecae seeds 4 84 Table 4 113 26 GHz FCC with 40 MHz bandwidth 0 cece ecneceeeeceeeetecaececsesseecseeees 4 84 Table 4 114 26 GHz ETSI with 7 MHz channel Separation c ccc cece ececesceeeceeseeeeeeeeeees 4 85 Table 4 115 26 GHz ETSI with 14 MHz channel Separation ccc ccccceceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 4 85 Table 4 116 26 GHz ETSI with 28 MHz channel separation sescsssessessseesseesseesreesseesseeese 4 86 Table 4 117 26 GHz ETSI with 56 MHz channel Separation ccc cc eccecececeeeeseeeeeeseeees 4 86 Table 4 118 38 GHz FCC and Canada with 10 MHz bandwidth cece ec eeeee ee eees 4 87 Table 4 119 38 GHz FCC and Canada with 50 MHz bandwidth cece ec eceeeeeeeenes 4 87 Table 4 120 38 GHz ETSI with 7 MHz channel Separation cece ec cece ecececeeseeeeeeseeees 4 88 Table 4 121 38 GHz ETSI
294. net then you will only use the medium which best meets your specific needs and will not loan rent lease or transfer the other media contained in the package without Motorola s written consent Unauthorized copying of the Software or Documentation or failure to comply with any of the provisions of this Agreement will result in automatic termination of this license Confidentiality You acknowledge that all Software and Documentation contain valuable proprietary information and trade secrets and that unauthorized or improper use of the Software and Documentation will result in irreparable harm to Motorola for which monetary damages would be inadequate and for which Motorola will be entitled to immediate injunctive relief If applicable you will limit access to the Software and Documentation to those of your employees and agents who need to use the Software and Documentation for your internal business purposes and you will take appropriate action with those employees and agents to preserve the confidentiality of the Software and Documentation using the same degree of care to avoid unauthorized or improper disclosure as you use for the protection of your own proprietary software but in no event less than reasonable care You have no obligation to preserve the confidentiality of any proprietary information that i was in the public domain at the time of disclosure ii entered the public domain through no fault of yours iii was given to
295. ng the link on page 8 9 It may also be due to incorrect configuration or adverse weather conditions This is probably due toa configuration error or the wrong license being applied to one of the CMUs This is probably due toa configuration error This is probably due toa configuration error 7 17 Managing alarms and events Alarm Protection Availability Status Protection Configuration Status Protection Interface Status Definition This indicates whether the current configuration is capable of supporting protection This indicates whether the configuration will support protection When this indicates Not Protecting then additional status values are displayed that indicate which attributes are inconsistent between the two CMUs at a protected end This reports whether the neighbor CMU is successfully responding physically disconnected or whether it is physically connected but not responding perhaps because it is powered down Managing email alerts Chapter 7 Operation Likely cause If a unit is not protected or not protecting check the configuration of both units and check for additional alarms Check that the protection interface is correctly installed Check whether fault protection switching is enabled See Testing protection switchover on page 8 12 See Check the configuration of the active and inactive units on page 8 13 for further details of which att
296. ning considerations Link planning Process The majority of the 6 to 38 GHz spectrum is licensed on a link by link basis Licensing regimes vary from country to country and the planning process must sometimes be adapted to local circumstances The link planning process typically consists of the following steps Identify suitable sites at the ends of the link Determine the data capacity and availability required for the link Determine the protection requirements for the link o Either no protection required o Or CMU and ODU protection required o Or CMU ODU and antenna protection required e Select an RF band taking into account the range of link the capacity required the availability required the licensing policy for bands in the region or country and likely availability of individual licenses in that band Use the PTP LINKPlanner to check that a satisfactory unobstructed line of sight path is possible between the ends Use PTP LINKPlanner to investigate the performance increase provided by enabling ACM Apply for an individual license Use the PTP LINKPlanner with the license details to identify a Bill of Materials for the link Order equipment from Motorola Motorola offers a license coordination service for links in the USA The service includes link study PCN FCC application filling Schedule K completion and one year license protection warranty The FCC Microwave license coordination se
297. nnbsndegdisuhenrnstnadeedteniecadedeatstadaaiaabretassnatesdeoes 5 75 CMU with rack mount kit and blanking plate cece ececeeeeneneneenenees 5 76 PES ant Ena e EEI E A E EAA A E E E AA A A EE E TE 5 76 Rack mounted CMU with a right angled IF cable connector ce cee eee 5 76 CMU ground 0 espirisi ninina an E AET 5 77 Motorola AC t DC CONVOTIOT eean aana ARRE aei 5 79 Copper data interface connections ssessssessreesreessecsseresecesecrseceeseceseesseeeseeeeee 5 80 xii phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 List of Figures Figure 5 24 Fiber data interface connections 31 diva ssssenastedaenvhodiacasussenneoes datatheaseerdessceausanssanl 5 81 Figure 5 25 Management interface CONNEC CIIONS wees csiszeciccatdernndarseseseneucedashcusseasieensesmaadeveesaeess 9 82 Figure 5 26 Out of band protection splitter CONNECTIONS cccececececeeeeeeee eee eneeeneaeaenenes 5 85 Figure 5 27 Redundant copper interface CONNECTIONS cccecececececeeneneneeececececececeaeaeees 5 86 Figure 5 28 Redundant fiber interface CONNECTIONG cccccecececeecececsceceeeesececscuceeeeseceees 9 87 Figure 5 29 Protection cable CONNCCUONG scccccsveaccoacahansansveanndoemmavacereeateannivesenieccsaiaciabemiaeaes 5 88 Figure 6 1 Local Area Connection Properties dialog sesnssssssssssesessessssessesessesessesesseseeseses 6 3 Figure 6 2 Internet Protocol TCP IP Prop
298. normal operation set this attribute to Enabled Primary Secondary mode Indicates whether the CMU is to be the primary or secondary unit A primary unit will be the active unit excepting after a protection switchover when the secondary unit has taken over phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 6 45 Task 9 Configuring protection interface 6 46 Attribute Antenna Protection Primary Recovery Primary Recovery Period Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Meaning Indicates whether both ODUs at the protected link are to be connected to the same antenna using a coupler or to two separate antennas one per ODU Only available when Primary Secondary Mode is Secondary Indicates whether or not the Primary unit if the Secondary takes over should switch back to active operation automatically Only available when Primary Secondary Mode is Secondary and Primary Recovery is Enabled The period of fault free time that must elapse on the Primary unit before a protection switch back to the Primary can occur phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 10 Configuring wireless interface Task 10 Configuring wireless interface The Installation Wizard handles the important configuration settings that must be set to comply with the individual license conditions These settings can only be changed using the Installation Wizard This task consists of the following procedure
299. ns cable included AC DC Power Supply Convertor Motorola part number WB3622 DC connector A DC connector is supplied in the CMU kit Compatible DC connectors are also available from three manufacturers Molex 395305004 Tyco 4 796634 4 Phoenix Contact 1757035 4 10 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide item Mains Lead for AC to DC converter CMU rack mount kit Right angle IF cable connector SFP Gig E fiber pluggable module Fiber cable and connectors phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Installation inventories Motorola description part number and notes Mains Lead US 3pin to C5 PTP800 AC DC PSU Motorola part number WB3618 Mains Lead UK 3pin to C5 PTP800 AC DC PSU Motorola part number WB3619 Mains Lead EU with dual earth to C5 PTP800 AC DC PSU Motorola part number WB3620 Mains Lead AUS 3pin to C5 PTP800 AC DC PSU Motorola part number WB3621 Only appropriately rated and approved mains leads in accordance with the regulations of the country of use should be used with this equipment Required for rack mounted CMUs PTP800 CMU PTP SYNC 19inch Rack Mount Installation Kit Motorola part number WB3486 Kit contents bracket washers screws nuts handles and rack mount blank plate A right angle connector can make it easier to install the CMU in the rack RF CONNECTOR N MALE RIGHT ANGLE
300. ns in the State registering or searching it is unable to detect the PTP 800 at the other end of the link This may be due to the unit at the other end of the link not being operational being incorrectly configured aligned or due to adverse weather conditions This is probably due toa configuration error such as an auto negotiation or forced configuration mismatch The Ethernet data port has been disabled remotely by a management system The physical port continues to remain operational but no data is transmitted 7 21 Managing alarms and events Chapter 7 Operation Cause and action SNMP Trap name dataPortFiberStatusTrap Description A problem has been detected with the fiber interface on the data Ethernet port The attribute dataPotrtFiberStatus identifies which problem has been detected The detection of Ethernet There are three possible causes 1 The fiber interface has been installed but disabled because the license key does not include fiber Support 2 The interface could not be established even though a fiber carrier was detected This could be due to a broken TX fiber or because the interface is disabled at the other end of the fiber link 3 The interface could not be established and no fiber carrier is detected managementPortConfigur ationMismatchTrap managementPortDisabled WarningTrap oDUStatusTrap fragments runt packets on the data Ethernet
301. ntenna accessories Figure 1 8 Remote mount antenna waveguide interface Remote mount kits The purpose of the Remote Mount Kit RMK is to provide a means of mounting the ODU or coupler to the mast The RMK provides an alternative to mounting the ODU directly onto a direct mount antenna The RMK and antenna are connected together using Motorola s flexible waveguide The RMK has the following functions The RMK provides a means of clamping to the mast The RMK provides a cylindrical transition Figure 1 10 onto which the ODU directly mounts The other side of the transition Figure 1 9 is then connected to the antenna via a flexible waveguide The ODU is mechanically secured onto the RMK using the spring loaded latches and securing bolts The choice of remote mount kit depends upon the frequency variant Refer to ODU remote mount kit specifications on page 4 30 In each case the RMK connects to a waveguide interface antenna using standard flexible waveguide One RMK is required for each ODU The 11 GHz RMK is always used with a tapered transition between the antenna and the flexible waveguide phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 1 15 Antenna and antenna accessories Chapter 1 Product description Figure 1 9 Remote mount kit showing the waveguide interface Figure 1 10 Remote mount kit showing the ODU interface 1 16 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide
302. ntenna specifications Motorola can supply the antennas listed in Table 4 40 and Table 4 41 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the 26 GHz band frequency range 24 25 26 50 GHz Table 4 40 Antenna specifications for 26 GHz single polarization Motorola number 85010089016 85010089044 85009298008 85010089019 Diameter 0 3 m 1 ft 0 6 m 2 ft 1 0 m 3 ft 1 2 m 4 ft Interface Mid band MDM MDM MDM MDM MDM Motorola direct mount Table 4 41 Antenna specifications for 26 GHz dual polarization Motorola number 85010092016 85010092055 85010092047 85010092019 Diameter 0 3 m 1 ft 0 6 m 2 ft 1 0 m 3 ft 1 2 m 4 ft phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 gain 36 6 dBi 41 6 dBi 45 8 dBi 47 4 dBi Interface Mid band gain Vertical beam width 2 ew 0 8 0 6 PBR220 36 6 dBi PBR220 41 6 dBi PBR220 45 8 dBi PBR220 47 4 dBi Weight 6 kg 13 lb 11 kg 25 1b 24 kg 53 Ib 46 kg 101 1b Vertical Weight beam width 2 0 L5 0 8 0 6 6 kg 13 Ib 11 kg 25 lb 24 kg 53 Ib 46 kg 101 1b 4 39 Antenna specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Antenna specifications 38 GHz Motorola can supply the antennas listed in Table 4 42 and Table 4 43 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the 38 GHz band frequency range 37 39 5 GHz Table 4 42 Antenna specifications for 38 GHz single polarization Motorola number Diameter Interface Mid Vertic
303. ntenna with tapered transition and waveguide The 11GHz remote mount antenna requires the use of the tapered transition fitted between the antenna and the flexible waveguide The tapered transition converts from the PDR100 waveguide flange on the antenna to the UBR120 flange on the flexible waveguide To mount an 11 GHz antenna with taper transition and flexible waveguide proceed as follows 1 Mount the bracket on the antenna 2 Remove the protective film from the antenna waveguide and fit the gasket supplied in the kit 5 22 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing antenna with a single ODU 4 Fit the seal to the tapered transition supplied in the kit 5 Use the four screws supplied in the kit to fit the flexible waveguide to the tapered transition It makes taping the joint easier if the four screws are inserted in the direction shown b f 6 Use FT TB fusion tape Andrews part FT TB to water proof the junctions as shown phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 5 23 Installing antenna with two ODUs and a coupler Chapter 5 Installation Installing antenna with two ODUs and a coupler Perform this task when one antenna is to be connected to two ODUSs via a coupler either in a direct mount or remote mount configuration If a direct mount configuration is required perform Direct mounting of antenna with two ODUs and coupler on page 5 25 If a remote mount
304. o provide adequate support for a 900mm flexible waveguide two hangers are required To assemble the flexible waveguide hangers proceed as follows 1 Check the flexible waveguide hanger kit contents 2 Assemble the pole clip making note of the angle of the slots in the metal strip 5 16 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing antenna with a single ODU 3 Fit the rubber moulding clamp to the studding 5 Temporarily fit the rubber mouldings 6 Check the finished assembly phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 17 Installing antenna with a single ODU Chapter 5 Installation Attaching antenna and waveguide to pole A NOTE If the antenna is 11 GHz a tapered transition must be fitted between the antenna and waveguide as described in Mounting an 11 GHz antenna with tapered transition and waveguide on page 5 22 To mount the antenna on the pole and attach it to the ODU via the flexible waveguide proceed as follows 1 Follow the antenna manufacturer s instructions to attach the antenna to its bracket and to the mast or pole 2 Check that the waveguide antenna and remote mount kit have compatible interfaces Check that the mating surfaces are clean and free from damage 3 Fit one of the O ring seals supplied with the waveguide kit to the flexible waveguide flange that has the O ring groove 5 18 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave Use
305. o the antenna when the transmitter is on Always mute the transmitter before undertaking maintenance activities in front of the antenna Ensure that people cannot stand or walk in front of the antenna within 10 degrees of the antenna axis and within the minimum distances listed in Table 4 130 ETSI or Table 4 131 FCC The minimum distances in these tables have been calculated using worst case assumptions Reduced separation distances may be appropriate under some circumstances Further details are provided in Radiation hazard assessment on page 4 96 Thermal safety The CMU may be hot to the touch when in operation The CMU must not be operated in ambient temperatures exceeding 40 deg C unless mounted in a Restricted Access Location For more information see Maximum operating ambient temperature for the CMU on page 5 73 I phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 Contents Figures and Tables Contents Important safety INTOFITIATION sissisicnecsnssnteieainaevananwadessateaswaranwacsawadeaseusssniadsbwieuetsneandecaia l POUT THIS WISE ODIO iar ascites saaa a aai 1 E LE m T g EEI A ET ETET A EE TO E E E tee E EE P EEEE A 2 Sigs SOM GUL GC a E anette tt T T re te renter kre aren eee tre ears T ONE E rete N T O T 2 01 sa aE E E R A 3 Sloe ecco T E O E EE E A E EEEE A 4 Peporhon MODI I erein E E bac dame tea ET 2 SPUY aUI ssori EEE EEEE TEE OE EREE 7 aa e E 0161 18 o AE E E E E A E A E ETET O N E ION er E 8 Caring for the enyiron meb erieririir
306. oceed as follows 1 Perform a complete sweep of the elevation range of the antenna by adjusting the elevation angle incrementally The extent of the sweep depends upon antenna gain Measure RSSI voltage at each point in the sweep The resulting plot of voltage against elevation should be symmetrical Record the elevation angle that appears to be at the axis of symmetry as this is likely to be the correct angle for aligning with the other antenna Figure 6 37 ANOTE Figure 6 37 shows the axis of symmetry occurring at a voltage peak However it is possible for the axis of symmetry and therefore the correct elevation angle to occur at a voltage trough Figure 6 38 Set the elevation angle to the axis of symmetry as identified in the plot Perform a complete sweep of the azimuth range of the antenna and record the resulting plot of voltage against azimuth Set azimuth angle to the centre of the range over which the maximum RSSI voltage is recorded phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 6 63 Task 11 Aligning antennas Figure 6 37 Symmetrical relationship between voltage and alignment 0 Lt i if if 7 i ff Th UP Stor aa eee Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment sot ttt cP Cp CT RSSI voltage 20 nd n _30 AWF l N 40 180 120 60 0 60 Antenna alignment degrees Figure 6 38 Typical RSSI voltage peaks and troughs Elevation sweep False peak RSS
307. of mounting the ODU directly to the antenna without the need for additional mounting brackets or waveguides The ODU fits directly over the antenna s centrally positioned cylindrical transition and is secured in place using the integral spring loaded latches Figure 1 7 There is no direct mount option for dual polarization configurations phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 1 13 Antenna and antenna accessories Chapter 1 Product description Figure 1 6 Direct mount mechanical interface The waveguide interface antennas Figure 1 8 are used when the ODU must be mounted separately from the antenna The ODU is fitted to an ODU remote mount kit RMK The antenna is connected to the RMK waveguide interface using a 0 9 m 35 inch flexible waveguide supplied by Motorola Waveguide interface antennas are available as a dual polarization option in all frequency bands the antenna providing one interface for V feed and one interface for H feed This allows two ODUs operating on different frequencies within the same band to share the same antenna Motorola also supplies a single polarization option This may be used for 1 1 protected links A NOTE The 11 GHz waveguide interface antenna requires an extra component the 11 GHz tapered transition This is supplied by Motorola and is required to convert between the antenna interface and the waveguide flange 1 14 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Antenna and a
308. oftware upgrade The management agent supports application software upgrade using the web based interface PTP 800 software images are digitally signed and the CMU will accept only images that contain a valid Motorola PTP digital signature The CMU always requires a reboot to complete a software upgrade The CMU application software image contains an embedded software image for the ODU If a CMU software upgrade introduces a new ODU software version then the ODU software is upgraded automatically following reboot of the CMU A NOTE Obtain the application software and this user guide from the support website BEFORE warranty expires A NOTE CMU software version must be the same at both ends of the link Limited operation may sometimes be possible with dissimilar software version but such operation is not supported by Motorola The management process for software upgrade is described in detail in Task 5 Upgrading software version on page 6 24 Software can be downgraded using Recovery mode as described in Downgrading PTP 800 software on page 7 56 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 1 47 System management Chapter 1 Product description Recovery mode The PTP 800 recovery mode provides a means to recover from serious configuration errors including lost or forgotten passwords and unknown IP addresses Recovery mode also allows new main application software to be loaded even when the integrity of the existing main application software
309. ollows 1 Select menu option License Key The Software License Key page is displayed Figure 6 10 2 Check the attributes in the Capability summary section Table 6 6 3 If the current capabilities do not meet the operator s requirements then determine the new requirements phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 6 21 Task 4 Installing license keys Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Figure 6 10 Software License Key page Software License Key Install a new license key to enable additional capabilities License key data entry License Key 1b49 c c32 40955 8206 bdcs d de e 0 c247 Validate license key Reset Form Capability summary Product Name lotorola PTP 600 MAC Address 00 04 56 30 00 bf Encryption Algorthm AES 128 amp 256 bit Rijndael Transmit Capacity 100 Mbps Table 6 6 Capability summary attributes Attribute Meaning Product Name The name of the PTP 800 product variant MAC Address The MAC address of the PTP 800 Encryption Algorithm The encryption algorithms available for use at the wireless interface of the CMU Encryption algorithm and keys must be the same at BOTH ends of the link for it to function correctly This attribute is only displayed if the current license key permits encryption To determine upgrade requirements see Security on page 1 49 Transmit Capacity Maximum transmit data rate for Ethernet frames To determine upgrade requirements see Capacity upgrades on page 1 49 6 22 phn 147
310. on Selection is set to Adaptive Select the lowest modulation mode allowed by the license This control is only visible for certain regions when Radio License Modulation Selection is set to Adaptive Enter the maximum permitted strength of the radio Signal in dBm EIRP Enter the licensed transmit frequency MHz 6 53 Task 10 Configuring wireless interface Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Attribute Meaning Radio License Rx Enter the licensed receive frequency MHz Frequency Step 3 Configuring wireless parameters When the Step 3 Wireless Configuration page is displayed Figure 6 30 or Figure 6 31 enter the wireless configuration attributes Table 6 13 Select Next Figure 6 30 Step 3 Wireless Configuration page step 3 Enter wireless configuration Wireless configuration data entry Attributes Value units Maximum Transmit Power Max 15 0 Min 7 0 h 5 Brn ll Back Hext gt gt Figure 6 31 Step 3 Wireless Configuration page ETSI adaptive modulation step 3 Enter wireless configuration Wireless configuration data entry Attributes waue units Maximum Transmit Power Max 17 0 Min 7 0 42 2 o Brn Max Mod Mode Max 1260 4M 0 76 Min Mod Mode eps BPSK 0 56 w ala Back Next phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 10 Configuring wireless interface Table 6 13 Step 3 Wireless Configuration attributes Attribute
311. on with no coupler Waveguide specifications are provided in Flexible waveguide specifications on page 4 41 The status of the ODU If the ODU is not connected to the CMU this attribute is set to No Response with a red background This is set in the factory It consists of frequency band Tx Rx frequency spacing Hi or Lo band and transmit frequency range This is set in the factory It uniquely identifies the ODU This is set in the factory It is the absolute maximum transmitter power level This is set in the factory It is the absolute minimum transmitter power level 6 49 Task 10 Configuring wireless interface Attribute IF Cable Length Modem Short Power Cycle For Recovery A NOTE Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Value Enter the total length of the IF cable from the ODU to the CMU in meters or feet as appropriate The maximum permitted length is 190 meters 620 ft for standard IF cable A NOTE If the required IF cable length is between 190 and 300 meters 620 ft and 980 ft contact Technical Support The units can be changed using the Properties web page If set to Enabled a short power cycle will cause the CMU to boot in recovery mode If set to Disabled the CMU will boot in recovery mode only through use of the front panel recovery switch If it is reasonably easy to access the CMU to press the Recovery button then set to Disabled Set to Enabled only if
312. onform to the relevant published specifications and will be free from material defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service Motorola shall within this time at its own option either repair or replace the defective product within thirty 30 days of receipt of the defective product Repaired or replaced product will be subject to the original warranty period but not less than thirty 30 days phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 3 13 Limit of liability Chapter 3 Legal information Limit of liability IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PARTY FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL EXEMPLARY OR OTHER DAMAGE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS OR FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY EVEN IF MOTOROLA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above exclusion or limitation may not apply to you INNO CASE SHALL MOTOROLA S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT 3 14 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 Chapter 4 Chapter 4 Reference information This chapter describes the physical environmental safety wireless and electromagnetic specifications for PTP 800 The following topics are described in this
313. ons varies depending upon which units are active and which are inactive For the example in Figure 7 10 the buttons and their functions are as follows Disable Fault Protection Effect of this button the Tx Hi inactive unit icon changes color to red the Fault Protection Disabled message is displayed and the button text changes to Enable Fault Protection This changes the Figure 7 10 configuration to Protected Link Primary 10 10 10 12 10 10 10 13 Secondary d Fault Protection Fault Protection Disabled Disabled Make Hi Secondary Make Hi Secondary and Make Lo Primary Active Lo Primary Active Active Enable Fault Enable Fault Protection Protection phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 7 33 Managing wireless link protection Chapter 7 Operation Enable Fault Protection Effect of this button the Tx Lo inactive unit icon changes color to green the Fault Protection Disabled message is removed and the button text changes to Disable Fault Protection This changes the Figure 7 10 configuration to Protected Link Primary 10 10 10 12 10 10 10 13 Secondary Make Hi Secondary Make Hi Secondary and Make Lo Primary Active Lo Primary Active Active Disable Fault Disable Fault Protection Protection Protection switching can also be enabled or disabled from the Protection Configuration page as described in Task 9 Configuring protection interface on page 6 42 7 34 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011
314. orce a protection switch to them before upgrading the active units This approach maximizes system availability 6 28 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 5 Upgrading software version To upgrade the software proceed as follows 1 2 Download and save the new software image PTP 800 nn mm dld2 Select menu option Software Upgrade The Software Upgrade page is displayed Figure 6 13 Select Browse Navigate to the folder containing the downloaded software image and select Open Select Upload Software I mage The Software Upgrade Confirmation page is displayed Figure 6 14 Select Program Software I mage into Non Volatile Memory The Progress Tracker page is displayed On completion the Software Upgrade Complete page is displayed Figure 6 15 Select Reboot Wireless Unit Select OK to confirm The unit reboots with the new software installed Figure 6 13 Software Upgrade page software Upgrade This utility allows an operator to upgrade a PTP wireless units operational software Current software image description Software Version 8200 01 00 Boot monitor Boot 01 01 Recovery software image Recovery 01 02 Please select a new software image did Browse Upload Software Image phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 6 29 Task 5 Upgrading software version Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Figure 6 14 Software Upgrade Confirmation page software Upgrade
315. ord Product refers to Motorola s MOTOwi4 fixed wireless broadband devices for which the Software and Documentation is licensed for use Grant of license Motorola Solutions Inc Motorola grants you Licensee or you a personal nonexclusive non transferable license to use the Software and Documentation subject to the Conditions of Use set forth in Conditions of use and the terms and conditions of this Agreement Any terms or conditions relating to the Software and Documentation appearing on the face or reverse side of any purchase order purchase order acknowledgment or other order document that are different from or in addition to the terms of this Agreement will not be binding on the parties even if payment is accepted 3 2 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Motorola Solutions Inc end user license agreement Conditions of use Any use of the Software and Documentation outside of the conditions set forth in this Agreement is strictly prohibited and will be deemed a breach of this Agreement 1 Only you your employees or agents may use the Software and Documentation You will take all necessary steps to insure that your employees and agents abide by the terms of this Agreement 2 You will use the Software and Documentation i only for your internal business purposes ii only as described in the Software and Documentation and iii in strict accordance
316. orientation of LPUs IF Cable Chapter 5 Installation phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing the IF and ground cables Preparing IF cables Prepare the following lengths of IF cable ODU LPU IF cable Cut a short section of IF cable to connect the ODU to the top LPU Fit N type connectors to both ends as described in Fitting an N type connector to an IF cable on page 5 39 Main IF cable Prepare a long section of IF cable to connect the top LPU to the bottom LPU o Cut this to the approximate length required allowing a bit of surplus or leave it on the drum so that it can be unwound as the cable is hoisted o Slide one or more hoisting grips onto the top end of the main IF cable as described in Hoisting the main IF cable on page 5 51 o Fit an N type connector to the top end only as described in Fitting an N type connector to an IF cable on page 5 39 LPU CMU IF cable Prepare a short section of IF cable to connect the bottom LPU to the CMU o Cut this to the approximate length required allowing a bit of surplus o Fit an N type connector to the LPU end only as described in Fitting an N type connector to an IF cable on page 5 39 Fitting an N type connector to an IF cable The crimp tool for the standard N type connector is available from Motorola see Table 4 5 ANOTE Not all connectors and crimp tools are compatible If any other
317. ormation including faults between two CMUs A NOTE Figure 1 15 and Figure 1 16 show the network connections for in band management The connections are different if out of band management is implemented phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 1 25 1 1 Hot Standby link protection Chapter 1 Product description Figure 1 15 Protected end without antenna protection ra Primary ODU HILANA EEE EE Morora man Antenna LEE EE Corr N WAN AMAL Z 7 secondary ODU IF cables Primary CMU Secondary CMU 0 i o Protection cable Network cables in band management shown I O Houd GOGA Ethernet switch 1 26 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide 1 1 Hot Standby link protection Figure 1 16 Protected end with antenna protection if aa Primary Primary ODU 31 antenna o i So aoo q J A A a Secondary Secondary ODU SBR antenna yi So lt IF cable IF cable Primary CMU Secondary CMU Ol E O Cie amp Protection cable Network cables in band management shown EI Ly O OOHO OA Ethernet switch phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 1 27 1 1 Hot Standby link protection Chapter 1 Product description Operation of a protected link To configure protection typically during installation use the Protection page see Task 9 Configuring protection interface on page 6 42 One neighbor must be configured as Primary the other neighbor as
318. ort b Wireless Link Status is Up green Figure 6 39 c Receive Power at both end is within the range predicted by the planning report Figure 6 39 If any of the above requirements are not met antenna alignment is not complete refer to troubleshooting section Installing the link on page 8 9 If all of the above requirements are met select Alignment Complete Figure 6 39 If antenna alignment cannot be performed now and must be deferred select Abandon Alignment This cancels the Install Wizard without doing alignment The transmitter is muted and the Step 7 Alignment Abandoned page is displayed Figure 6 40 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 6 65 Task 11 Aligning antennas Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Figure 6 39 Step 6 Antenna Alignment page link established step 6 Antenna Alignment The system is now in antenna alignment mode The transmitter is radiating at maximum power Click Alignment Complete when the antenna i correctly aligned Click Abandon Alignment to abandon alignment The transmitter will be muted Alignment status ODU Status Transmitter Status Transmit Power 15 0 50 5 60 0 15 0 dBm Recenve Power 61 0 f0 6 0 0 61 3 dBm Wector Error 4 3 10 4 31 7 31 6 dB Link Losa 148 9 rT 0 0 135 2 dB Wireless Link Status Abandon Alignment Alignment Complete Figure 6 40 Alignment Abandoned step 7 Alignment Abandoned The installation process has been a
319. osendereinandecturecnsntnctsdatesdeats NA aeaaeai 7 14 Table 7 11 SNMP traps supported by PTP 900 cesccescrsiorcerigaistemvencesaoaseaenattrrereniatpaiarateoneansa 7 19 Table 7 12 Protected Link page symbols and text soessessessessessesresseseeseeseeseeseesesseeseesessee 7 29 Table 7 13 System Statistics and Counters attributes ssesseseesseseesesseesesseesesseseesseseesseseeo 7 42 Table 7 14 Recovery options esseereseseresssseeseesorsresersresessorsereeeserseseersereeeserresereresessreserserseeses 7 52 Table 8 1 CMU power indicator checks sesesseesseeseesseessressseessecsseessecesseesseesseceseceseeeseeeseeesee 8 2 Table 8 2 DC supply checks when CMU power indicator is off ossseesesseesesseesessessesseseesee 8 2 Table 3 3 CMU status CO OS aierseeteseenstoiinnthaiatingd peidantusaudebenebsciebbalesiiat nes EErEE EEK EES 8 3 Table 8 4 Management port indicator checKks sssesessessessessessessesecssesecsseseeseeseeseeseesesseeseese 8 4 Table 8 5 Copper Data port indicator checks escsssssssseresssesssessreessseesseeseeesseceseceeeeeseecsseesee 8 5 Table 8 6 Fiber Data port indicator CheECKS ccccccecececcecececcscaceccnsacceaesacssceteceusececceeaseacs 8 6 Table 0 7 Ping response gi a 6 1 6 lt r ener r repna eee eee eee eae eet Steen eee a eee ee 8 8 Tapie ee ODU statis ta cn she ase ctenaeannamiantacancdeydsadsiiota tesa c ni natiantenssaarernodondssedeatkGhnanceintiees 8 9
320. otected Link management In a protected link configuration each of the PTP 800s is managed as a separate piece of equipment Thus although an inactive unit does not forward traffic when remote management is enabled it both receives and responds to management traffic For a protected link in band and out of band management is supported Make sure that the same management mode is selected for both ends of a protected link See Management network on page 1 37 for a further explanation of management modes For remote management both active and inactive PTP 800 units are manageable by the management system IP addresses Fach of the CMUs must be configured with a different IP address Ethernet switch requirements for a protected link It is very important to select the Ethernet switch carefully for a protected link It is unlikely that requirements will be satisfied by an inexpensive unmanaged switch When the active and inactive CMUs are both connected to the Ethernet switch the switch is responsible for deciding which connection is operational and for routing traffic to it In this configuration if a protection switchover occurs the PTP 800 drops the link for 0 5 to 1 second to indicate that the switch must flush its filter database and discover new routes Therefore any Ethernet switch connected to the PTP 800 must fully support this feature If in band management is used the Ethernet switch at the remote end ofa protection link
321. oth protected and unprotected links In a 1 1 protected interface disable protection switchover before disabling wireless transmission see Enabling and disabling fault protection on page 7 33 Otherwise a switchover to the inactive unit may occur when the wireless interface is muted Re enable protection switchover when wireless transmission is re enabled phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 7 25 Disabling and enabling the wireless interface Chapter 7 Operation Figure 7 8 System Configuration page System Configuration This page controls the day to day configuration of the PTF wireless unit Attributes Transmitter Enabled Mute Transmitter Attributes Link Link Mame Test of AM Installation wizard ste Mame Cool wi all Antenna Antenna Gain 35 0 RF Feeder Loss 0 0 IF Cable IF Cable Length Modem short Power Cycle For Recovery Disabled Radio License Radio License Identifier Radio License Band 18 GHz Radio License Region ETSI Radio License Channel Separation T MHZ Radio License Max EIRP 30 0 Radio License Tx Freq 15192 5000 Radio License Rx Freg 19202 500 Radio License Modulation Selection Adaptive Modulation Radio License Ret Modulation 1260 4 0 76 Wireless Maximum Transmit Power hax 17 0 Min 7 0 4 EIRP 55 0 User ACM Highest Mod Mode Please re select the Maximum Mod Mogde jag User SCM Lowest Mod Mode Encryption Algorithm None SES 128 bit Riindael Encryption Key
322. otter can trace the following statistics refer to Table 7 13 for definitions Vector Error Rx Power Tx Power Link Loss Rx Data Rate Tx Data Rate Aggregate Data Rate Protection State In a 1 1 Hot Standby configuration only one CMU ODU at a given end of the link is Active at any one time the neighbor CMU ODU being Inactive The Protection State indicates whether a CMU ODU is in the Active or Inactive state Remote Primary Secondary Mode This indicates the Primary Secondary Mode of the active unit at the remote end of the wireless link To plot diagnostics proceed as follows 1 Select menu option Diagnostics Plotter The Diagnostics Plotter page is displayed Figure 7 14 Use the Diagnostics Selector drop down list to select a diagnostic type to plot Use the Trace Selection to select traces of the maximum mean or minimum values of the diagnostic type Maximum values are displayed in red mean values are displayed in purple and minimum values are displayed in blue Select Plot Selected Diagnostic The trace is displayed in the graph phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 7 45 Managing performance Chapter 7 Operation Figure 7 14 Diagnostics Plotter page Diagnostic Plotter The plot displays three traces Maximum values are displayed in red mean values are displayed in purple and minimum values are displayed in blue adres a Diagnostics Selector vector Error Ww 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 11d 2
323. oupler type ODU port maximum insertion losses 6 GHz 3 dB symmetric 6 dB asymmetric Main 1 9 dB Standby 7 5 dB 7 GHz to 26 GHz 3 dB symmetric 3 8 dB 6 dB asymmetric Main 1 8 dB Standby 7 2 dB 32 GHz to 38 GHz 3 dB symmetric 4 0 dB 6 dB asymmetric Main 2 0 dB Standby 7 4 dB phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 4 51 ODU coupler mounting specifications Coupler part numbers Band 6 GHz 6 GHz 7 GHz 7 GHz 8 GHz 8 GHz 11 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz 38 GHz Coupler type 3 dB symmetric 6 dB asymmetric 3 dB symmetric 6 dB asymmetric 3 dB symmetric 6 dB asymmetric 3 dB symmetric 6 dB asymmetric 3 dB symmetric 6 dB asymmetric 3 dB symmetric 6 dB asymmetric 3 dB symmetric 6 dB asymmetric 3 dB symmetric 6 dB asymmetric 3 dB symmetric 6 dB asymmetric 3 dB symmetric 6 dB asymmetric Chapter 4 Reference information Table 4 57 contains part numbers for Motorola supplied ODU coupler mounting kits Table 4 57 ODU coupler mounting kit part numbers Motorola part number 07010110021 07010110022 07010110001 07010110002 07010110003 07010110004 07010110005 07010110006 07010110007 07010110008 07010110009 07010110010 07010110011 07010110012 07010110013 07010110014 07010110015 07010110016 07010110019 07010110020 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Protection interface
324. out modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the tTollowing disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the GEShei bur on 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openss l org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpensshL PROJECT SAS ISE AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE phn 1478 _012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed
325. panning Tree Protocol Transmission Control Protocol Universal Resource Location United States of America Ultraviolet Virtual Local Area Network phn 1478_012v000 May 2011
326. performance low profile antennas for PTP 800 frequency bands in sizes from 0 3 m 1 ft to 1 8 m 6 ft The following antenna options are available o Remote mount kit o Tapered transition o Coupler mounting kit symmetric or asymmetric o Flexible waveguide and waveguide hangers Cabling and lightning protection The installation is connected using the following components o CNT 400 coaxial cable IF cable o Lightning protection units LPU o Coaxial cable installation assembly kits o Cable grounding kits 1 1 Hot Standby protection components o Protection splitter used with out of band management option o Protection cable used with customer data over redundant copper fiber with in band management option Typical PTP 800 site installations with grounding and lightning protection are shown schematically in Figure 2 5 on a mast and Figure 2 7 on a building For inventories and specifications of system components including part numbers refer to Chapter 4 Reference information 1 4 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Product variants The product variants are listed in Table 1 1 Table 1 1 PTP 800 product variants Licensed band Lower 6 GHz Upper 6 GHz 7 GHz 8 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Regions FCC IC ETSI ETSI ETSI ETSI FCC IC ETSI ETSI ETSI Mexico ANZ FCC IC ETSI Brazi
327. plete The ODU is not responding to management messages from the CMU Check connections and continue at Testing the installation on page 5 63 The CMU cannot power the ODU Check connections and continue at Testing the installation on page 5 63 The ODU is reporting a fault condition The ODU firmware is not compatible with the CMU Replace the ODU 8 9 Installing the link Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Transmitter status Transmitter status is indicated by the Transmitter Status attribute in the Status Screen of the web interface and in Step 6 Antenna Alignment of the Installation Wizard The transmitter is muted by default The transmitter is enabled automatically during installation in Step 6 Antenna Alignment of the Installation Wizard The transmitter may additionally be enabled or muted using the Configuration page of the web interface Go to the Status page or use the Installation Wizard and navigate to Step 6 Antenna Alignment Check the Transmitter Status attribute and take action as described in Table 8 9 Table 8 9 Transmitter Status checks Transmitter Status Action attribute Transmitting Continue at Antenna alignment on page 8 10 Muted By User The Antenna Alignment step of the Install Wizard has not been completed successfully or the transmitter has been muted using the Mute Transmitter button on the Configuration Page Restart the Installation Wizard Muted ODU Configuring Transmission is disabled
328. point of contact between the drop cable and the tower near the top A grounding kit must be installed at the bottom of the tower near the vertical to horizontal transition point This grounding kit must be bonded to the tower or tower ground bus bar TGB if installed If the tower is greater than 61 m 200 ft in height an additional grounding kit must be installed at the tower midpoint Additional ground kits must be installed as necessary to reduce the distance between ground kits to 61 m 200 ft or less In high lightning prone geographical areas additional ground kits should be installed at spacing between 15 to 22 m 50 to 75 ft This is especially important on towers taller than 45 m 150 ft phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Grounding and lightning protection Mast or tower protection diagrams Figure 2 5 shows the protection requirements for an ODU mounted on a metal tower or mast Figure 2 6 shows the protection requirements for a 1 1 Hot Standby protected end Figure 2 5 Grounding and lightning protection on mast or tower l ODU and antenna Network cable O PTP 800 ground cable o lt Lightning Protection Unit LPU _ aan ons THT TTT TAWA I WERNER In BER 4 lt First point of contact with tower y qe Mid point of tower Ground bus conductor 2 J Rack Ground Bar RGB Tower Ground Bar TG
329. port when the link is in full duplex operation The Administrative Status of the out of band management Ethernet interface has disabled Ethernet traffic This is probably due toa configuration error such as an auto negotiation or forced configuration mismatch The management Ethernet port has been disabled remotely by a management system Note that the physical port continues to operate but no data is transmitted over it The ODU Status indicates A change of status of the ODU dataPortStatusTrap has occurred the nature of the ODU fault A state of ok indicates that the ODU is fully operational although may not be transmitting A change of state for the data port has occurred The data port status has changed most significantly to up or down phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 SNMP Trap name managementPortStatusIr ap protectionAvailabilityStat usTrap configurationProtectionSt atusTrap wirelessReceiveSignalSta tusTrap licensedTransmitCapacity StatusTrap dataPortEthernetSpeedSt atusTrap PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Description Change of status of the out of band management Ethernet link This may indicate a status of down or copper link up Ina 1 1 Hot Standby configuration this indicates that protection is available Ina 1 1 Hot Standby configuration this indicates whether or not the configuration will support protection The Wirel
330. posite the connector face Shelf or bench top mounting If the CMU is installed on a shelf or bench top Figure 5 16 the CMU bracket must be used to secure the CMU The bracket screws to the base of the CMU 5 74 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing the CMU Figure 5 16 CMU mounted on bench Wall mounting The CMU bracket also acts as a wall mounting bracket Figure 5 17 The bracket may be placed against the wall to allow fixing holes to be made The bracket should then be secured to the CMU using the screws supplied before offering the assembly up to the wall for fixing A WARNING In order to comply with safety certification mount the CMU with the connectors facing upwards or downwards do not mount the CMU with the connectors facing sideways Figure 5 17 CMU mounted with bracket Rack mounting A rack mounting kit allows one or two CMUs to be installed in a 19 inch cabinet rack Figure 5 18 and Figure 5 19 The kit contains a blanking plate and CMU securing Screws phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 75 Installing the CMU Chapter 5 Installation Figure 5 18 CMU with rack mount kit and blanking plate To avoid damaging the RF cable route it in such a way that the minimum bend radius for the selected cable is always exceeded If cables are laid in an air handling cavity they must be Plenum rated A NOTE A right angle IF cable connector Motorola part numb
331. psed Time Active Available Time role of a 1 1 Hot Standby configuration since the last Statistics reset This is the time which the Wireless link status has been up Active Byte Count whilst the CMU ODU has been in the Active role of a 1 1 Hot Standby configuration The reported time is since the last statistics reset This reports the number of bytes received over the wireless Active Byte Error interface whilst the CMU ODU is in the Active role of a 1 1 Hot Standby configuration This count is since the last statistics reset This reports the number of byte errors which have been Count detected over the wireless interface whilst the CMU ODU is in the Active role of a 1 1 Hot Standby configuration This count is since the last statistics reset Other attributes Elapsed Time Indicator Time elapsed since the last system reboot Statistics Page Refresh Automatic page refresh period in seconds Period phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Managing performance Resetting system statistics and counters To reset system statistics and counters proceed as follows 1 From the left hand menu select Statistics The System Statistics and Counters page is displayed Figure 7 13 To reset the System Statistics attributes select Reset System Statistics To reset the Counters attributes select Reset System Counters Using the diagnostics plotter The diagnostics pl
332. ptional FIPS 197 128 256bit AES encryption Link planning with the PTP LINKPlanner 1 2 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Typical users Overview PTP 800 links may be used to provide high performance Ethernet communication for Enterprises Internet Service Providers ISPs Government agencies Cellular carriers Health care and hospitals Schools and universities Municipalities Public safety agencies Typical applications PTP 800 systems serve a wide variety of enterprise and carrier network applications including Building to building connectivity Leased line replacement Video surveillance Network redundancy e WiMAX LTE and 3G backhaul Data overlay networks Last mile access and connection phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 1 3 Overview Chapter 1 Product description System components The main components of the PTP 800 are Compact modem unit CMU The CMU is mounted indoors It converts data signals between Ethernet frames and a modulated intermediate frequency IF carrier The following CMU options are available o Capacity upgrades o Security upgrades o Fiber data interface o CMU rack mount kit Outdoor unit ODU The ODU is mounted near the antenna It converts signals between a modulated intermediate frequency IF and radio band frequencies Antenna and antenna accessories Motorola supplies high
333. quency and Number receive Spacing 01010611022 B2 Hi 8307 8377 MHz 01010611023 B3 Lo 8155 8225 MHz 01010611024 B3 Hi 8363 8433 MHz 01010611025 B4 Lo 8211 8281 MHz 01010611026 B4 Hi 8419 8489 MHz 01010611027 ETSI B1 Lo 7905 8024 MHz 266 MHz 01010611028 B1 Hi 8171 8290 MHz 01010611029 B2 Lo 8017 8136 MHz 01010611030 B2 Hi 8283 8402 MHz 01010611031 ETSI B2 Lo 7835 7971 MHz 311 MHz 01010611032 B2 Hi 8146 8282 MHz 01010611033 B3 Lo 7717 7867 MHz 01010611034 B3 Hi 8028 8178 MHz Motorola can supply the ODUs listed in Table 4 18 for PTP 800 links that will operate in the 11 GHz band frequency range 10 70 11 70 GHz Table 4 18 ODU specifications main frequency 11 GHz phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Motorola Standard Sub Sub band Transmit Part band frequency and Number receive Spacing 01010208001 FCC B5 Lo 10700 10890 MHz 490 MHz 01010208002 ETSI B5 Hi 11200 11390 MHz 224 500 MHz 01010208003 B6 Lo 10855 11045 MHz 01010208004 B6 Hi 11355 11545 MHz 01010208005 B7 Lo 11010 11200 MHz 01010208006 B7 Hi 11510 11700 MHz 01010208007 ETSI B1 Lo 10675 10855 MHz 530 MHz 01010208008 B1 Hi 11205 11385 MHz PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide ODU specifications Motorola Standard Sub Sub band Transmit Part band frequency and Number receive Spacing 01010208009 B2 Lo 10795 10975 MHz 01010208010 B2 Hi 11325 11505 MHz 01010208011 B3 Lo 10915 11135 M
334. r Guide Installing antenna with a single ODU 4 Using the waveguide flange fitted with the O ring fit the flexible waveguide to the remote mount Ensure that the waveguide cavity orientation matches the opening in the remote mount kit Fit four shorter screws using a spring washer and a plain washer on each screw It is sometimes more convenient to complete this operation before the assembly is fitted to the mast connecting the flexible waveguide to the antenna when fitting the remote mount to the mast 5 Fit the remote mount to the tower Fit an O ring seal to the antenna interface and secure the plain flange of flexible waveguide to the antenna Ensure that the waveguide cavity orientation matches the Opening in the antenna Secure the flexible waveguide using four of the shorter screws to the antenna Fit each screw with a spring washer and a plain washer phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 19 Installing antenna with a single ODU Chapter 5 Installation 6 Fit the rubber inserts from the hanger kit to the flex waveguide 7 Insert the rubber insert and flex waveguide into the hanger 5 20 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing antenna with a single ODU 9 When routing the flex waveguide ensure that the minimum bend radius is not exceeded p A phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 5 21 Installing antenna with a single ODU Chapter 5 Installation Mounting an 11 GHz a
335. r download at http www motorola com ptp software Major features may be available from time to time for an additional license fee If Motorola makes available to you major features and no other end user license agreement is provided then the terms of this Agreement will apply Maintenance Except as provided above Motorola is not responsible for maintenance or field service of the Software under this Agreement phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 3 5 Motorola Solutions Inc end user license agreement Chapter 3 Legal information Disclaimer MOTOROLA DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS IMPLIED STATUTORY OR IN ANY COMMUNICATION WITH YOU MOTOROLA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILTY NONINFRINGEMENT OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED AS IS MOTOROLA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED MOTOROLA MAKES NO WARRANTY WITH RESPECT TO THE CORRECTNESS ACCURACY OR RELIABILITY OF THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so the above exclusion may not apply to you Limitation of liability THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF MOTOROLA UNDER THIS AGREEMENT FOR DAMAGES WILL NOT EXCEED THE TOTAL AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE PRODUCT LICE
336. r level can be reduced by adding a fixed waveguide attenuator which requires a remote mount antenna PTP LINKPlanner provides the prediction in the form of an installation report A NOTE In a protected link the tolerances in the ODUs may result in the Receive Power delta between the primary and secondary units at same end of the link being different from the delta predicted by the network designer Configurations using a single antenna may have up to 5 dB additional delta when compared with the design value Where separate antennas are used the tolerances may increase if either path incurs any Excess Path Loss For more information refer to Checking system statistics and counters on page 7 40 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 6 69 Task 13 Connecting link to the network Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Task 13 Connecting link to the network Perform this task to connect to the network and set the system clock This task consists of the following procedures Completing and testing network connections on page 6 70 Setting the real time clock on page 6 71 Completing and testing network connections To complete and test the network connections proceed as follows 1 Disconnect the local PC from the CMU management port at each CMU 2 Connect the CMUs to the network equipment using the cables that were prepared in Preparing the network connections unprotected on page 5 80 or Preparing the network connections protected
337. r use by the general public or is intended to be used in the home phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Electromagnetic compliance European Union notification This product complies with the Class A limits for Radiated and Conducted Emissions It may cause interference if used in residential areas Such use must be avoided unless the user takes special measures to reduce electromagnetic emissions to prevent interference to the reception of radio and television broadcasts The PTP 800 is a Class 2 device as it operates on frequencies that are not harmonized across the EU The operator is responsible for obtaining any national licenses required to operate this product and these must be obtained before using the product in any particular country See http www ero dk for further information Hereby Motorola Solutions Inc declares that the PTP 800 product complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC The declaration of conformity may be consulted at http www motorola com ptp support This equipment is marked to show compliance with the European R amp TTE directive 1999 5 EC Figure 4 6 European Union compliance label 0889 1 This equipment may be used in the following EU states Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia Lithuania Luxembourg Malta
338. range 0 to 4094 that will be included in Ethernet frames generated by the management interfaces Only displayed when Use VLAN for Management Interfaces is enabled Figure 6 7 Enter the VLAN priority range 0 to 7 that will be included in Ethernet frames generated by the management interfaces 6 13 Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Attribute Meaning Management Mode Out of Band Local means that the web interface can be reached from the management port at the local CMU only This mode allows the construction of a management network that is isolated from the customer network This is the default mode For more information see Out of band local management on page 1 38 Out of Band means that the web interface can be reached from the management port at both the local and remote CMUs assuming that the wireless link is established For a protected link configuration access to the remote inactive unit requires connectivity between the management ports For more information see Out of band management on page 1 37 A NOTE If Out of Band is selected remember to set the Management Committed Information Rate Table 6 4 In Band means that the web interface can be reached from the data port at both the local and remote CMUs assuming that the wireless link is established In this mode the management port is disabled For a protected link connec
339. re used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life or physical injury A warning has the following format A WARNING Warning text and consequence for not following the instructions in the warning Cautions Cautions precede instructions and are used when there is a possibility of damage to systems software or individual items of equipment within a system However this damage presents no danger to personnel A caution has the following format Caution text and consequence for not following the instructions in the caution Notes A note means that there is a possibility of an undesirable situation or provides additional information to help the reader understand a topic or concept A note has the following format A NOTE Note text 8 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 Caring for the environment Caring for the environment The following information describes national or regional requirements for the disposal of Motorola supplied equipment and for the approved disposal of surplus packaging In EU countries The following information is provided to enable regulatory compliance with the European Union EU directives identified and any amendments made to these directives when using Motorola equipment in EU countries X Disposal of Motorola equipment European Union EU Directive 2002 96 EC Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE Do not dispose of Motorola equipment in landfill sites
340. rerati entr Erne EEE EERE EEEE EEEE 9 LICOP x peat S ees 10 B it NN asco E E E E EAEE nwa ea I E E EE E T E E T 10 Motorola license agreement ssesseseessesecsreseeseeseesesseesesseesessessessessesoeserseeseeseeseeseeseeseso 10 Chapter 1 Product description iii 1 1 E E T A E E E sec ee EA 1 2 EE A NE EE E E nara pew even aot E E A E E A S E T 1 2 TLU e A E a 1 3 ea E a 1 e EA E ee VE AEE et T E E A E ETE ATE P EEES 1 3 Bn attics ccecc cede EE E ETE ON 1 4 PE E a EA A A E T 1 5 Compact moden uni CMU Prensin ernai Aaa 1 6 ELTE e VFA PEET E E E A IESE IA E A AE TOT IEE P E A ETT 1 6 Re TE ea E I EEE EA A A A E A E E E EA ET TT 1 6 UE a A aa EEEE E 1 10 E E e E E N 1 10 E T OE E EE 1 11 Antenna and antenna accessories sssssseesrssesersesersesersesersrsresessesersrserseseeseseesessesessese 1 13 Antenna description csssscsseessesseessrersserssessserssecssecesecessecssecssecsereesseeseeeesecesseeseeeseeeeee 1 13 RODE E I E E E 1 15 ODU coupler mounting kit seeirerrrrreirrerirerereirit itini E NEEE EEEE EEE 1 17 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Contents Caping and lighting TIT asc nekenseann ensue kein casGaennbed ab aceemonianeleuhent benotie sesh EE 1 19 G efaymanaale protection ge e QUA ela s Fl heme nme ee ene a oe eee eee mn erat anneee anne ter eran es merry area 1 19 a a TUMO CIO rE EER 1 19 CMU to the network Connection sssrsssisssressisrnsidu En rnise anns EEr nE TEE EAEN 1 19 Sea Aea
341. ributes should be configured to the same values in both CMUs This may indicate that the other unit is faulty not available or the protection interface is not installed not working or disconnected The management agent can be configured to generate alerts by electronic mail when certain events occur The email message configuration procedure is described in Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages on page 6 36 The alerts mirror the SNMP traps defined in Table 7 11 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Managing alarms and events Managing SNMP traps The PTP 800 supports SNMP v2 remote management and provides a comprehensive range of alarms Table 7 11 lists the SNMP traps that the PTP 800 supports their significance and possible causes The SNMP configuration procedure is described in Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages on page 6 36 The traps may be disabled totally or individual traps disabled ANOTE These traps mirror the system status and alarm information displayed on the System Summary and System Status pages Table 7 11 SNMP traps supported by PTP 800 SNMP Trap name Description Cause and action MIB2 traps coldStart A coldStart trap signifies that The CMU has rebooted the SNMPv2 entity acting in an agent role is reinitializing itself and that its configuration may have been altered See Rebooting or reviewing reboot reasons on page 7 49 linkDown A linkDown trap
342. rily by a primary unit at one end of the link and a secondary at the other If not symmetric operation could be used or the link may need to be re planned Is there any requirement to operate secondary to secondary This is normally unlikely because the likelihood of simultaneous equipment failures at both ends of the link is extremely small Is any interruption caused by switching back to the primary unit going to cause a performance problem When operating primary to secondary a switch back to primary to primary operation once the problem has been corrected is recommended Is primary to secondary operation likely to be for an extended period of time due to for example problems of accessibility of the equipment If so symmetric operation may be the preferred option Choosing antenna protection If antenna protection is selected to provide protection from antenna faults or physical disturbance the above questions apply when selecting the antennas to be used and the location of the antennas on the tower Reverting to the primary unit 2 6 The CMU has a configurable parameter which determines whether or not after a protection switchover to a secondary unit after a period of fault free operation by the primary the units should revert to using the primary unit Where the performance of the primary unit is predicted to be better than that of the secondary unit for example when an asymmetric coupler is used this timer shou
343. rola s prior written consent Survival of provisions The parties agree that where the context of any provision indicates an intent that it survives the term of this Agreement then it will survive Entire agreement This agreement contains the parties entire agreement regarding your use of the Software and may be amended only in writing signed by both parties except that Motorola may modify this Agreement as necessary to comply with applicable laws Third party software The software may contain one or more items of Third Party Software supplied by other third party suppliers The terms of this Agreement govern your use of any Third Party Software UNLESS A SEPARATE THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE LICENSE IS INCLUDED IN WHICH CASE YOUR USE OF THE THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE WILL THEN BE GOVERNED BY THE SEPARATE THIRD PARTY LICENSE phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 3 7 Motorola Solutions Inc end user license agreement Chapter 3 Legal information OpenSSL The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license i e both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit See below for the actual license texts Actually both licenses are BSD style Open Source licenses In case of any license issues related to OpenssL please contact openssl core openssl org OpenSSL License 3 8 Copyright c 1998 2008 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or with
344. rtain regions when Radio License Modulation Selection is set to Adaptive This is the minimum modulation mode the radio can use when ACM is enabled The valid range is dependant on the region license and Tx Max Power This control is only visible for certain regions when Radio License Modulation Selection is set to Adaptive This is set in Configuring AES encryption on page 6 32 This is set in Configuring AES encryption on page 6 32 Enable or disable this control Use of ATPC is mandatory in some regions phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 12 Reviewing configuration and performance Comparing actual to predicted performance For at least one hour of operation after alignment is complete the link should be monitored to check that it is achieving predicted levels of performance To check performance select menu option Statistics The System Statistics and Counters page is displayed Figure 7 13 Monitor the following attributes Link Loss Transmit Data Rate Receive Data Rate Receive Power To maintain error free communication ensure that the average operational receive power using ATPC if enabled does not exceed 35 dBm If the receive power exceeds 35d Bm enable ATPC if currently disabled Alternatively reduce the maximum transmit power at the other end of the link to reduce the receive power to the normal operating level If absolutely necessary the receive powe
345. rue instantaneous measurements the mean is the mean of a set of one second means phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Attribute Aggregate Data Rate Statistics Measurement Period Data Port Counters Ethernet Data Tx Frames Ethernet Data Rx Frames Management Port Counters Ethernet Management Tx Frames Ethernet Management Rx Frames Management Agent Counters Frames To Management Agent Frames From Management Agent Wireless Port Counters Wireless Data Tx Frames Wireless Data Rx Frames Wireless Management Tx Frames Wireless Management Rx Frames Byte Error Ratio phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Managing performance Meaning The sum of the data rate in the directions expressed in Mbps and presented as max mean min and latest in an histogram format The max min and latest are true instantaneous measurements the mean is the mean of a set of one second means The time over which the system statistics were collected Count of Ethernet frames transmitted at the data port Count of Ethernet frames received at the data port Count of Ethernet frames transmitted at the management port Count of valid Ethernet frames received at the management port Count of Ethernet frames processed by the management agent Count of Ethernet frames generated by the management agent Count of Ethernet frames transmitted at the data channel of the wirele
346. rvice may be ordered as Motorola part number WB3659 Site selection The ODU and antenna should be mounted in elevated positions from the immediate surroundings and above obstructions to provide a clear line of sight path to the other end of the link It is particularly important that no obstructions or reflecting surfaces are present within the near field zone in front and to the sides and rear of the antenna 2 2 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Link planning Maximum IF cable length The maximum permitted IF cable length is 190 meters 620 ft for CNT 400 cable If the required IF cable length is between 190 and 300 meters 620 ft and 980 ft contact Technical Support PTP LINKPlanner The Motorola PTP LINKPlanner is a link planning and optimization tool designed for use with all PTP products including the PTP 800 licensed band products PTP LINKPlanner is free and available from http www motorola com ptp software The advantages of PTP LINKPlanner are as follows It is supported on Windows and Macintosh Platforms It is very easy to use without specialist radio planning knowledge It is powerful implementing the latest ITU recommendations for predicting the performance of a radio link It expresses the performance in terms of data link capacity It is integrated with Google Earth to facilitate site entry and path visualization It provides bill of materials
347. ry meaner ne tT 3 3 I E a E E E E E E EE E E E EE 3 4 O S a rea dae enune tame venue en abaeh snide atacoeceeniueneeenee cies 3 4 Ri ht to use Motorola s AO occccscsiveeeyatswnntessoninewieonxinvacstoivbasybiadsaspeek ravens es sinvessiabcoaeends 3 5 AG a PP A I A aso enc es ew een once artes A E E E EA A ESES E E E AE tae 3 5 D A AA ATE 3 5 PE E E a E EE EAE ee AES 3 5 B E A A E E EE AEE T S E E E EE A E I E T EE E ty ene tnt tenia 3 6 Mea of MaD y occ wo ennn EEE EE 3 6 Ua Governi UAL seyrinin sener rE rE AEE TIENE ERAT ENEE 3 6 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 iii Contents ON O sens Sinner eee acun se acedan san E E EEE EEE 3 7 Sloe walle N ee ee ee Aa ee ee ee nT ee eee anne en re ener ee nent cnr on Mere ry meee 3 7 PN ys earns EII SATEET IE IOE EE IE I IOT EA A PT AA E ete EE T 3 7 curva OO eeann nnna N RARAN ANEO 3 7 Be ep ang ass pedo psn ac E A TE T E T ET E 3 7 RI E ON E oeer E E 3 7 iT E I A E S 3 13 Eara NAAN EEE E E EE EEE E E EE O EE ESENE AE EA EE E E 3 14 Chapter 4 Reference information sssssss2s22 2 2222u22u20u20uu0uuuuuunnunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 4 1 Installation nye Os icetestmstions doses an inkane arrer Ean E A A ER ANSETE EENEN ENET 4 2 Standard aia rae cep ease set aes e ESEESE 4 2 P otected link components scsscs cera ticecrsessnvaccisnhies tonatancedennecdeceniedacadsdnecenseeaneRindhaecsseneescens 4 7 Remote mounted ODU components scssssessseeesseessreresserrsssecessreressere
348. s Prerequisites for the Installation Wizard on page 6 47 Step 1 Configuring equipment parameters on page 6 48 Step 2 Configuring radio license parameters on page 6 51 Step 3 Configuring wireless parameters on page 6 54 Step 4 Confirming installation configuration on page 6 55 Step 5 Skipping antenna alignment on page 6 57 Step 6 Completing configuration without alignment on page 6 58 Prerequisites for the Installation Wizard Before performing Steps 1 to 4 of the Installation Wizard check that the following requirements have been met All license details are available including maximum EIRP antenna gain transmit and receive frequencies channel bandwidth A unique link name has been assigned to this link Link Name must be the same at both link ends otherwise the link will not work phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 6 47 Task 10 Configuring wireless interface Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Step 1 Configuring equipment parameters To configure link equipment proceed as follows 1 From the left hand menu select System Administration The System Administration Login page Figure 7 1 is displayed 2 The System Administration Password is blank by default Leave it blank and select Login The System Administration menu Figure 7 3 is displayed 3 Select menu option Installation Wizard The Step 1 Equipment Configuration page is displayed Figure 6 26 4 Enter the equipment con
349. s Installing and grounding the IF cable at building entry Perform this procedure to install and ground the IF at the building or cabinet entry point Figure 5 6 Figure 5 6 Grounding at building entry IF cable Ground cable Master Ground Bar MGB a To CMU yal External Ground Bar EGB Lightning Protection Unit Ground ring LPU phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 61 Installing the IF and ground cables Chapter 5 Installation To run the IF cable into the building proceed as follows 1 7 Make an entry point into the building and run the main IF cable into the building Ground the IF cable to the external ground bar outside the building entry point as described in Making an IF cable ground point on page 5 57 Install the bottom LPU inside the building entry point Ground the bottom LPU to the master ground bar Cut any surplus length from the bottom end of the main IF cable and fit an N type connector as described in Fitting an N type connector to an IF cable on page 5 39 Connect the main IF cable to the SURGE port of the bottom LPU SURGE port Connect the LPU CMU IF cable to the EQUIPMENT port of the bottom LPU and run it to the location of the CMU EQUIPMENT port phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Testing the installation Testing the installation Recommended pre power tests Following the installation of the ODU LPUs and the IF ca
350. s 10 90 9 26 QPSK 0 86 Yes 20 3 87 8 26 4 69 Wireless operation Chapter 4 Reference information Table 4 85 13 GHz ETSI with 28 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 256QAM 0 80 Yes 170 5 68 6 61 7 59 7 16 128QAM 0 84 Yes 151 1 71 4 68 66 8 18 64QAM 0 82 Yes 125 3 74 4 70 9 69 7 18 32QAM 0 85 Yes 101 2 76 9 73 7 72 4 23 16QAM 0 79 Yes 74 8 80 8 77 8 76 6 23 Capacity transmit power and sensitivity 15 GHz Table 4 86 15 GHz ETSI with 7 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 128QAM 0 76 Yes 34 4 76 9 72 2 70 8 18 64QAM 0 82 Yes 30 79 3 74 7 73 4 18 32QAM 0 87 No 24 6 76 9 75 7 23 16QAM 0 88 Yes 20 84 2 80 1 78 8 23 8 PSK 0 86 No 14 7 81 9 80 6 23 SPSK QPSK 0 80 0 80 No Yes 56 8 37 8 86 6 79 5 78 3 23 26 8 8 QPSK 0 88 Yes 10 90 9 26 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Table 4 87 15 GHz ETSI with 14 MHz channel separation Modula
351. s been disabled remotely by a management system The physical port continues to operate but no data is transmitted over it 7 15 Managing alarms and events Alarm Management port configuration mismatch ODU Status Wireless link status Data port status Management port status Link name mismatch Definition The Ethernet configuration of the management port is not compatible with the connected network equipment The status of the ODU The status of the end to end wireless link The status of the data port either fiber or copper link The status of the management port if out of band management is being used The link names at each end of the wireless link do not match Chapter 7 Operation Likely cause This is probably due toa configuration error such as an auto negotiation or forced configuration mismatch See Configuring the IP interface and management mode on page 6 9 A state of ok indicates that the ODU is fully operational although it may not be transmitting Other ODU Status values indicate the nature of an ODU fault See Table 7 3 for values and their meanings See Table 7 7 for values and their meanings See Table 7 5 for values and their meanings See Table 7 6 for values and their meanings The link name is configured differently at each end of the wireless link This may be because of A configuration error in defining the link name at one of th
352. s displayed Figure 7 22 2 Select OK The Recovery Options page is redisplayed with a message indicating that the configuration has been erased Select Reboot The Reboot Confirmation dialog is displayed 4 Select OK The reboot progress message is displayed On completion the CMU restarts 5 Reconfigure the PTP 800 to meet the operator s requirements A NOTE When the CMU is rebooted after selecting the recovery option Erase Configuration the IP address remains at its default setting of 169 254 1 1 and the CMU can only be accessed via a direct network connection from the PC to the management port Figure 7 22 Erase Configuration dialog The page at http 169 754 1 1 says 7 IF YOU ERASE THE CONFIGURATION YOL WILL HAYE TO RE ENTER ALL CONFIGURATION Gre you sure vou want to ERASE the configuration banks Cancel phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 7 55 Using recovery mode Chapter 7 Operation Zeroizing security parameters Perform this task when the CMU is in recovery mode The purpose of this task is to zeroize the critical security parameters of the CMU Before starting this task check that the Recovery Options page is displayed Figure 7 18 To erase the critical security parameters of the CMU proceed as follows 1 Select Zeroize Critical Security Parameters The Zeroize Security Parameters dialog is displayed Figure 7 23 2 Select OK The Recovery Options page is redisplayed with a message indicating t
353. s for defects and incorrect assembly If this fails to resolve the problem replace the near end ODU and if necessary replace the remote ODU Check link status Link status is indicated by the Link Status attribute on the System status page of the web interface If the receive signal power is close to the predicted value check the Link Status attribute and take action as described in Table 8 10 Table 8 10 Link Status checks Link Status attribute Action Searching Check that the same channel bandwidth is configured for both ends of the link Acquiring Check the System Summary for a Link Name mismatch alarm If present correct Link Name Registerin J g so that it is identical at both ends of the link phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 8 11 Testing protection switchover Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Testing protection switchover Perform this task if any problems are experienced with protection switchovers in a newly installed or operational protected link Check protection interface status Check Protected Interface Status in the System Summary page as described in Table 8 11 In a 1 1 Hot Standby configuration information is shared between neighbor CMUs over the protection interface The Protection Interface Status attribute reports whether the neighbor CMU is successfully responding physically disconnected or whether it is physically connected but not responding for example powered down Table 8 11 Protected Interface St
354. s is probably due to a SpeedStatusTrap configuration this indicates configuration error that attribute indicates that the Ethernet Speed of the Management Port is below that of its neighbor protectionInterfaceStatus In a 1 1 Hot Standby This may indicate that the Trap configuration information is other unit is faulty not shared between neighbor available or the protection CMUs over the Protection interface is not installed not Interface working or disconnected This reports whether the neighbor CMU is successfully responding physically disconnected or whether it is physically connected but not responding for example powered down 7 24 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Disabling and enabling the wireless interface Disabling and enabling the wireless interface This section describes how to disable wireless transmission prevent antenna radiation and enable wireless transmission allow antenna radiation Disabling wireless transmission Perform this procedure to prevent the antenna from radiating This is necessary when maintenance work is needed near the antenna To disable wireless transmission select menu option Configuration The System Configuration page is displayed Select Mute Transmitter Figure 7 8 The Transmitter attribute value changes to Muted A NOTE Wireless transmission can also be disabled from the Protection Configuration page Figure 6 22 for b
355. s mechanism from being triggered when the link drops briefly due to severe fading Maximum receive power The maximum receive power is the maximum power at which a PTP 800 link should be operated to maintain error free communication This maximum receive power for normal operation is 35 dBm Automatic transmitter power control if enabled will reduce the installation receive level to a 40 dBm operating level if there is sufficient dynamic range available in the maximum transmit power For example a link installed at 35 dBm with a maximum transmit power set to at least 5 dB above the minimum power level will successfully operate at 40 dBm Links operating without ATPC or with less than 5 dB available dynamic range should ensure that the normal operating level does not exceed 35 dBm On very short links it may be necessary to use a fixed waveguide attenuator which will require the use of a remote mount antenna to keep the maximum receive power at an acceptable level Maximum transmit power Maximum transmit power is the maximum power that the PTP 800 is permitted to generate at the waveguide interface assuming that ATPC is disabled or the link loss is high enough such that ATPC is not activated The equipment limit for maximum transmit power is defined by modulation mode band channel bandwidth and standards body or region The spectrum license limit is determined by the maximum EIRP permitted by the individual license the antenna gain
356. s the exposure limit Basic Restriction to be considered for the general public Annex II and Table 1 define this to be 10 W m Antenna directivity The Motorola recommended antennas have Hi Performance polar patterns in accordance with ETSI EN302 217 4 1 classes 2 and 3 They have gains in excess of 30 dB and beamwidths of less than 5 degrees Thus they provide high attenuation of radiated energy at the sides and rear of the antenna 4 96 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Radiation hazard assessment Calculation Calculation is used to identify the Compliance Boundary outside this boundary the radiation levels meet the Basic Restriction which is defined in 1999 519 EC as 10 W m The distance from the antenna at which the Power Flux Density limit is equal to some specified value is calculated using the Cylindrical Wave model as follows ge P 180 az Dd Where S Power density W m P Maximum average transmit power capability of the radio Watts D Antenna diameter meters d Distance from point source meters 0 3 dB antenna beamwidth degrees Rearranging terms to solve for distance yields _ P180 Sz D6 Distances from antenna Table 4 130 specifies calculated minimum separation distances for a range of frequency bands and antenna sizes at the peak of the antenna beam At these and greater distances the power density from the RF field is not consider
357. sabled Management frames in the customer network are processed by the management agent if a destination MAC address in the frame matches the CMU MAC address and b the VLAN ID in the frame matches the VLAN configuration of the management agent If Local Packet Filtering is enabled unicast frames forwarded to the management agent are filtered that is not forwarded in the customer network For the active CMU at a protected end remote management traffic is routed via the wireless link as shown in Figure 1 22 For the inactive CMU at the remote end of a protected link remote management traffic is routed via the wireless link the active CMU and the data network as shown in Figure 1 22 1 38 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Ethernet bridging Figure 1 22 n band management data paths protected links PTP 800 PTP 800 active active Radio links Ethernet Ethernet switch switch PTP 800 PTP 800 inactive inactive Management data for remote active PTP 800 Management data for remote inactive PTP 800 Management data for local active and inactive PTP 800s Status information about neighboring CMU ODUs is transferred across the wireless link by the active CMU and received by both the active and the inactive CMU In band quality of service Frames generated within the management agent may be assigned a configured Ethernet priority in the same way as for out of band mana
358. sabled remotely by a management system The physical port continues to remain operational but no data is transmitted phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Alarm Data port fiber status Data port configuration mismatch SNTP Synchronization Failed Management port disabled warning phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Definition A change in status at the fiber data port The Ethernet configuration of the data port is not compatible with the connected network equipment SNTP has been enabled but the unit is unable to synchronize with the specified SNTP server The management port has been disabled by means of the SNMP MIB Managing alarms and events Likely cause There are three possible Causes 1 The fiber interface has been installed but disabled because the license key does not include fiber Support 2 The interface could not be established even though a fiber carrier was detected This could be due to a broken TX fiber or because the interface is disabled at the other end of the fiber link 3 The interface could not be established and no fiber carrier is detected This is probably due toa configuration error such as an auto negotiation or forced configuration mismatch If SNTP Sync fails then check the server settings or disable SNTP and set the time locally See Setting the real time clock on page 6 71 The management Ethernet port ha
359. se the remainder of the self amalgamating tape to wrap the complete assembly Press the tape edges together so that there are no gaps phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 59 Installing the IF and ground cables Chapter 5 Installation 7 Wrap a layer of PVC tape from bottom to top starting from 25 mm 1 inch below and finishing 25 mm 1 inch above the edge of the self amalgamating tape over lapping at half width 8 Repeat with a further four layers of PVC tape always overlapping at half width Wrap the layers in alternate directions Second layer top to bottom Third layer bottom to top Fourth layer top to bottom Fifth layer bottom to top The edges of each layer should be 25mm 1 inch above A and 25 mm 1 inch below B the previous layer 9 Prepare the metal grounding point of the supporting structure to provide a good electrical contact with the grounding cable clamp Remove paint grease or dirt if present Apply anti oxidant compound liberally between the two metals 5 60 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing the IF and ground cables 10 Clamp the bottom lug of the grounding cable to the supporting structure using site approved methods A NOTE The manual R56 Standards And Guidelines For Communication Sites available for download at www motorola com ptp software states that two hole lugs secured with fasteners in both holes are preferred over single hole lug
360. se units are configured to be inactive until a protection switch occurs IP address of the unit that currently provides the management interface IP address of a unit that currently does not provide the management interface These units are active Tx Hi and Tx Lo The black line represents the link between active units These units are inactive Tx Hi and Tx Lo These units are faulty or fault protection has been disabled Tx Hi and Tx Lo Roll the mouse over this icon to see the alarm condition These units cannot be reached The status is unknown Tx Hi and Tx Lo 7 29 Managing wireless link protection Chapter 7 Operation Symbols or text Meaning Protection switching has been disabled at this link end the inactive unit is shown in red Fault Protection Disabled Using the Protected Link page Viewing system status To view the System Status page for an active inactive or faulty unit click on the icon See Viewing the system status on page 7 8 Viewing alarms and faults If the alarm warning triangle is displayed on the menu bar click on it to view the outstanding alarm list for the unit that currently provides the management interface See Viewing the system summary on page 7 6 and Managing alarms on page 7 13 Rolling the cursor over a red icon causes a list of protection faults for that unit to be displayed Viewing the status of mismatched neighbors Certain configuration attributes must b
361. seesseseessessesreseeseeseeseese 4 45 PPO Gay Umion compliance laDel ae iscccnarirrsercriirsrrenoi tsr ire nier rE AERE 4 95 Words embossed on coupler asymmetric shown sssssssesssseesseseeseesseseeseeseeseeo 5 25 SOTPeCe orenian Oi LPU esso Ea DSR SrO NAE ON Dni 5 38 ODU a Op LEU ground eerren E 5 44 Uom tie DOSE II erriren TEE EEE EEEE 5 54 IF cable grounding on a mast OF COWET sssesesseeseesesseesessessesseseessessesoesseseeseeseeo 9 55 Chgel Herc aualem smple stil ohunls OTY eee eae Terre hen ett E ere rrr te mr enema Terry e 5 61 Example of a cable analyzer ciccsccseasscvencsosheusdivantasaussseaseiwiaesnsaverdasbeumeiomtatenarieeeewes 5 63 Fxampie ol the cable ESTen inten EER EERE 5 64 Cable loss plot for a 17 meter cable with no ODU sssssssssessesseesseesseeeseeereeesseessee 5 66 Cable loss plot for a 17 meter cable with ODU connected eccscccsccescsescrercesses 5 67 Cable loss plot for a 100 meter cable with no ODU sssssccsesesssssseesreesssesreessseesees 5 68 Cable loss plot for a 100 meter cable with ODU connected secseccscserccerccese 5 68 DTF plot for a 17 meter cable with no ODU wosicdvsewevecnevsasaceereeracantesasiescisvetacsacias 5 71 DTF plot for a 17 meter cable with ODU connected cece cece ee eeeeeeeeees 5 72 CORE EO E EE E S E E 5 74 CMU monte ON DONC i oo tasocah caniaeeon cant atrampesipasutiabaainaciontnaeieelatuanecasueriaasoniaaien 5 75 CMU mounted with Drackat c 0c1ssinanced
362. seessessessecsseeseesseeseesseeseessees 6 30 Figure 6 16 System Configuration Page ccccscscscscscscscscscscscscscecscscecacscececeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesenes 6 33 Figure 6 17 Configuration Reboot dialo sts ctorsudechnneykectealanetcadons Ar R En En AEA EAA 6 33 Figure 6 18 Change System Administrator Password page essssesessesrsseseeseseesessesesseseeses 6 34 Figure 6 19 Webpage Properties Page cccsccscececececececececececececececeeecececececesecececececeeeeeeees 6 35 Figure 60 20 Remote Management OAC sc sicrecansiwecscasacensysateactaensacevasrananeeeresensenaiveatecsudeecnaeans 6 37 Figure 6 21 Diagnostic Alarms page sssessessessessesecsseseeseeseesecserseeserseesesseesessesseseeseeseeseeses 6 41 Figure 6 22 Protection Configuration page protection disabled cece cece ec eeeeeeeeeeees 6 42 Figure 6 23 Status page with protection disabled extract c cc cececececececececececeeeeneseeeees 6 42 Figure 6 24 Protection Management page primary with protection enabled 6 44 Figure 6 25 Protection Management page secondary with protection enabled 6 45 Figure 6 26 Step 1 Equipment Configuration page sssssssesseeseessesseessessersersseeseeeserseessees 6 48 Figure 6 27 Step 2 Radio License Configuration page fixed modulation 068 6 51 Figure 6 28 Step 2 Radio License Configuration page FCC adaptive modulation
363. specifications Protection interface specifications This section contains specifications of components used in 1 1 protection interfaces Out of band protection splitter specifications The out of band protection splitter conforms to the specifications listed in Table 4 58 Table 4 58 Out of band protection splitter specifications Category Specification Motorola part WB3807 number Operating mode 1000 BASE SX operating in Multi Mode with a wavelength of 850 nm Operating 33 C 27 F to 55 C 131 F temperature range storage 40 C 40 F to 60 C 140 F temperature range Humidity 90 non condensing Compliance IEC 721 ROHS WEEE CMM Restrictions For indoor operation only phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 4 53 Protection interface specifications Chapter 4 Reference information Protection cable The maximum length of the protection cable is 2 meters The wiring must comply with one of the following options given in Table 4 59 Table 4 59 Out of band protection cable pin outs Option 1 cable pin out Option 2 cable pin out standard Gigabit cross over cable 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 6 3 3 3 1 4 7 et 5 8 5 8 6 6 6 2 Teg 7 4 8 5 8 5 4 54 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Wireless operation Wireless operation General wireless specifications The PTP 800 conforms to the general wireless specifications listed in Table 4 60 Table 4 60 General wireless specifications
364. ss port Count of Ethernet frames received at the data channel of the wireless port Count of Ethernet frames transmitted at the management Channel of the wireless port Count of Ethernet frames received at the management Channel of the wireless port Byte error ratio calculated since the last reset of the system counters 7 43 Managing performance Chapter 7 Operation Attribute Code Word Error Ratio Meaning Code Word Error Ratio provides an indication of wireless Wireless Link link performance in the direction towards the unit where the attribute is being monitored Data transmitted over the wireless link is organized into blocks called Code Words The size of the code word is fixed for a given configuration of bandwidth The transmitter applies Forward Error Correction FEC to each Code Word and this allows the receiver to correct certain Code Words which have been received in error If the receiver cannot correct a Code Word it will be counted as a Code Word Error This may occur if the link fades below the sensitivity threshold of the minimum modulation The Code Word Error Ratio is the ratio of Code Words Errors to the total number of Code Words received calculated since the last reset of the system counters Link availability calculated since the last reset of the system Availability Protection Detailed counters counters This is the time that the CMU ODU has been in the active Active Ela
365. sseecesseeeesseeeseeeeese 4 9 ae eane a E E 4 10 CA DECCA O erra EE EE RE 4 13 CMU dimensions and Weig ME sevsacrascxccsrntccavanedcancertonreeidenseiencewdsa EAEE EEEE 4 13 PBE aE Ia 10 Wel E A E EE N E E I E E 4 13 SLEE T ra e E ES T N E E E E A EA ATE A E A 4 13 Fo a E A AN 4 14 AC to DC converter specifications sscsssecsseresesseseressseeresecsesserseseesseseeseseeseeseeeeseeee 4 15 SL ECU A eA E E AE 4 16 OLPLUdimendons and wedissa R i 4 16 ADUD TONNEN CA sees ti np kte EnEn E ENE EEEE TERETE NE 4 16 linee Ka D iR 5 P APERP EES PIE E EE ATAA EAE II POE AORA E S OES A OE E O E T 4 17 ODU specications Lower G GHZ eerrrep nahi nT EEA ETORRA 4 20 ODU Specifications Upper O GHZ orree erros errin EEEE EER 4 20 GPU Specie ione Naas eae gt TE 4 21 ODU specifications 3 GHZ a atesteeaceeencecetantuednciutecuacestanese eaweder caren eiinaseiabuseeeteaverteacoiaens 4 23 ODU Spee rica ie IZ saersi enaa ESN EAA EAER 4 24 OPU speciicatons Io GHZ ororena EER EEE 4 25 ODU specications 19 GHZ cas ccc centavteearscnaiiesheseadweosaicatandiueterthasesimatabeisadeucnedicamrneweane 4 26 GDU speciications 2 occ npct er ceeueute comareh bona ee EEA 4 27 ODU specications 43 GHZ esriossi sasise SE EA 4 28 ODU specifications 26 GHZ sssssssssssesssseesssecessrerssreressrecesserceseeresseeresseeeeseeceeseeeeseeee 4 29 ODU a a oo GITA esn E E A 4 29 ODU remote mount kit specifications ssesseessesssesercesserssccssecsssersseeeseeesec
366. ssesessessessessessessessesseseesoesecseeseeseeseesees 4 46 Flexible waveguide specifications 7 GHz and 8 GHZ ssssssssssssessessesseseesseseeseeseese 4 47 Flexible waveguide specifications 11 and 13 GHZ s ssssssssrssessessessesseseesseseeseeseese 4 47 Flexible waveguide specifications 15 GHZ sessseseessesresesseesesseesessessesseseesseseeseese 4 48 Flexible waveguide specifications 18 23 and 26 GHZ ssssssssessessessessessessesseseeseese 4 48 Flexible waveguide specifications 38 GHZ 2 0 cccccecececececececececececnenenesesenenenenens 4 49 Flexible waveguide accessory specifications sseseesseseeseeseeseeseesesseesessessesseseeseese 4 49 ODU coupler mounting specifications sssseesesseesesseesesscssesseseesoesecseeseeseesoeseesoeseeseeseese 4 50 Coupler dimensions and weig t eseesessessessesseesessessesseseeseesersersoeseesosserseeseesesseeseese 4 50 Coupler Pe i ntd larin EE ETEN 4 50 Coupler losses and 19018 HON iw scoccscsvaidzcsceassaenieieenddnceiciandieteeareieassarerdsheonsaseonas oustenseraeas 4 51 Coupler Part UDC serere Erna EEE 4 52 Protection interface specificationS sssessesereeesssecssrecessereessercssrecesseeeeseereseeeceseeeeseeeeeeee 4 53 Out of band protection splitter specifications ecsssecsseeseeeseessecssecssressseessereseeeseeesee 4 53 PPOR E E E ier aunpe cicdansetateaneescetvecansinane 4 54 Wireless operatio pcos Gepsivncsuienies b
367. ssword Enter the current password or leave blank if not yet set New Password Enter the new password It may contain any combination of characters up to 31 characters in length Confirm New Password Retype the new password phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 7 Setting passwords Protecting access to the summary and status pages By default the Home and Status menu items are not protected by password Ifa higher level of system security is required password protection can be extended to these pages To apply password access to the System Summary and System Status pages proceed as follows 1 Select menu option Properties The Webpage Properties page is displayed Figure 6 19 2 Inthe Web Properties attribute uncheck the Disable FrontPage login box Select Apply Properties 4 Ifthe System Administration Password has not yet been set see Changing password on page 6 34 Figure 6 19 Webpage Properties page Webpage Properties Properties Web Properties d Disable HTTP NO CACHE META data Auto Logout Timer Minutes Distance Units Metric Imperial Use Long Integer Comma Formatting O Disabled Enabled Popup Help Disabled Enabled Apply Properties phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 6 35 Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Task 8 Configuring alarms and messages This task consists of the following procedur
368. stallation is complete at both link ends If the Installation Wizard is being run after site installation is complete then antenna alignment can begin immediately A WARNING Do not start antenna alignment until it is safe for the antennas to radiate RF that is until the antennas and ODUs have been installed on the masts or poles and no personnel are in front of the antennas When the Step 5 Start Antenna Alignment page is displayed Figure 6 33 choose whether to defer or start alignment If alignment is to be deferred select Skip Alignment This cancels the Install Wizard without doing alignment but configuration changes are saved If alignment is to be started now continue at Task 11 Aligning antennas on page 6 59 A NOTE If the ODU is not connected to the CMU then the Start Alignment option is disabled The Installation Wizard does not allow progress to antenna alignment Figure 6 33 Step 5 Start Antenna Alignment page step 5 Start Antenna Alignment You have successfully entered all of the configuration information necessary to install a wireless link Click Start Alignment to start the antenna alignment process Click Skip Alignment to defer antenna alignment until later fi Do not proceed to the next step unless itis safe for the ODU to radiate ODU is ready for alignment ODU Type o sHz TR1008 Hi 4555 2569ShMHz start Alignment A Back phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 6 57 Task 10
369. t OK The reboot progress message is displayed On completion the CMU restarts 5 To restore the IP and Ethernet configuration to meet the operator s requirements see Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces on page 6 7 A NOTE When the CMU is rebooted after selecting the recovery option Reset IP amp Ethernet Configuration back to factory defaults the IP address remains at its default setting of 169 254 1 1 and the CMU can only be accessed via a direct network connection from the PC to the management port Figure 7 21 Reset Configuration dialog The page at http 169 254 1 1 says 7 re you sure you want to return the IP amp Ethernet configuration back to Factory default The unit will only respond on the Management port and the Default IP address 169 254 1 1 Cancel phn 1478 _012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Using recovery mode Erasing configuration Perform this task when the CMU is in recovery mode The purpose of this task is to erase all changes that have been made to the configuration of the CMU and return it to its factory settings This includes all changes made to the wireless IP Ethernet license key security fault and performance parameters Before starting this task check that the Recovery Options page is displayed Figure 7 18 To erase the entire configuration of the CMU proceed as follows 1 Select Erase Configuration The Erase Configuration dialog i
370. t to layer two control protocols L2CP including Spanning tree protocol STP rapid spanning tree protocol RSTP Multiple spanning tree protocol MSTP Link aggregation control protocol LACP Link OAM IEEE 802 3ah Port authentication IEEE 802 1X Ethernet local management interface E LMI ITU T Q 933 Link layer discovery protocol LLDP Multiple registration protocol MRP Generic attribute registration protocol GARP PTP 800 handles IEEE 802 3 Pause frames as a special case each CMU can be configured to either forward tunnel or discard Pause frames received at the Data port PTP 800 discards all Pause frames received at the Management port The PTP 800 Series does not generate or respond to any L2CP traffic phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 1 35 Ethernet bridging Chapter 1 Product description Quality of service for bridged Ethernet traffic The PTP 800 Series supports eight traffic classes for Ethernet frames queued for transmission over the wireless interface Scheduling is by strict priority in that a frame will not be transmitted if there is a frame with a higher class already queued In order of highest priority first the classes are labeled Q7 Q6 Q5 Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1 and QO Classification by Priority Code Point PTP 800 provides a configurable mapping between traffic class and the Ethernet Priority Code Point PCP of the outer most VLAN tag Each PCP value can be assigned to any of the
371. t5e cable screened or unscreened Grounding cables Lightning protection units Lightning protection requirements The PTP 800 has been tested for compliance to the EMC immunity specifications identified in EMC immunity compliance on page 4 92 The standard ODU for the PTP 800 is fitted with surge limiting circuits and other features to minimize the risk of damage due to nearby lightning strikes To be fully effective these standard features require some additional equipment to be configured as part of the system installation The PTP 800 Series is not designed to survive direct lightning strikes For this reason the antenna and ODU should not be installed at the highest point in a localized area See Grounding and lightning protection on page 2 7 ODU to CMU connection The ODU is connected to the LPUs and CMU using CNT 400 coaxial cable IF cable CMU to the network connection The CMU is connected to network equipment using either a copper data port 100baseT or 1000baseT Ethernet or a fiber interface 1000BaseSX or 1000BaseLX phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 1 19 Cabling and lightning protection Chapter 1 Product description Cable grounding kits The installation must be grounded to the supporting structure at the points specified in Grounding and lightning protection on page 2 7 One cable grounding kit Figure 1 13 is required at each grounding point Figure 1 13 Cable grounding kit for 1 4 and 3 8 cable L
372. tection Switching Disabled Enabled Primary Secondary Mode Primary C Secondary Antenna Protection Disabled Enabled Submit Protection Configuration phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 9 Configuring protection interface Figure 6 25 Protection Management page secondary with protection enabled Protection Configuration Do not enable the transmitter unless Itis safe for the ODU to radiate Attributes a fus Transmitter Muted Enable Transmitter atiriutes value Dunit Protection Disabled Protection 1 1 Fault Protection Switching Disabled Enabled Primary Secondary Mode O Primary Secondary Antenna Protection Disabled 2 Enabled Primary Recovery Disabled Enabled Primary Recovery Period i 5 Minutes Submit Protection Configuration Table 6 10 Protection Configuration attributes Attribute Meaning Transmitter Indicates whether wireless transmission from the ODU is Muted for safety or Enabled Protection Disabled means that the link is unprotected and the other attributes are not displayed Protection 1 1 means that the link may be configured for protection and the other attributes are displayed Fault Protection Switching This is used to allow or prevent automatic fault protection switching by this unit During configuration and alignment set this attribute to Disabled For
373. ter CO e o Customer network equipment for example NodeB or BTS 1 32 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide 1 1 Hot Standby link protection Protected link with in band management The Data ports of both CMUs are connected to the Ethernet switch Figure 1 21 The network connections may both be copper as illustrated or one or both connections may be fiber Figure 1 21 n band management connections for a protected end IF cable to Primary ODU IF cable to Secondary ODU Primary CMU Secondary CMU 5o ao m CHEE F cable Cat5e protection cable CED Cat5e cable for network LICICICILI a a CICC ICIC a C C U Ethernet switch phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 1 33 1 1 Hot Standby link protection Chapter 1 Product description Protection cable To allow the neighboring CMUs to exchange status information they are connected together using a protection cable as shown in Figure 1 21 The protection interface uses the four spare pins of the CMU Management port as described in Protection cable on page 4 54 Detection of link failure In the event of a protection switch the network equipment must learn the new active path To signal the need for this the currently active CMU disables all configured copper or fiber Ethernet ports for a period of between 0 5 and 1 second This causes the Ethernet switch to detect link failure and learn new routing for
374. tes Generate Diagnostics phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 7 47 Managing performance Chapter 7 Operation Changing the diagnostics refresh period Perform this task to change the frequency with which the Diagnostics Plotter page is refreshed The default refresh period is 3600 seconds 1 hour If a much shorter refresh period is selected for example 60 seconds it is possible to monitor the performance of an operational PTP 800 link in real time To change the diagnostics refresh period proceed as follows 1 Select menu option Diagnostics Plotter The Diagnostics Plotter page is displayed Figure 7 14 2 Enter the required refresh frequency in the Page Refresh Period attribute Maintaining the system Once installed a PTP 800 link should require little or no maintenance Yearly maintenance Recommended yearly physical maintenance Check cables for corrosion chafing etc Check waterproofing Check ground points for corrosion tightness etc Monthly maintenance Recommended monthly radio maintenance Read Link Loss and compare against last reading Read ByteER and compare against last reading Protected link maintenance For a 1 1 protected link consider a controlled switchover to the inactive unit once every three months to confirm that it is fully functional ANOTE This can cause a short interruption to traffic and should be scheduled accordingly to minimize the effects 7 48 phn 1478_012v
375. teway address subnet masks VLAN membership in network equipment between the PC and the CMU Check if the PC can reach other equipment in the same network If these steps fail to resolve the problem continue at Entering recovery mode on page 7 50 selecting the option to reset IP and Ethernet configuration Check browser settings If there is IP connectivity between the CMU and the management PC or workstation but web pages cannot be displayed check that browser settings are appropriate for the PTP 800 web interface 8 8 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing the link Installing the link Perform this task if any problems are experienced with a newly installed or operational wireless link Connect to the web management interface See Connecting to the web management interface on page 8 2 Check ODU status ODU status is indicated by the ODU Status attribute in the Status screen of the web interface Check the ODU Status attribute and take action as described in Table 8 8 Table 8 8 ODU status checks ODU Status attribute OK Download In Progress No Response Power Supply Fault ODU Fault Incompatible Device Incompatible Firmware Version phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Likely cause and action The ODU is available for use Continue at Transmitter status on page 8 10 The CMU is downloading updated firmware to the ODU Wait for the download to com
376. th the image that has just been downloaded Press the Program Sotware Image into Non olatile Memory button to accept the sottvware upgrade Current software image description Sotware Version 800 01 00 Uploaded software image description Software Wersion 800 01 00 Program Software Image into Mon w alatile Memory Figure 7 20 Recovery Software Upgrade complete page Software Upgrade Complete The software upgrade was completed Successtully To complete the upgrade a system reboot is required Please use the Reboot Wireless Unit button below to reboot the unit Current software image description Software version 800 01 00 Reboot Wireless Unit phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 7 53 Using recovery mode Chapter 7 Operation Resetting IP and Ethernet configuration to factory defaults Perform this task when the CMU is in recovery mode The purpose of this task is to reset IP and Ethernet configuration back to factory defaults Before starting this task check that the Recovery Options page is displayed Figure 7 18 To reset IP and Ethernet configuration parameters proceed as follows 1 Select Reset IP amp Ethernet Configuration back to factory defaults The Reset Configuration dialog is displayed Figure 7 21 2 Select OK The Recovery Options page is redisplayed with a message indicating that the configuration has been reset Select Reboot The Reboot Confirmation dialog is displayed 4 Selec
377. th two ODUs and a coupler 6 Remove protective film from coupler antenna port TO or 2 a ioe a i 4 r AF he a 7 Apply silicone grease to the O Ring of the antenna transition z Ss i t 8 Fit the coupler to the antenna by following this sequence e Initially hand tighten two of the diagonally opposed M8 bolts with the Allen key supplied in the kit e Using the latch clamp clip the same two corners e Repeat the above on the remaining two diagonally opposed bolts and clips e Torque down all four M8 bolts to 18 Nm _ phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 27 Installing antenna with two ODUs and a coupler Chapter 5 Installation Attaching ODUs to coupler To attach the ODUs to the coupler and mount the assembly on the pole proceed as follows 1 Remove protective film from the coupler ports 2 Apply silicone grease to the O rings of the coupler transitions 3 Fit the ODUs to the coupler transitions ensuring that the waveguide interfaces align correctly for vertical or horizontal polarization Both ODUs must be fitted with handles at the top and connectors at the bottom For asymmetric couplers check that the MAIN and STANDBY sides of the coupler can still be identified ot me 3 F E 2y Cali ITF phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Installing antenna with two ODUs and a coupler 4 Follow the manuf
378. that specify for each frequency band region FCC and ETSI bandwidth and modulation mode the following data Capacity refers to the maximum sustained aggregate load Mbit s applied to the data and management Ethernet ports that can be delivered to the remote Ethernet ports without packet discard This capacity is achieveable for Ethernet Frames which have the highest configured Quality of Service class Capacity is approximately 1 5 lower for Ethernet Frames with a lower classification Please refer to Customer network on page 1 35 for an explanation of Ethernet Frame classification Fixed ref refers to the availability of the modulation mode as a fixed or reference mode Sensitivity refers to the typical receive signal level which produces a Frame Error Rate of 5 x 10 using 64 octet frames This is equivalent to a Bit Error Rate of 1 x 10 as defined in EN 302 217 Annex F ACM Threshold In refers to the typical signal level required for a given modulation to be automatically selected when adaptive modulation is enabled ACM Threshold Out refers to the typical signal level at which a given modulation can no longer be supported When adaptive modulation is enabled and the signal level falls below this level the modulation with the next lower capacity is automatically selected Max tx Power refers to the maximum value to which the Maximum Transmit Power parameter may be configured The PT
379. thernet Microwave User Guide Grounding and lightning protection Basic requirements The following basic protection requirements must be implemented The equipment ODU or antenna must be in Zone B see Lightning Protection Zones on page 2 7 A lightning protection unit LPU must be installed within 600 mm 24 in of the point at which the IF cable enters the building or equipment room The use of the LPU provided in the lightning protection kit WB3657 is strongly recommended The IF cable must be bonded to the supporting structure in order to prevent lightning creating a potential between the structure and cable which could cause arcing resulting in damage to equipment The IF cable must be grounded at the building entry point The CMU chassis bonding point must be grounded All grounding cables must be no less than 16mm or 6AWG in size solid or stranded tinned and or jacketed copper conductor Grounding cable requirements When routing fastening and connecting grounding cables the following requirements must be observed Grounding conductors must be run as short straight and smoothly as possible with the fewest possible number of bends and curves Grounding cables must not be installed with drip loops All bends must have a minimum radius of 203 mm 8 in and a minimum angle of 90 A diagonal run is preferable to a bend even though it does not follow the contour or run parallel to the supporting structure
380. this link is no longer available Connected Ethernet switches can be configured to forward Ethernet frames on an alternate path identified using the Spanning Tree Protocol STP 6 15 Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Table 6 3 Data port attributes Attribute Meaning Data Port Wireless When enabled this causes the Ethernet link to be Down Alert dropped briefly when the wireless link drops This Signals to the connected network equipment that this link is no longer available Connected Ethernet switches can be configured to forward Ethernet frames on an alternate path identified using the Spanning Tree Protocol STP Data Port Ethernet Only displayed when an SFP module is installed Media Type To Use Auto with Fiber Preference means that if a supported SFP module is present and is working and the fiber carrier is present the Ethernet service connects through fiber and the copper data port is not used If the fiber link fails or loses the carrier signal the Ethernet service falls back to the copper LAN connection Force Copper means that the Ethernet service connects through the copper port only and the Fiber SFP interface is disabled Data Port Copper Auto Enabled means that configuration is automatically Negotiation negotiated This is the default setting Disabled means that configuration is forced Use the same setting for both ends of the link
381. ting the CMU power supply esessssssesessesseesesseesessessesseseesoeseesoeseeseeseeseeseeseese 5 79 Preparing the network connections unprotected sssesssseesrssessessessessessessesseseesseseesee 5 80 Installing a copper data Interlace arse ntaprssaarahtenuaueretsererteraeiasetnee eee 5 80 Installing a fiber data int rfaCE a cis senaccanascasnanaterncdusacciacisterianiareamntareacnansataiacieneusaseaes 5 81 Installing a management interface nissiisssrsssicsreresirsrtittttita tik virti rss rt esn EEE E rine 5 82 Connecting fiber cables to the CMU ssssssssessesseseeseeseeseesessessessessessesersoeseeseeseeseeseese 5 83 Preparing the network connections protected sssessssessessessesseseeseesseseesoeseeseeseeseesee 5 84 Installing an dut oft band protection splitter o ssiissiissrssrsisuriersisdrririidai oaeen 5 85 Installing a redundant copper interface eesesseesesseeseseeseeseeseeseesesseesessessesseseeseeseeses 5 86 Installing a redundant fiber interface ieecsceccccierccswesideciseercecanesiawien rin tnie r Nea NEENA 5 87 DG Pei a protect on caD serrare rainn EE AEAEE 5 88 Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment ssssss2s222 222222222222222202220u200u202220220uunnnnnnnnn 6 1 Task 1 Connecting tO The UN Esere ti eraren E EE EEE EErEE 6 2 Conhg ring the management PU cc denccsvenssecdesdcancenrecoserniiesaersenssbceactiseaeeseweiaesactanwse eens 6 2 Updating te ARF Dle erena EEEE Ra 6 5 Connecting
382. tion Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 128QAM 0 76 Yes 71 73 9 69 1 67 7 18 64QAM 0 82 Yes 61 8 76 2 71 6 70 3 18 32QAM 0 87 Yes 50 7 78 2 73 9 72 6 23 16QAM 0 88 Yes 41 3 81 1 77 75 8 23 8 PSK 0 86 No 30 4 78 8 77 5 2O Table 4 88 15 GHz ETSI with 28 MHz channel separation Modulation Fixed ref Capacity Mbit s Sensitivity dBm ACM thresh out dBm ACM thresh in dBm Max tx power dBm Min tx power dBm 256QAM 0 80 Yes 170 5 68 6 61 7 59 7 16 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 128QAM 0 84 Yes 151 1 71 4 68 66 8 18 64QAM 0 82 Yes 125 3 74 4 70 9 69 7 18 32QAM 0 85 Yes 101 2 76 9 73 7 72 4 23 16QAM 0 79 Yes 74 8 80 8 77 8 76 6 23 Wireless operation QPSK 0 86 Yes 20 3 87 8 26 8 8 PSK QPSK 0 80 0 80 No Yes 56 8 37 8 86 6 79 5 78 3 23 26 8 8 4 71 Wireless operation Chapter 4 Reference information Table 4 89 15 GHz ETSI with 56 MHz channel separation Modulation 256 256 128 64 32 16 QAM QAM QAM QAM QAM QAM 8PSK QPSK 0 91 0 80 0 82 0 82 0 84 0 79 0 80 0 80 Fixed ref Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Capacity Mbit s 368 6 347 1 303 5 255 2 202 7
383. tions not expressly approved by Motorola could void the user s authority to operate the system This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world This means that the system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to comply Safety testing The PTP 800 system has been tested for compliance with IEC 60950 1 2005 Edition 2 0 and IEC 60950 1 2001 Edition 1 0 with deviations applicable for Australia and New Zealand ETSI compliance testing The PTP 800 system has been tested for compliance to harmonized European standard EN 302 217 2 2 Digital systems operating in frequency bands where frequency coordination is applied This covers the essential requirements of Article 3 2 of the R amp TTE directive It has also been tested for compliance to the electro magnetic compatibility standards EN 301 489 1 V1 8 l and EN 301 489 4 V1 4 1 The limits for radiated and conducted radiations of Class A have been applied Compliance to the requirements of the R amp TTE directive has been confirmed by a Notified Body Canada compliance The PTP 800 system has been tested for compliance to RSS GEN and the band specific Technical Requirements documents in the SRSP series The test results have been scrutinized by a TCB who have issued a Certificate of Conformity phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 4 93 Electromagnetic compliance Chapter 4 Reference information Notifications General notification
384. tivity must be provided between the CMU data ports by the customer s network For more information see In band management on page 1 38 ANOTE For in band and out of band remote management after installation all four units providing a protected link are accessible from the user interface of each unit 6 14 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces Table 6 2 Management port attributes Attribute Management Port Auto Negotiation Management Port Auto Neg Advertisement Management Port Wireless Down Alert phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Meaning Enabled means that configuration of the out of band management Ethernet interface is automatically negotiated This is the default setting Disabled means that configuration is forced Use the same setting for both ends of the link Select the data rate that the auto negotiation mechanism will advertise as available on the out of band management Ethernet interface Use the same setting for both ends of the link Only select a data rate that is within the capability of connected network equipment otherwise loss of service may occur Only displayed when the Management Mode attribute is set to Out of Band Local or Out of Band When enabled this causes the Ethernet link to be dropped briefly when the wireless link drops This Signals to the connected network equipment that
385. to the PC and powering up ssessseseeseeseesesseesessesseesesseesessessesseseesseseeseeseeo 6 5 L ggng into the web InteriaCE eee ae eens ere ane renee rin een en EENEN 6 6 Task 2 Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces cccececececeeeeeecececececececeeececeeecsesceeeees 6 7 Managing the units during configuration and alignment cccececeecececeeneeeeeeeeeees 6 7 Configuring the IP interface and management mode cece cece ec ecececeeecnenenenenenenens 6 9 Reconnecting to the management PC 2 cece cece ececececececececececececececeeecnesenenenenenens 6 18 Task 3 Con guring quality OF S rvi E cccccwecsxtcetsuevesarcesawnciescteromendestecsotaestenadaatednarsesanaeeen 6 19 a E a E E E TE EA R 6 19 Task 4 Installing license keys eessssrssrerersresessessessessesresereresessresessossessessesseseersereessesresereees 6 21 Checking licensed capabDiltiCS vices geesssiayaateversietevenctauseseesl ERA E ARACEAE E ER i 6 21 Generating a new license key ssesessseseesesseesessessessesseesessessesseseesoesersoeseesersseseeseeseese 6 23 Entering a new license KEY cc cece cecececececececececncncncececeeeesenenesesenesesesesesesesececeeaegegeas 6 23 Tasko Uporading Soltwaro 9151000 a viccsacic vevace eeateneien sate E AES 6 24 Checking the installed software version cc cece cececececececececececneneneneneneneneneneneeneneas 6 24 Saving th system coniguratliOii eeenmene meteen tel
386. tomer data network and the system management network System management on page 1 44 Introduces the PTP 800 management system including the web interface installation configuration alerts and upgrades phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 1 1 Overview Chapter 1 Product description Overview Motorola PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave products are designed for Ethernet bridging over licensed point to point microwave links in selected licensed bands from 6 GHz to 38 GHz PTP 800 provides link capacity from 10 Mbit s to 368 Mbit s with configurable ETSI and FCC channel bandwidths from 7 to 56 MHz With upgradeable link capacity limits from 10 Mbit s to full capacity via software key the system offers exceptional cost efficiency and scalability Key features The key features of the PTP 800 include Support for licensed bands from 6 GHz to 38 GHz as listed in Table 1 1 Configurable channel bandwidths from 7 to 56 MHz Fixed modulation modes QPSK to 256 QAM Up to 368 Mbit s link capacity full duplex 1 1 Hot Standby link protection with an option for support of one or two antennas Effective quality of service with QOS 802 1p served by eight queues Progressive and asymmetric capacity options through purchase of software license keys Ultra low latency lt 115 us 368 Mbit s with 64 byte frames Split mount architecture with a compact indoor unit In band or out of band network management O
387. torola parts for repair could damage the equipment or void warranty Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair instructions phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 5 Contacting Motorola Portions of Motorola equipment may be damaged from exposure to electrostatic discharge Use precautions to prevent damage 6 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 Security advice Security advice Motorola systems and equipment provide security parameters that can be configured by the operator based on their particular operating environment Motorola recommends setting and using these parameters following industry recognized security practices Security aspects to be considered are protecting the confidentiality integrity and availability of information and assets Assets include the ability to communicate information about the nature of the communications and information about the parties involved In certain instances Motorola makes specific recommendations regarding security practices however the implementation of these recommendations and final responsibility for the security of the system lies with the operator of the system phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 7 Warnings cautions and notes Warnings cautions and notes The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this document and in all documents of this Motorola document set Warnings Warnings precede instructions that contain potentially hazardous situations Warnings a
388. tput voltage and receive power Align each pair of antennas by using Step 5 Step 6 and Step 7 of the Installation Wizard as described in the following procedures Step 5 Starting antenna alignment on page 6 61 Step 6 Aligning antennas on page 6 61 Step 7 Completing alignment on page 6 66 Step 5 Starting antenna alignment At both link ends check that the Step 5 Start Antenna Alignment page is displayed Figure 6 33 If necessary select menu option Installation Wizard and click through Steps 1 to 4 of the wizard Step 6 Aligning antennas Select Start Alignment at both link ends The Step 6 Antenna Alignment page is displayed Figure 6 35 ANOTE In the Step 6 Antenna Alignment page Figure 6 35 and Figure 6 39 Transmit Power Receive Power Vector Error and Link Loss are presented as an array of four elements These elements represent the maximum mean minimum and latest values respectively The maximum mean and minimum are calculated over a running one hour period During the alignment process ensure that antenna waveguide and coaxial components are not strained beyond their minimum bend radii phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 6 61 Task 11 Aligning antennas Chapter 6 Configuration and alignment Figure 6 35 Step 6 Antenna Alignment page searching for link step 6 Antenna Alignment T m bi 5 li m mi a T I mi 3 j if F ne SYSIEM IS NOW n antenna alignment moge Ine transmiter ts radiating at
389. traffic via the newly active PTP 800 ANOTE Ensure that the Ethernet switch has the ability to recognize this signal and learn the new traffic routing Management connectivity Management connectivity uses in band management and the management agent is reached via the Data port of the CMU and the customer network Local management from the Management port is not possible in this mode Grounding and lightning protection for protected ends The grounding and lightning protection requirements for a protected end are illustrated in Figure 2 6 1 34 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Ethernet bridging Ethernet bridging Customer network Transparent Ethernet service The PTP 800 Series provides an Ethernet service between the data port at a local CMU and the data port at an associated remote CMU The Ethernet service is based on conventional layer two transparent bridging and is equivalent to the Ethernet Private Line EPL service defined by the Metro Ethernet Forum MEF The service is transparent to untagged frames standard VLAN frames priority tagged frames provider bridged frames and provider backbone bridged frames In each case the service preserves MAC addresses VLAN ID Ethernet priority and Ethernet payload in the forwarded frame The maximum frame size for bridged frames in the customer network is 9600 octets Layer two control protocols The PTP 800 Series is transparen
390. ts best effort to carry on The configured radio license is not compatible with this ODU The ODU remains muted The ODU is booting This state is transient during CMU boot or after firmware download New ODU firmware is being downloaded Percentage completion is shown here The ODU firmware is too old If possible download will begin The connected device is an ODU but itis nota Motorola branded product The connected device is an IF card not an ODU No response can be detected from the ODU It is probably not connected The power supply to the ODU is at fault short circuited The power supply to the ODU is disabled It can only be enabled by Motorola phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Web based management Table 7 4 Transmitter Status attribute values Value Meaning Transmitting Normal transmission is in progress Inactive The ODU is mute because it is in the inactive mode Muted By User The user has disabled transmission using the Configuration Page Muted Configuration The transmission is enabled but the radio license is not Error compatible Muted ODU Fault Transmission is enabled but an ODU fault is preventing transmission Table 7 5 Data Port Status attribute values Value Meaning Down The data port is not in operation Copper Link Up The copper data port is operating normally Fiber Link Up The fiber data port is operating normally Table 7 6
391. tter sc scccrcdacaceechivewvsse ves vieeavevcpendursereneieawaideecenscuis 1 32 Figure 1 21 In band management connections for a protected end sssssssesesseseesessssese 1 33 Figure 1 22 In band management data paths protected linKS cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeenenes 1 39 Figure 1 23 Forwarding behavior in out of band local management mode 000s 1 41 Figure 1 24 Forwarding behavior in out of band management MOAE cececeeeeneeeeeees 1 41 Figure 1 25 Forwarding behavior in in band MOE cccccccececececececececececececececececececeeees 1 41 Figure 1 26 Inactive unit frame forwarding out of band management cececeeeeeeees 1 42 Figure 1 27 Inactive unit frame forwarding in band management cceceeeeeeeeeeeees 1 42 Figure 1 28 Protocol layers between Ethernet and wireless interfaces cccececeeeeeeees 1 43 Figure 1 29 Protocol layers between external interfaces and the management agenl 1 43 Figure 2 1 LINKPlanner profile VIO ssrcrsciererirsruiiiieiseieririrr iane T aE TERETERE sA A EEEE ERETT NEE 2 4 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 xi List of Figures Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure
392. u will not transfer directly or indirectly any product technical data or software to any country for which the United States Government requires an export license or other governmental approval without first obtaining such license or approval phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 3 3 Motorola Solutions Inc end user license agreement Chapter 3 Legal information Title and restrictions If you transfer possession of any copy of the Software and Documentation to another party outside of the terms of this agreement your license is automatically terminated Title and copyrights to the Software and Documentation and any copies made by you remain with Motorola and its licensors You will not and will not permit others to i modify translate decompile bootleg reverse engineer disassemble or extract the inner workings of the Software or Documentation ii copy the look and feel or functionality of the Software or Documentation iii remove any proprietary notices marks labels or logos from the Software or Documentation iv rent or transfer all or some of the Software or Documentation to any other party without Motorola s prior written consent or v utilize any computer software or hardware which is designed to defeat any copy protection device should the Software and Documentation be equipped with such a protection device If the Software and Documentation is provided on multiple types of media such as diskette CD ROM downloadable inter
393. units in the protection scheme The ability to force protection switches and inhibit protection switching Viewing the status of a protected link To view the status of a protected link select menu option Configuration Protected Link this option is only available when link protection is enabled The Protected Link page Figure 7 10 is displayed Figure 7 10 Protected Link page Protected Link Primary 10 10 10 12 i 10 10 10 13 Secondary A Fault Protection Disabled Mlake Hi Secondary Mlake Hi Secondary and Make Lo Primary Active Lo Primary Active Active Disable Fault Enable Fault Protection Protection 7 28 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Managing wireless link protection This page shows the same view of the link from the web interface of any of the four units The positions of the units on the page are determined by their Tx Hi Lo and Primary Secondary mode settings The symbols text and their meanings are shown in Table 7 12 Table 7 12 Protected Link page symbols and text Symbols or text Primary Secondary 10 10 10 12 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Meaning Units at this end of the link transmit on the higher frequency sub band always Shown on the left Units at this end of the link transmit on the lower frequency sub band always Shown on the right These units are configured to be active until a protection switch occurs The
394. upplying a maximum of 2 amps The Motorola supplied AC to DC converter is shown in Figure 5 22 For Specifications of the converter mains cables and DC connectors refer to AC to DC converter specifications on page 4 15 Figure 5 22 Motorola AC to DC converter For details of alternative power supply arrangements refer to Power supply considerations on page 2 16 If an alternative power supply is to be installed it must include the following safeguards The DC supply must have over current protection that does not exceed 3 amps A means of isolating the CMU from the DC supply must also be provided If a DC connector has to be attached to the DC output cable use the following pin connections Pin 1 48 Volts Pin 2 0 Volts Pin 3 Not Connected e Pin 4 Chassis ground Pin 1 is the left most pin on the CMU power connector when looking at the front panel phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 5 79 Preparing the network connections unprotected Chapter 5 Installation Preparing the network connections unprotected For unprotected ends perform this task to prepare the cables to connect the CMU to router ports switch ports or other equipment in the customer and optionally management networks The CMU is not normally connected to the network equipment until antenna alignment is complete See Task 13 Connecting link to the network on page 6 70 For all management modes out of band and in band decide whether the d
395. veveseseses 4 74 Table 4 94 18 GHz FCC and Canada with 50 MHz bandwidth ccc cc cc eceeneeeeenees 4 75 Table 4 95 18 GHz ETSI with 7 MHz channel Separation cece ceceeeececeeeeeeeecceseseeeuees 4 75 Table 4 96 18 GHz ETSI with 13 75 MHz channel separation ccsseccsscecrecereeereesreesreessseesees 4 76 Table 4 97 18 GHz ETSI with 27 5 MHz channel Separation ccccc cece cscs eeeeseceeeeseeeeeeees 4 76 Table 4 98 18 GHz ETSI with 55 MHz channel Separation 0c cece ec eceeeeceeeeeeseeeeeuees 4 77 Table 4 99 18 GHz Brazil with 13 75 MHz channel separation cece cece ec eceeeeceeeeenees 4 77 Table 4 100 18 GHz Brazil with 27 5 MHz channel separation cescsssccrcecreeereesreesreersseesees 4 78 Table 4 101 18 GHz Brazil with 55 MHz channel separation secccsecssecsseesreresersseesreresseesees 4 78 Table 4 102 23 GHz FCC and Canada with 10 MHz bandwidth cece ec eeeeee ences 4 79 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 xvii List of Tables Table 4 103 23 GHz FCC and Canada with 20 MHz bandwidth cece ececeeeeeeeeees 4 79 Table 4 104 23 GHz FCC and Canada with 30 MHz bandwidth eee cc ee nese ee eees 4 80 Table 4 105 23 GHz FCC and Canada with 40 MHz bandwidth cece ec ecee ee ee ones 4 80 Table 4 106 23 GHz FCC and Canada with 50 MHz bandwidth cece ec ec seca ee eees 4 81 Table 4 107 23 GHz ETSI with 7 MHz chan
396. with this Agreement 3 You may use the Software and Documentation provided that the use is in conformance with the terms set forth in this Agreement 4 Portions of the Software and Documentation are protected by United States copyright laws international treaty provisions and other applicable laws Therefore you must treat the Software like any other copyrighted material for example a book or musical recording except that you may either i make 1 copy of the transportable part of the Software which typically is supplied on diskette CD ROM or downloadable internet solely for back up purposes or ii copy the transportable part of the Software to a PC hard disk provided you keep the original solely for back up purposes If the Documentation is in printed form it may not be copied If the Documentation is in electronic form you may print out 1 copy which then may not be copied With regard to the copy made for backup or archival purposes you agree to reproduce any Motorola copyright notice and other proprietary legends appearing thereon Such copyright notice s may appear in any of several forms including machine readable form and you agree to reproduce such notice in each form in which it appears to the extent it is physically possible to do so Unauthorized duplication of the Software or Documentation constitutes copyright infringement and in the United States is punishable in federal court by fine and imprisonment 5 Yo
397. work interfaces for protected links ccc cecececececeeneneeeeeeenenenenes 9 84 Table 6 1 IP interface attributes ert aon ten sade vanes disios innia r n AAE a Eadan EAEan 6 13 Table 0 2 Management p rti a ier GS iat tecessaviovssanvagacause rncoeebiceviistidveiiorieenreqeqnaa EESE 6 15 Table 6 3 Data port UE tried hacris se prncteacexatsendbyeinnineten cid eeeiseenetvraetenetecieeieistseneieerietinencts 6 16 Table 6 4 Bridged Ethernet traffic attributes 2 0 0 cccccccececececececececececececececececececececeeees 6 17 Table 6 5 Quality OF service att CS ccxsreesnsansatansaneckorvacegereereeeiaieaagakareadtemmaneessapeseean 6 20 Table 6 6 Capability Summary attributes ccc cccececececececececsentneneneneneneseececececeseseseseeeaes 6 22 xviii phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 List of Tables Table 6 7 Change System Administrator Password attributes ccccecececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeenens 6 34 Table 6 8 Remote Management page SNMP attributes cece cececececececececeenenenenenenenens 6 38 Table 6 9 Remote Management page SMTP attributes 2 0 ccc cecec cscs ececececeeeeeeeeeesenenens 6 40 Table 6 10 Protection Configuration attributes cccccececececececececeencneseneseneseneseneneneneenens 6 45 Table 6 11 Step 1 Equipment Configuration attributes ce cccececececececececeencnenenenenenens 6 49 Table 6 12 Step 2 Radio License Configuration attributes cece cecececececeeeeeeeee
398. x 169 254 1 3 20d 209 E Abtan WHS semer adde gi Figure 6 3 Setting Speed amp Duplex Broadcom adaptor Broadcom NetXtreme 57xx Gigabit Controller Properties EN 802 1p 005 Flow Control Speed amp Duplex Wake Up Capabilities 6 4 phn 1478 012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Task 1 Connecting to the unit Updating the ARP table All PTP 800 units are supplied with the same default IP address When the management PC is connected to a PTP 800 unit it creates an association between the default IP address 169 254 1 1 and the MAC address of the PTP 800 If two or more PTP 800 units are being configured this association must be removed after each unit has been configured To remove the association between IP address and MAC address in the ARP table of the management PC proceed as follows Open a command prompt window on the PC Input the command arp d 169 254 1 1 When this address is next used the PC will connect it with the MAC address of the unit being configured and update the ARP table with the new association Connecting to the PC and powering up To connect the CMU to the PC and power up the unit proceed as follows Connect the PC Ethernet port to the Management port of the CMU using a straight through or crossed Cate cable e Switch on the CMU power supply Wait until the CMU status indicator shows green steady or green slow blink This normally occurs w
399. xtent that such terms and conditions are not inconsistent with the rights provided to you under the aforementioned provisions of the FAR and DFARS as applicable to the particular procuring agency and procurement transaction phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Motorola Solutions Inc end user license agreement Term of license Your right to use the Software will continue in perpetuity unless terminated as follows Your right to use the Software will terminate immediately without notice upon a breach of this Agreement by you Within 30 days after termination of this Agreement you will certify to Motorola in writing that through your best efforts and to the best of your knowledge the original and all copies in whole or in part in any form of the Software and all related material and Documentation have been destroyed except that with prior written consent from Motorola you may retain one copy for archival or backup purposes You may not sublicense assign or transfer the license or the Product except as expressly provided in this Agreement Any attempt to otherwise sublicense assign or transfer any of the rights duties or obligations hereunder is null and void Governing law This Agreement is governed by the laws of the United States of America to the extent that they apply and otherwise by the laws of the State of Illinois Assignment This agreement may not be assigned by you without Moto
400. y inactive unit This should only occur during installation or maintenance when the wireless link is being aligned The link name is configured differently at each end of the wireless link This may be because of A configuration error in defining the link name at one of the PTP 800s See Configuring encryption in an operational protected link on page 6 31 This unit is aligned to the wrong link partner Check the calibration status and arrange for re calibration of the unit Configuration error in defining use of encryption over the wireless link phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide SNMP Trap name SNTPSyncTrap wirelessLinkStatusTrap dataPortConfigurationMis matchTrap dataPortDisabledWarning Trap Description The PTP 800 has failed to synchronize its time with the SNTP server The status of the wireless link has changed The detection of Ethernet fragments runt packets on the data Ethernet port when the link is in full duplex operation The Administrative Status of the data Ethernet interface has been set to disabled phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 Managing alarms and events Cause and action If SNTP Sync fails then check the server settings in the Remote Management page or disable SNTP and set the time locally See Setting the real time clock on page 6 71 This shows the status that the wireless link has entered If the link remai
401. y is completed To force protection switches click on the buttons on the Protected Link page The text in the buttons varies depending upon which units are active and which are inactive Assuming that the initial status is Primary to Primary Figure 7 10 the buttons and their functions are as follows Make Hi Secondary Active This changes the Figure 7 10 configuration to Primary 10 10 10 12 10 10 10 13 Secondary phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 7 31 Managing wireless link protection Chapter 7 Operation Make Hi Secondary and Lo Primary Active This changes the Figure 7 10 configuration to Tx Lo Primary 10 10 10 12 10 10 10 13 Secondary Make Lo Primary Active This changes the Figure 7 10 configuration to Primary 10 10 10 12 10 10 10 13 Secondary 7 32 phn 1478_012v000 May 2011 PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide Managing wireless link protection Enabling and disabling fault protection The Protected Link page can be used to enable or disable fault protection switching during the operation of the link When switching is disabled a fault will not cause a protection switch but the user may still manually switch This feature is intended to be used during maintenance actions where the user does not wish faults to change which CMU ODU is active Enable and disable fault protection using the buttons on the Protected Link page The text in the butt
402. ystem configuration on page 6 25 Restoring the configuration file on page 7 57 Task 9 Configuring protection interface on page 6 42 Managing wireless link protection on page 7 28 Comparing actual to predicted performance on page 6 69 Checking system statistics and counters on page 7 40 Resetting system statistics and counters on page 7 45 Task 10 Configuring wireless interface on page 6 47 Task 11 Aligning antennas on page 6 59 Upgrading to a new software version on page 6 28 7 5 Web based management Chapter 7 Operation Menu option Procedures Remote Management Configuring generation of SNMP notifications on page 6 36 Configuring generation of email messages on page 6 39 Setting the real time clock on page 6 71 Diagnostic Alarms Configuring generation of diagnostics alarms on page 6 40 Diagnostic Plotter Using the diagnostics plotter on page 7 45 Changing the diagnostics refresh period on page 7 48 CSV Download Downloading diagnostic data on page 7 47 Change Password Changing password on page 6 34 License Key Checking licensed capabilities on page 6 21 Entering a new license key on page 6 23 Properties Protecting access to the summary and status pages on page 6 35 Changing the log out timer on page 7 39 Reboot Rebooting or reviewing reboot reasons on page 7 49 Viewing the system summary To display the System Summary page select menu option Home The System Summary page Figure 7 4 contains a high level summary o

PTP 800 Licensed Ethernet Microwave User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents